1 1

J J J 3 / J £> 3J _f J

/ J i J2J

Second Edition

Nonintensive Volume 3
 NOTES TO THE READER
as curriculum
The Nonintensive American Language Course ( NALC), Volume 3, is designed
for the third year of a nonintensive language training program. This volume
includes
activitie s and homewo rk
32 lessons; enhancing these lessons are coordinated listening
be taught
exercises. Each lesson requires approximately four hours of class time and
may
listening skills
over several class periods. Additional time is required for the exercises in the
and homework textbooks.
—
Volume 3 deals with vocabulary, grammar, and language skills speaking,
listening,
—
reading, and writing as well as sociolinguistic appropriateness. It integrates these
of the language in various activities and provides the student with numerou s
areas
opportun ities
to practice naturally spoken English. The materials are sequentially designed . One block
d and
of instructional material builds on the previous block. The objectives are reinforce
textbook is accompa nied by
recycled throughout the materials. Each instructor and student
listening exercise s
an audio CD. This recording contains the audio needed to complete the
which are part of the lesson of this volume. Homework exercises and language skills
the
activities for every lesson ensure that the student has sufficient practice to master
objectives.

Page iii
 Language Components in the NALC

S FUNCTION
Functions are the ways we use the language to communicate. The functions introduce
topics that the student may have to deal with and the language and actions needed
in those
situations. Because the target population is military students, there are semi-technical or
military-oriented functions in every volume. The development of the functions begins with
mechanical drills and exercises and culminates in communicative exercises that allow
the
student to draw on knowledge from previous exercises or from personal experience.

v> VOCABULARY
Objective vocabulary consists of high frequency terms and military-oriented terms
that
the students will be required to produce and respond to in class and in the listening skills
activities and homework exercises. The objective terms are bolded the first time they
appear in the lesson and are subject to being tested on quizzes..

V GRAMMAR
The grammatical presentations consist of structures that the student will need in order to
communicate effectively in a variety of situations. Many of the structures are presented in
context. Some are presented with paradigms or examples.
The number of grammar objectives varies from lesson to lesson. Activities, which fulfill
these grammar objectives, are found throughout the lesson in classroom activities, the
listening skills text , and the homework text.

0 $ O SKILLS
Skills taught in the NALC are those language skills which the student will need to
communicate successfully in academic or interpersonal settings. Many of the skills are
specifically designed to complement military training. The inclusion of activities that
provide the student with focused , progressive practice in the areas of listening, speaking
,
reading, and writing is one of the most significant features of the NALC curriculum.
The number of skills varies in each lesson. Skills are sequenced from simple to complex.
A single basic skill is introduced at the lower levels and is later recycled as part of a more
complex skill at higher levels. For example, at a lower level, a student is given an objective
that requires information to be classified. Later, at a higher level, the student may be given

Page iv
an objective that requires an article to be outlined. In order to outline, the student must
first know how to classify information. This sequencing and recycling of skills is done for all
of the speaking, reading, writing, and listening skills presented .
Note that in order to develop your students’ speaking skills, it is essential that you
emphasize oral language production in the classroom. For this reason, we recommend that
language exercises be done orally whenever possible .
This icon indicates language skill activities and exercises that have an oral
component. In the classroom, they can be delivered in two ways. Instructors can
read the text provided in the book or play the recording. Recorded language skills
texts are available on CD or tape. They are packaged with the set of CDs or tapes
that accompany the Listening Skills Text.

Instructional Materials
Student Text
In addition to the 32 lessons, the Student Text (ST) contains a number of important
features. The Preface states the overall purpose of the course and lists the contents of the
instructional package. The section titled Notes to the Reader contains a brief overview of
the course and its contents. The Scope and Sequence Charts that follow show the content
of each lesson in the current book. The four columns outline the new material as it relates
to the language acquisition components. The Table of Contents lists the page numbers for
the different lessons in this book. The first page of each lesson is the preview page which
identifies the function, grammar, vocabulary, or skills presented in the classroom activities.
This page summarizes the objectives of the lesson. Appendices which provide useful
information for the student and instructor and make specific items easy to find, are at the
end of the text.

Homework Text
The activities in the Homework Text (HT) provide the student with additional practice
to reinforce the objectives. They also serve as a means of identifying student language
deficiencies. There are approximately 30 minutes of homework activities for each lesson.
The answers to exercises are at the back of the book.

Listening Skills Materials

The listening materials include 30 audiotapes or 15 CDs with approximately thirty minutes
of listening activities for the language laboratory for each lesson. Each student should have
a Listening Skills Text (LST). The listening activities are completely self-contained and
offer a complete but different presentation of the lesson objectives. While the activities have
been designed primarily to support the lesson, they can also be used for independent study.
Correct responses are contained on the recordings or in the answer pages of the LST.

Page v
NALC Mol. 3: Scope and Sequence for Lessons 1 - 5

Lesson Vocabulary Functions Grammatical Structures Skills I

1 I’d like to open an Carrying >- Future indicated by Fill out bank forms
account. out banking present progressive Write a paragraph
transactions Roger is going on from matched
At the bank vacation next week. phrases
Making a deposit
Withdrawing money

The cake is delicious. N/A Adverbial clauses with Scan for information
2 because Take notes in a box
Tastes outline
> Linking verbs
Listen and select the
topic of an oral text

3 He was talking when vN/A > - Past progressive Identify the topic and
he hit the car. I was doing my main idea of a written
homework last night. text
> A bicycle accident Select the topic of an
Reporting an oral text
accident

You must obey traffic Inquiring and Indirect commands and Scan a menu for
4 laws. answering questions requests with ask and information
about a traffic tell Follow oral directions
Traffic laws accident > Reporting commands Write sentences and
and requests paragraphs from
-
> Comparing and
contrasting with the
matched phrases

same, different, similar,

like, and alike

Ted can repair the car. > N/A > N/A Write paragraphs
5 Follow oral directions
In the garage
> My roommate
A little white lie
Conversations

Lesson 5 also reviews all vocabulary introduced in Lessons 1 - 4.

Page vii
NALC Vol. 3: Scope and Sequence for Lessons 6 - 1 0

Lesson Vocabulary Functions Grammatical Structures Skills

Can you give me Asking for and Using should to ask for
6 any advice? giving advice and give advice
Write a short dictated
text
Advice and Using could to make Identify the topic of an
suggestions suggestions oral text
Does Mike drive Adverbs of manner with -ly Expand sentences with
safely? to express manner suggested words or
Using How in questions phrases
about manner

He realized that the N/A Verbs of mental activity +

7 tank was empty. that noun clause
Identify the topic of an
oral text
Gas station Write sentences and
At the motel paragraphs formed from
matched phrases

I’m sorry about your Apologizing and

8 window . responding to
Predicate adjective + that
+ adverbial clause
Identify the topic and
main idea of a written
apologies Apologize for + gerund text
An apology
Expand sentences by
combining elements

Tell me how to ... N/A How + to -infinitive after

9 find out, forget, know,
Select the topic and
main idea of an oral text
Vending
learn, remember, show, Combine related
machines
teach, tell, ask (Manner / sentences
What do you do Method)
when...?
Using NO before
a noun
Please teach me
how to operate
this machine.

Sue exercises Asking for Adverb clauses of time

10 before she goes to and giving with after , before, until,
Recognize transitional /
connective words and
work. instructions when, and while phrases in an oral text
BE + supposed to

Lesson 10 also reviews all vocabulary introduced in Lessons 6 - 9.

Page viii
NALC Vol. 3: Scope and Sequence for Lessons 1 1 - 1 6

Lesson Vocabulary Functions Grammatical Structures Skills |

1 like shopping in N/A Prepositions of location: Select or write the topic
11 the mall. above, across (from), at, and main idea of an oral
behind, below, by, in, text
Royal Shopping in back/ front of , near, Substitute elements of
Center next (to), on, under a sentence to create a
-
> At the Logar
Mall
Gerunds as direct objects paragraph
of verbs begin, enjoy,
finish, like, mind, start

Let me introduce... Greeting and Predicate adjective + Write paragraphs

12 introducing -
fo infinitive: afraid, glad, Identify word stress in
Making people and happy, pleased, ready, the spoken word
introductions responding sorry, upset Make an outline
Neighbors appropriately

Can you change a N/A Simple present for future Give and carry out
13 flat tire? tense instructions
The bus from Dallas Determine the topic and
Changing a tire arrives early tomorrow main idea of a text
morning. Select the title of a text
Make an outline

Would you - Making and Could / can, will / would Select the best
14 introduce your
>
responding to as requests / responses summary
family? polite requests Reported speech Scan text for information
(Reporting commands) Combine related
Collecting family sentences
pictures

What can 1 do? N/A Expressing ability with Identify word stress in
15 BE + able to the spoken word
Occupations Expand sentences
My young son is able to
read the newspaper.

How far is it to...? Making small Using How long...? in Match phrases to make
16 talk questions about duration sentences, sequence
New Years in and How far...? to ask them logically and
New York City about distance and time rewrite as a paragraph
required to travel Scan a chart for
Using impersonal It information
as subject to refer to Select the best
temperature, weather, summary
time, and distance

Lesson 16 also reviews all vocabulary introduced in Lessons 11 - 15.

Page ix
NALC Vol. 3: Scope and Sequence for Lessons 1 7 - 2 1
Lesson Vocabulary Functions Grammatical Structures Skills I
17 Have you made an -
> Making a medical >- Present perfect { be/have Identify the topic of
appointment? appointment with since/foi ) an oral text
Medical Mary has had a fever Read instructions to
appointments since Monday. draw an image
Is Dr. Cole in? Rex has been sick for
a week.

Has he been feeling

18 sick?
N/A Present Perfect
Progressive
Determine a word’s
meaning from context
Describing Rex has been feeling Listen to dialog and
symptoms sick all week. select the correct
inference
Write from a dictation

1 will learn to drive

19 with caution.
Asking for and
giving information
Verb + to-infinitive of
purpose
Listen and complete
a chart with symbols
about safe I failed to learn the
The driving lesson driving rules of the road.
- What do you think?
>
- Road signs and
>
rules

What’s wrong with

20 my car?
N/A Adjective (noun + suffix
-y)
Listen for specific
information giving
He needs a Too + adjective + location
mechanic. (for/to) to express Identify the topic and
excessiveness for a main idea of a written
particular purpose text
Linking verbs
become/ get + subject
complement to show
change in condition

1 would like a refund,

21 please.
Expressing
dissatisfaction
Indefinite pronouns
Did anyone go to the
Identify the topic and
main idea of an oral
Satisfaction and game? text
>
dissatisfaction >- Adjective clauses Write a complex
I’m the one who broke sentence by
the glass. combining two
sentences
Lesson 21 also reviews all vocabulary introduced in Lessons 17 - 20.

Page x
NALC Vol. 3: Scope and Sequence for Lessons 22 - 26
Lesson Vocabulary Functions Grammatical Structures Skills 1
That movie is Asking for and Could for past ability Use the dictionary
22 entertaining. giving advice We could see Bob, to determine
about television but he couldn’t see the meaning of
Entertainment on shows and movies homonyms
TV us.
(subsumed into Write a dictated
Watching TV the vocabulary) paragraph
That’s a great show.

They serve good food N/A Prepositions of time Write the topic, main
23 here.
>
(at, on, in, before, after, idea and title of a !
from, until, till, to, for, written text
Restaurants and since)
service
Select the best
Reported speech with summary from a
told reading
> Did you tell Jane that
you had her book?
Yes, 1 told her that 1
had it.

The soldiers haven’t N/A Present perfect tense Listen and select
24 moved for an hour. to connect past with the targeted
present phoneme(s)
The sky is clear.
I ’ve studied English Identify the title
The weather for five years. and main idea of a
cleared up. written text
I’ve studied German
since 1 was a child.

If the weather is nice, Asking about and lf + present/future/ Use context clues
25 I’ll go to the beach. expressing the modal Take notes and
effect of conditions If she asks me, I’ll go. answer oral
on future actions Should 1 go if she questions
or situations asks? Orally summarize a
written text

Education in the USA. N/A Coordinating Identify the identical

26 conjunctions so and or sound from among
Public school 3 distractors
education
Listen for specific
Higher education information

Lesson 26 also reviews all vocabulary introduced in Lessons 22 - 25.

Page xi
NALC Vol. 3: Scope and Sequence for Lessons 27 - 30
Lesson Vocabulary Functions Grammatical Structures Skills 1
27 I’ve made up my - Asking and talking
> Time expressions: Predict meaning
mind. about decisions already, no longer, yet, from context and
anymore, any longer, select the correct
> Linda’s decisions still definition
> Paul’s decisions
•
Present perfect for Orally summarize a
indefinite past written text
I’ve been to Italy. -
> Listen for specific
Have you ever information
cooked?

We could add on a Eliciting and Could for possibility and Listen and select
28 room. expressing conjecture specified phonemes
possibility > The questions could
•
> Listen for specific
•

> Remodeling a home

be too difficult for information
The addition with a Simon. Predict meaning
fireplace
Reported speech with from context and
say select the correct
> 1 said (that) Jan definition
wasn’t here?

Let’s have a get- > N/A Use emotive adjectives Read a text and
29 together! derived from verbs with write a summary
-ed and -ing : excite, Listen and select
Let’s have a get- interest, bore, confuse,
together. the targeted
tire, frighten phoneme(s)
> Using a small
Role-play a situation
stereo.

Have you gone to N/A Comparative adverbs >- Listen and select
30 Bluebird Lake this with -er (+ than): earlier, words with different
year? farther, faster, harder, sounds
higher, later, lower, >- Listen and select
Do you like to go nearer, slower, sooner, words with same
fishing? and straighter sounds
-
Present perfect review > Predict meaning
from context and
select the correct
definition
Orally summarize a
written text

Page xii
NALC Vol. 3: Scope and Sequence for Lessons 31 - 32
Lesson Vocabulary Functions Grammatical Structures Skills
We used to hunt Asking and Used to for past routines Underline important
31 ducks. talking about and conditions words and phrases in
past routines and John used to study in a text
> Do you like to go conditions
hunting? this school when he Identify the identical
was a child. sound from among 3
I enjoy the great distractors
outdoors. Would for past routines
We would play in the >- Combine independent
park every evening. clauses

Review of Z£ Review Orally summarize a

32 vocabulary from
Y

Adverbs of time written text

Lessons 25 to 31 Reported speech with >- Underline answers to
say oral questions about
Emotive adjectives text
derived from verbs Combine 2
Talk about past routines independent clauses
and conditions using
used to
Talk about past routines
using would
If-clauses
Verb tense review
Present perfect

Page xiii
 TABLE OF CONTENTS
Lesson 1 I’d Like to Open an Account 1
Lesson 2 The Cake Is Delicious 13
Lesson 3 He Was Talking When He Hit the Car. 23
Lesson 4 You Must Obey Traffic Laws 35
Lesson 5 Ted Can Repair the Car 49
Lesson 6 Should I Ask LT Clark for Help? 63
Lesson 7 He Realized That the Tank Was Empty 77
Lesson 8 I Apologize for Breaking Your Window 87
Lesson 9 Tell Me How To 99
Lesson 10 Sue Exercises Before She Goes to Work Ill
Lesson 11 I Like Shopping in the Mall 125
Lesson 12 Let Me Introduce 137
Lesson 13 Can You Change a Flat Tire? 149
Lesson 14 Would You Introduce Your Family? 161
Lesson 15 What Kind of Work Can I Do? 177
Lesson 16 How Far Is It From El Paso to Houston? 191
Lesson 17 Have You Made an Appointment? 205
Lesson 18 Has He Been Feeling Sick? 221
Lesson 19 I Will Learn To Drive with Caution 233
Lesson 20 What’s Wrong with My Car? 249
Lesson 21 I Would Like a Refund , Please 261
Lesson 22 That Movie Is Entertaining 277
Lesson 23 This Restaurant Serves Good Food 291
Lesson 24 The Soldiers Haven’t Moved for an Hour 303
Lesson 25 If the Weather Is Nice , I’ll Go to the Beach 315
Lesson 26 Education in the USA 329
Lesson 27 I’ve Made Up My Mind 345
Lesson 28 We Could Add On a Room 363
Lesson 29 Let’s Have a Get-Together! 379
Lesson 30 Have You Gone to Bluebird Lake This Year? 393
Lesson 31 We Used To Hunt Ducks 405
Lesson 32 I’ve Gone to the Beach Eveiy Year 421

Page xv
Appendices:

A: Objective Vocabulary A- l

B: Structure List B- l

C: Principals Part of Certain Irregular Verbs C- l

D: List of Contractions D- l

E: Verb Forms E-1

F: Armed Forces Ranks and Abbreviations F-1

G: Punctuation and Capitalization G- l

H: Resource Materials H- l

Page xvi
 I’ D LIKE TO OPEN AN ACCOUNT. LESSON 1

-
. f'

FUNCTION: CARRYING OUT BANKING TRANSACTIONS

Laura: I’d like to open a checking account.
Clerk: Fill out this form; then well open the account for you.

Q: GRAMMAR: USING THE PRESENT PROGRESSIVE FOR FUTURE

Steve is eating lunch at home tomorrow.

VOCABULARY:

Noun Verb Other

account signature close / open an account immediately
bill slip complete right away
card wallet deposit right here
cash withdrawal fill out safe
checkbook hide / hid / hid soon
checking account lose / lost / lost
deposit save
form spend / spent / spent
information take / took / taken
passport take / took / taken out (of )
savings account withdraw / withdrew / withdrawn

Student Text Page 1

 NOTES
LANGUAGE SKILLS

WRITING: WRITING PARAGRAPHS

Arrange ideas and write logically
sequenced sentences to form a cohesive
paragraph.
FILLING OUT FORMS
Use general sample materials to practice
writing specific information on a form.

Page 2 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 1

^ VOCABULARY: AT THE BANK

Repeat the new words, and then read the dialog.

Teller: Good morning. May I help you?

Susan: Yes, I want to open an account .

Teller: A checking account or a savings account?

Susan: How is a checking account different from a savings

account?
Teller: With a checking account , you have a checkbook and
can pay for things right away. A savings account is for
saving your money for a long time. You can withdraw
the money when you want to spend it.

Susan: Well, I think I need to open both accounts , please.

Teller: Fine. Do you also want a credit card and a debit card?

Susan: What are they?

Teller: With a credit card , you

can buy things first and
pay for them later. With a
debit card , you can pay for
things immediately from
your bank account. You can
also take money out of the
ATM machines. If you lose
one of your cards, call the
bank right away.

Susan: That’s great. I’d like both cards, please.

Teller: Okay. First, we’ll need some information. Please

complete these forms, and I’ll need some identification.

Student Text Page 3

 ,
NO £s

^ VOCABULARY: MAKING A DEPOSIT

Look at the new words, and then read the dialog.
Susan: Okay. I filled out the forms, and I have my passport for
identification .
Teller: Good. Everything looks
okay. Do you want to make a
deposit today? .
..

Susan: Yes, I want to deposit $300

in checking and $300 in
savings.

Teller: That’s fine. Now I need your

signature on these forms .
Sign your name right here .
{ after signing )
Teller: Good . Here’s your bank card with your account numbers,
and this is your checkbook. The bank will mail more
checks to you soon .
Susan: Okay.
Teller: The bank will also mail the credit card and debit card
with PIN numbers.
Susan: PIN numbers?
Teller: A PIN is a Personal Identification Number. Both cards
have a PIN. Don’ t keep the PIN numbers in your wallet .
Memorize them , and hide the numbers in a safe place.

EXERCISE

Read the statements. Write T for true and F for false.

1. Susan completed the forms.

2. She wanted to make a deposit immediately.
3. She wanted to withdraw half of her money from checking.
4. She used her driver’s license for identification .
5. The checking and the savings accounts have PIN numbers.
6. She can deposit money with her credit card .

Page 4 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 1

 VOCABULARY: WITHDRAWING MONEY
Read the dialog, and then practice it with another student.

Teller: Good morning. May I help you?

Maj Morris: Yes, thank you. I want to take some money out of my
savings account.

Teller: Do you want to make a withdrawal or close your

account?
Maj Morris: I want to make a withdrawal. I’m going on vacation, and
I need to take some cash with me. I would like ten-dollar
bills, please.

Teller: You need to fill out this withdrawal slip. Be sure to sign it j
at the bottom.
Maj Morris: Thank you. I’ll complete the form and return it in a
1
minute.

Teller: Okay.

EXERCISE A

Using the new vocabulary, work with another student and make
five questions about the dialog above. Then, have other students
answer the questions.

1.

2.

3.

4. j

Student Text Page 5

 NOTES EXERCISE B

Use the vocabulary words in this lesson to complete the dialogs.

1. Teller: May I help you?

Customer: Yes, please. I’d like to an account.

Teller: What kind of account do you want , a

account or a savings account?
Customer: I want a checking

Teller: We have different kinds of checking accounts. How much

would you like to ?

Customer: One thousand dollars.

Teller: Okay. Please read this about the

accounts and then sign this card.

I 2. Teller: May I help you, sir?

Customer: I want to this check, please.

Teller: Yes, sir. I’ll need two kinds of identification. You can use
your driver’s license and military ID.

Customer: I don’t have a driver’s license, but I have my

Will that be okay for one?

Teller: That’ll be fine. I’ll need your right

here on the back of the check. Now, would you like this in
large or small bills?

Customer: I need five twenty-dollar

Page 6 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 1

 NOTES
FUNCTION: CARRYING OUT BANKING
TRANSACTIONS

-
Role play a situation with a partner .
Dialog 1 Open an Account

teller customer
• offer to help • ask about opening an account
• ask about kind of account • say the kind of account
• ask about amount to deposit •say the amount
• give instructions • polite response

Dialog 2 Make a Deposit

teller customer
• offer to help • say the need
• give deposit slip • ask for help
• give information • polite response
Dialog 3 Make a Withdrawal

teller customer
• offer to help • say the need
•give location of withdrawal slips • ask for help filling it out
• give information • polite response; ask for kind
• response of bills

0
Tm*.

J
Student Text Page 7
 NOTES
$ GRAMMAR: FUTURE INDICATED BY PRESENT
PROGRESSIVE TENSE

Read the paragraphs.

Tim and Pam are flying to Paris

tonight. They’re arriving tomorrow
morning and are staying there for four
days.
After Paris, they’re taking a train to
Switzerland and are staying in Zurich
for a week.
After Switzerland, Tim and Pam
are traveling to Italy for three days.
Then they’re returning home to Dallas.

Future Tense Verb Forms

will arrive
is going to arrive at 6:00.
is arriving
arrives
The present progressive is sometimes used to talk about a
future action.
Lt Jones is driving to Florida next week.
I’m staying at home this weekend.
Are you going to the airport by taxi tomorrow?

Use
a time phrase
for clearer meaning.
T I’ m studying English
next .
year

/ \ <
n
Page 8
d* Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 1
 EXERCISE A NOTES

Fill in the blank with a present progressive verb.

play study clean eat

return speak take off move

1. Your plane at 12:00 noon.

2. We to California in June.
3. you from Florida in March?
4. SSgt Jones his garage next Saturday.
5. Maj Smith to my class tomorrow.
6. Our class English grammar after lunch.
7. you dinner at a restaurant
tonight?
8. I soccer with them at 4:00 this afternoon .

EXERCISE B

Change the sentence to present progressive for future.

Example: Tom will stay with his sister next week.

Tom is staying with his sister next week .
1. The train won’t arrive in ten minutes.
2. Flight 300 is going to leave in an hour.
3. Will he fly home next year?
4. I won’t go to the gym after class.
5. Are you going to wear your uniform tomorrow?
6. The bus will depart at 2 o’clock.
7. Will you eat dinner with us tonight?
8. I’m going to leave after lunch.

Student Text Page 9

 NOTES
WRITING: WRITING PARAGRAPHS

Match the phrases to form sentences. Then write a paragraph

with the sentences. The first sentence is done for you.

A. b 1. First , I went a. fifty dollars.

c 2. Next, I filled out b. to the bank.
o 3. Finally, I withdrew c. a withdrawal slip.

First I went to the bank. Next, I filled out a withdrawal slip .

Finally, I withdrew fifty dollars.

B. 1. We are flying a. next week.

2. We’re taking a taxi b. in Rome tomorrow.
3. Our plane is arriving c. to Italy tonight.
4. We’re coming back d. to the airport.

C. 1. Marie wanted to a. in her wallet.

2. The teller told her b. fifty dollars for her.
3. The teller counted c. cash a check.
4. She put the money d. go to the grocery store.
5. Now she can e. to sign it on the back.

Page 10 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 1

 NOTES
WRITING: FILLING OUT FORMS

Fill out the deposit and withdrawal slips.

1. Carol Jones wants to deposit some money into her checking

account. She has one check for $25, one check for $50, and a $100
bill. She wants to get $5 in cash. Fill out the deposit slip for Carol.
Her checking account number is 010 20 345.

CHECKING ACCOUNT DEPOSIT SLIP

western -Dcimv.
PLEASE LIST EACH SEPARATELY
PO Box 555
San Antonio, TX $ 0
CURRENCY
Date COIN
CHECK

Sign here for cash. TOTAL

Deposit to the account of: CASH BACK
TOTAL DEPOSIT

Account No.

2. Carol Jones wants to withdraw $50 from her savings account. Her
savings account number is 010 20 217. Fill out the withdrawal slip
for Carol.

SAVINGS ACCOUNT WITHDRAWAL SLIP

Western Bank
PO Box 555 \ WESTERN BANK
San Antonio, TX '

Date

DOT J . ARS

Savings Account No.

Signature

Student Text Page 11

 -User Notes-

Page 12 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 1

 THE CAKE IS DELICIOUS. LESSON 2
.
'

. . . : - "
iiw . . . . mm

f /
_

~
(j j) GRAMMAR : ADVERBIAL CLAUSES WITH BECAUSE
Sam is tired because he stayed up late last night.

LINKING VERBS
The coffee smells good. The bread tastes delicious.

mmmmmmamm .

VOCABULARY:

Noun Verb Other

lemon feel / felt / felt because
look bitter
smell salty
sound sour
taste sweet

Student Text Page 13

 NOTES
LANGUAGE SKILLS

READING: SCANNING FOR INFORMATION

Scan a written text for specific
information.

WRITING: MAKING AN OUTLINE

Organize ideas in an outline as
preparation for writing a paragraph.

o LISTENING: IDENTIFYING THE TOPIC

Listen to a text and select its topic.

Page 14 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 2

 NOTES
GRAMMAR : USING BECAUSE JO CONNECT
CLAUSES

Using because to connect clauses

The word because is used to tell the reason for something. It
can come before or after the main clause.
Because I lost my wallet, I don’t have any money.
I don’t have any money because I lost my wallet.
When we speak, we put the clause with because last.
When we write, we can put the clause with because first.

Read the dialogs, and then look at the chart.

1. Maj Sims: Why was Lt Diaz late this morning?

Lt Reed: Lt Diaz was late because he didn’t wake up on time.

2. Nancy: Are you tired because you worked out yesterday?

Susan: No, I’m tired because I worked hard today.

3. Robert: Is he studying because he has a test?

Thomas: No, he’s studying because he wants to learn the language, j

:
EXERCISE A

Match the clauses on the left with the clauses on the right to
form sentences.

1. She went to the doctor a. the school won’t buy one. j

2. Because he was thirsty, b. I stayed inside.
3. Because it was raining, c. we didn’t have class.
1
4. Bob is studying d. Joe drank water.
5. Because the teacher was e. because he has a test .
absent,
6. Because a new bus is f. because she felt sick.
expensive,

Student Text Page 15

 NOTES EXERCISE B

Answer the questions using because .

Hf -
tip
(h' M

1. Why is she smiling? 2. Why is she studying?

11 t
m
3. Why are they looking at a 4. Why is he going to the post
map? office?

EXERCISE C

Work in pairs. Ask Why questions and your partner will answer
by using because .

Example: Student 1: I took the bus to school today.

Student 2: Why did you take the bus to school today?
Student 1: I took the bus because my car is the garage.

Page 16 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 2

 NOTES
VOCABULARY: TASTES
Repeat the new words; then read the sentences.

*i
9&-
it:
H
ft

1. The cookie tastes sweet . 2. The chips taste salty.

I

\M
3. This lemon tastes sour .

EXERCISE
4.
E
This medicine tastes bitter.

Ask and answer questions about taste .

Example: Student 1: How does ice cream taste?

Student 2: It tastes sweet.

black coffee 5. chocolate pie

french fries 6. tomatoes
cookies 7. potato chips
green apples 8. black tea

Student Text Page 17

 I v\ l /

NOTES
Q
-
'
GRAMMAR: LINKING VERBS

Read the paragraph, and then study the chart with your
instructor.
Tom came home late from work.
He didn’t have time to stop at the
I grocery store. He had some bread in
1 his apartment and wanted to make
sandwiches for dinner. The bread
m looked new, but it felt hard. It smelled
okay, but it tasted old . The bread
was old. Tom didn’t want to make
sandwiches with old bread . He needed
to make something else for dinner.

Using linking verbs

Use a linking verb to connect a subject and an adjective.
The bread looked new, but it felt hard.
It smelled okay.
It tasted old.
The bread was old.

EXERCISE A

j Fill in the blanks with linking verbs. Use a verb other than be .
|
1. I think the eggs are bad. They awful.
2. You sad today. Is anything wrong?
3. The medicine bitter.
j 4. She talked to Tom on the phone. He happy
5. The refrigerator warm. Is it working today?

6. What so good in the kitchen? Who’s cooking?

I
7. That jacket expensive. Did it cost a lot?
8. I talked to Tom. He excited about his new job.
I
9. Don’t eat that apple! It very bad .

Page 18 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 2

 EXERCISE B NOTES

Write questions and answers with linking verbs. Number 1 is an

example.

Ml
JmlSFSiLAi I-
1. How does the music 2.
sound?
It sounds beautiful .

«1 mmm

3. 4.

B m
mgm
ff
>
7

5. 6.

Student Text Page 19

 j
JH . •
READING: SCANNING FOR INFORMATION
| Read the questions first. Then look at the information in the
1 box. Circle the correct answer.

Classified Ads
Place your ad with us. We can help you with what you need!

LOST: Large white eat, answers to “ Fluffy” . Lost near Main

and Central Streets. Will pay money to the person who finds
him. Call 555-5555 or 555-1212 after 4 p.m.

I 1. What kind of animal is lost?

} a. a dog
b. a cat
c. a bird
2. How many phone numbers are there in the ad?
a. 5
b. 2
j c. 3
l 3. What’s the animal’s name?
a. Fluffy
b. Fanny
j c. Filly

| 4. What color is the lost animal?

a. red
I b. black
| c. white
j 5. What time can you call?
a. at four o’clock
b. after four o’clock
c. after one o’clock

Page 20 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 2

 r
NOTES
WRITING: MAKING AN OUTLINE

Read the paragraphs, and complete the outlines.

1. Many people travel a lot and they can travel in many different
vehicles on land, on the water, or in the sky. When they want to travel
fast or far, they travel in the sky by plane. When they want to relax, they
can travel on water and go by ship. When they travel on land, they can
go by car.

2. When can divide the Us military into the Army, the Air Force and the
Navy. The Army has soldiers and they work on Army posts. Airmen work
on Air Force bases in the Air Force. The Navy has sailors. They work on
the naval bases.

Student Text Page 21

 NOTES
6 $ LISTENING: IDENTIFYING THE TOPIC

Listen to each paragraph, and select the best topic for it.

1. a. school
b. baseball
c. my friend
d. the air force
i 2. a. letters and postcards
b. learning to write
c. taking class
d. growing up

b. Ed’s mother
c. the party
d. school life

Page 22 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 2

 HE WAS TALKING WHEN HE HIT THE CAR. LESSON 3
:

-C.
^

-
4
rti V
*

ss

. 0 GRAMMAR: PAST PROGRESSIVE TENSE

Betty was studying in the library last night.

^ VOCABULARY:

Noun Verb Other

accident place bother across
auto pole break / broke / broken at fault
automobile police / police officer cause careful
bicycle rider cross careless
bike stop face in front of
cause traffic happen left
curve keep / kept / kept (on ) light
dent ride / rode / ridden right
fault run / ran / run
light Expressions
heavy traffic
traffic jam

Student Text Pag© 23

 NOTES
LANGUAGE SKILLS

HI READING: IDENTIFYING THE TOPIC AND

i MAIN IDEA
Read a paragraph and identify the topic,
main idea, and title.

i LISTENING: IDENTIFYING THE TOPIC

Listen to a text and select its topic.

Page 24 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 3

^
NOTES
VOCABULARY: A BICYCLE ACCIDENT
Read the newspaper story. Repeat the new words.

Alamo City University News

Bike Accident Causes Traffic Jam
For hours on Friday, all traffic them go. But six students had to go
came to a stop in downtown Alamo to the hospital. One student broke
City. a leg, one broke an arm, and four
Hundreds of Alamo City had back and neck problems.
University students were riding The streets were soon full of
their bicycles in the university’s the hundreds of bicycle riders who
Fall Cycling Marathon . Part of could not keep on riding in the
that 26-mile ride goes through marathon because the police and
downtown Alamo City for eight EMS vehicles were blocking River
blocks near the river. Because the Avenue and Elm Street. There was
traffic is usually heavy downtown, a very large traffic jam because
the police were stopping both the cyclists and automobile
automobiles on many streets to traffic could not move . The
let the cyclists go through. automobiles had to use different
A problem started at 9:30 a.m. streets. The heavy traffic lasted
The first two dozen cyclists were for a total of four hours.
crossing River Avenue at Elm Finally, the police picked up
Street when a dog ran in front of the dog and found its owner. The
them. The dog caused 18 riders police told the owner that the
to fall. dog was the cause of the bicycle
A police officer on a bike accident . They told him to keep
dog in a place with a good
arrived first . More police and the CULTURAL NOTE
EMS* arrived later. The police fence. The owner will keep the dog * The Emergency Medical
Services (EMS) in most US
yard. It won’t bother people
stopped all traffic. EMS helped a in the cities are part of the Fire
Department. Like the Fire
total of 18 riders. They helped 12 there. Department and the Police,
they can be reached by
of them there in the street and let calling 911.

Student Text Page 25

 NOTES EXERCISE A

Answer the questions.

| 1. What happens every fall in Alamo City?

2. What happened to the bicycle riders?

3. What was the cause of the traffic jam?

4. Who helped the riders who were hurt?

5. How many riders went to the hospital? Why?

««
EXERCISE B
;

keep on broke stop in front of

cross ride caused bothered

Complete the sentences with the words in the box.

j 1. Private Sanders fell on the ice and her leg.

2. Why did she fall? What her to fall?
3. The weather is nice so Bill wants to - . his bike.
4. I don’t want to stop running now. I want to _
going.
5. Lt Hastings parked his car . the store.
6. You shouldn’t _ the street when the sign says
Don’t Walk .
7. I couldn’t study. The loud music _ _ me.
8. I have to return these books. Can we make a _
at the library?

Page 26 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 3

 NOTES
VOCABULARY: REPORTING AN ACCIDENT

Read the dialog about the automobile accident. Repeat the new
words.

Officer: Did you see the accident? What happened?

Man: The traffic light was red. I was walking across Lake
Street when I saw a light blue car coming up the hill. I
was lucky that it didn’t hit me.

Officer: Thank you . Sir, you were driving the black auto. Tell me
what happened.

Driver 1: I was driving north on Falls

Avenue. I started to cross
the intersection at Lake
Street because the traffic I
light was green . Then that
careless driver ran the red
light and hit my car on the
right side. See the dent
here? Then my car crossed SS
the road and hit a light
pole on the left side. I don’t
think that the accident was
my fault .

Officer: Thank you. Okay, now you can tell me what happened .

Driver 2: I’m a careful driver. I was driving on Lake Street. I came

around the curve and up the hill without any problems.
When I arrived at the top of the hill, I was facing the sun,
and it began to shine in my eyes. I didn’t see the red light j
or the black car. I am not at fault.

Officer: I see. I’m going to write an accident report. You may read
the report tomorrow to find out who is at fault .

Student Text Page 27

 NOTES 5
EXERCISE A

Complete the officer’s report with the words in the box.

pole ran light traffic

crossing right across

Vehicle 1 was going north on Falls Avenue. Driver 1 was

the intersection of Falls Avenue and Lake
Street with a green light, when Vehicle 2 hit Vehicle 1 on the
door. Vehicle 1 then went the
road to the left and hit a light .

Vehicle 2 was going west on Lake Street, which crosses Falls Avenue
at the top of a hill. Because the sun was in Driver 2’s eyes, the driver did
not see the or the other car.
Driver 2 the red light and hit Vehicle 1.

EXERCISE B

Complete the sentences with the words in the box.

light curve facing

places auto careful
careless fault left

1. My house is on the . side of the street.

2. Martha never has accidents. She’s a driver.
3. Bill didn’t see you because he was . the sun.
4. The accident was Liam’s - He was careless.
5. Jack bought a new . last week.
6. Ella always drives too fast. She’s a driver.
7. Be careful. There’s a in the road.
8. Kevin’s car is not white. It’s blue.
9. My car has dents in two

Page 28 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 3

 NOTES
GRAMMAR: PAST PROGRESSIVE TENSE
Read the dialog with a partner.
Officer: What happened here? Were you riding a bicycle with the
other students?

Rider: Yes, I was. About 12 of us were crossing River Avenue

when a large black dog ran in front of us. He didn’t bother I
me, but some of the other students were surprised and fell
off their bikes.

Man: I saw the accident. I wasn’t riding a bicycle, I was

standing near the place of the accident. I was watching I
the bike riders when a dog ran across the street. He ran in j
front of the cyclists.

Officer: And you, sir? Where were you standing when the accident j
happened?

Man: Oh, I wasn’t near this place when the accident happened.
I was driving my car on a different street. I parked and
walked over here because the EMS vehicles were blocking
the streets. I was in the traffic jam.

The Past Progressive

I was eating lunch when the phone rang.

The phone rang.

I was eating lunch. ' I may continue to eat.

Student Text Page 29

 NOTES EXERCISE A
f
Listen to a sentence. Change it with the words you hear.

Example: Instructor: Helen was reading a book. Jane

Student: Jane was reading a book.
Instructor: watching a movie
Student: Jane was watching a movie.

V ' .
EXERCISE B

Fill in the blanks with the words in ( ). Use past progressive

verbs.

1. Allen . yesterday afternoon , (play)

I
2. I a story last night , (write )

3. Larry his bike at school, ( ride)

4. Cindy in the library , (study)

: 5. They . breakfast together , (eat )

I
6. The children . for the mailman, (wait )

EXERCISE C

Use past progressive verbs to complete the sentences.

I
1. when the storm began.
I 2. When you called,
3. . when the light went out.
4. When I arrived,
5. . when we left.
6. When the telephone rang,

Page 30 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 3

 NOTES
Question Formation

You were riding a bicycle.

Were \ you riding a bicycle?

I When 1 I were
1 you riding a bicycle?

EXERCISE D

Write two questions for each sentence. Follow the example

above.

1. Tom was studying in the library, (where)

2. Judy was reading, (who)

3. The teachers were writing the lesson, (what )

4. The baby wasn’t playing, (who)

5. His grandmother was cooking at 5:30. (when )

Student Text Page 31

 NOTES
JH, READING: IDENTIFYING THE TOPIC AND
MAIN IDEA

Read the paragraph, write the topic, and select the main idea.
f
Paragraph A
Basketball is a sport that many boys and girls, and also men and
|women, like to play. It is not a very old game. Students in the state of
I Massachusetts played the first game in December 1891. John Naismith
wrote the rules for the game. He wanted his students to have a fast,
? interesting game to play inside in the cold winter months. At first, each
|side had nine people. In 1897, the number of players changed to five
on each side. Few other changes were made. The game we play today is
|almost the same as it was over a hundred years ago.

1. What is the topic of this paragraph?

2. What is the main idea of this paragraph?
a. The basketball game we play today is almost the same as the
game 100 years ago.
b. Mike Naismith wrote the rules for basketball because he
wanted his students to play inside in the winter.
c. Basketball is a fast, interesting winter sport.

Paragraph B
The word coffee may come from an Arabic word. Today, people all
over the world like coffee. They drink hot coffee and iced coffee. They
|might drink it for breakfast , lunch, or dinner. They also drink it between
|meals. There are many different kinds of coffee. These all smell and
j taste delicious. A lot of people meet friends at restaurants or snack bars
I just to drink coffee and talk. In some countries, there are small snack
bars that serve only coffee and desserts.

1. What is the topic of this paragraph?

2. What is the main idea of this paragraph?
a. Snack bars sell many kinds of coffee.
b. Coffee is delicious.
c. People in many countries like coffee.

Page 32 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 3

^
NOTES
LISTENING: IDENTIFYING THE TOPIC

Listen to a paragraph, and circle the letter of the topic.

1. a. the temperature
b. swimming
e. today’s weather
d. clouds
2. a. pushups
b. soccer
c. volleyball
d. exercise
3. a. a classrooms
b. building
c. math class
d. language labs

Student Text Page 33

 -User Notes-

Page 34 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 3

 mpw pppat
^
YOU MUST OBEY TRAFFIC LAWS. LESSON 4

/ FUNCTION : INQUIRING AND ANSWERING QUESTIONS ABOUT

A TRAFFIC ACCIDENT
Police: What happened here? Who caused the accident?
Witness: The man in the red car ran a red light.

GRAMMAR: INDIRECT COMMANDS AND REQUESTS

Ask Mr. Winters to come to my office before lunch.

REPORTING COMMANDS AND REQUESTS

Ken told Dan to turn off the light.

COMPARING AND CONTRASTING

Our jackets are similar.
* : ISS - J

VOCABULARY:
Noun Verb Other Expressions
bystander ticket buckle up alike different from
fine witness fasten behind similar to
insurance obey dark the same as
law in back of
seat belt like

Student Text Page 35

 NOTES
LANGUAGE SKILLS

ill

6 i LISTENING: FOLLOWING DIRECTIONS

Look at a map and listen to directions in
order to identify specific buildings.

READING: SCANNING FOR INFORMATION

Scan a written text for specific
information.

WRITING: COMBINING ELEMENTS OF A

SENTENCE
Expand sentences by combining terms,
phrases, and clauses.

Page 36 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 4

 NOTES
VOCABULARY: TRAFFIC LAWS
Look at the pictures and read the sentences.

; /, - : +yW
l /
'

• I

I
V
•
•

1. In the United States, all 2. George always fastens his

drivers must wear seat seat belt. He buckles up
belts . It’s the law . and obeys the law.

3. In most places, drivers must 4. Capt Evans got a ticket . He

buy insurance on their cars. was driving very fast, and he
It is the law. The insurance wasn’t wearing a seat belt.
helps pay for the cost of He broke two traffic laws.
accidents. Now he must pay a fine .

EXERCISE

Tell a visiting friend about the traffic laws where you live. Use
the questions below as a guide.
1. What are the seat belt laws? Who must wear their seat belt while
the car is moving?
2. What type of insurance must all drivers have for their cars?
3. What is the minimum insurance coverage that is required by law?
4. Why would the police give a driver a ticket?
5. What are the most common fines drivers have to pay?

Student Text Page 37

 NOTES
FUNCTION : INQUIRING AND ANSWERING
QUESTIONS ABOUT A TRAFFIC
ACCIDENT

Read the dialogs. Then practice them with another student.

1. Police officer: What did you see?

Witness 1: Well, ma’am, the driver in the dark blue car made
a fast stop. He tried to miss the boy on the bicycle.
The white truck behind him didn’t have time to
stop. He hit the car.
Police officer: What happened here?
Witness 2: The driver in the car was careful. He stopped. The
boy on the bicycle was careless. The accident was
his fault. The truck in back of the car just didn’t
have time to stop.

2. Police officer: I want to know what

happened here.
Boy: There was a lot of
traffic. The dark
Fap i
, Wt * '
blue car was coming
around the curve. I i
was looking straight
ahead. I just didn’t
see the car. The
driver stopped. He didn’t hit me. Then the white
truck hit the car.

3. Police officer: Tell me what happened.

Driver: I tried to stop, ma’am.
Police officer: Did you have your seat belt fastened?
Driver: Yes, ma’am, I wasn’t hurt because I buckled up.

4. Bystander: I didn’t see what happened. Was it the boy’s fault?

Witness: I saw the accident , but I don’t know whose fault it
was.
Bystander: Do you think he’ll get a ticket?
Witness: I don’t know. He needs to be more careful.

Page 38 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 4

 s r~ NOTES
EXERCISE A

Pair up with another student. Interview each other about a

traffic accident. Use 6 of the following questions:

Whose fault was it? Why did the accident happen?

Where did it happen? Was the traffic bad?
Was the driver careless? What did you see?
When did it happen? Was anyone hurt?
I didn’t
What see that black car. I hit it
happened here?
t r on the right side.

rv

MM
/
EXERCISE B

Choose the best answer to complete the sentences. Use the

words in the box.

obey dark insurance

in back of ticket buckle up

1. The driver didn’t stop at the stop sign. The police officer gave
him a
2. In the US, you must buy - . to pay for auto
accidents.
3. We must . the law when we drive.
4. The blue car was behind the white car. It was -
the white car.
5. He doesn’t have a light green car, he as a
green car.
6. Before you drive a car, you must

Student Text Page 39

 NOTES EXERCISE C

Match the numbers on the left with the letters on the right.
Some numbers can have more than one answer.

1. witness a. someone who saw an accident

2. fine b. to attach
3. law c. money you pay for breaking the law
4. bystander d. watcher; observer
5. fasten e. strong rule
6. seat belt f. a safety strap or harness

GRAMMAR : INDIRECT COMMANDS AND

REQUESTS

Look at the chart.

Imperative Indirect object Infinitive

Ask Bob to pay the bill.
Tell John to go to the store.
Ask or tell is used with an indirect object + the infinitive to
express an indirect request or command.

Read the sentences.

1. Ask Maj Carter to sign this letter.

2. Tell Lt Davis to mail it right away.
3. Tell Amn White to call the BX manager.
4. Ask Maj Davis to come to my office.
5. Tell SSgt Roberts to bring my car at 1300.

Page 40 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 4

 :
EXERCISE :

.
Work with a partner Ask or tell someone to do something Use .
.
the word in ( ) Then practice the dialogs with another pair .
Example: Bob: It’s hot in our office! Open the windows, Mike.
Mike: Ted ’s nearer Ask him to open them.
. (him )
Ted: I’m busy. Tell Dave to do it (Dave)
Dave: Hey, it feels good in here to me.

1. Bill: I cleaned the kitchen today. Please clean the bathroom

now, Jack.
Jack: I think it’s Ted’s turn (Ted )
Ted: I don’t have time (Herb)
Herb: How much will you pay me?

2. Sally: Answer the phone, Diane. My hands are wet.

Diane: Betty’s closer. (her )
Betty: I always do it (Alice)
Alice: Hello? ... Sally, it’s for you.

3. Carol: Alan, please walk the dogs.

Alan: Sorry, I’m busy. (Steve)
Steve: They’re Sue’s (her )
Sue: Don’t worry. I walked them an hour ago.

4. Al: Mark, get these reports ready for the boss today, please.
Mark: I’m sorry, but I won’t have time.
( Lee )
Lee: I have to see my doctor today.
(Tom)
Tom: Sure, no problem.

Student Text Page 41

 NOTES
0 GRAMMAR: REPORTING COMMANDS AND
REQUESTS

Read the dialog; then look at the chart.

Husband: We need some insurance for our new car.

Agent: Please fill out these forms, but don’t sign any of them
right now.

Wife: I didn’t hear her. What did she ask us to do?

Husband: She asked us to fill out these forms. She also told us not to
sign them .

told
She us (not) to sign the forms.
asked

REMEMBER:
When a command or request is reported,
the verb is changed to the infinitive. Tell
or ask are used as the reported verbs.
Sometimes pronouns have to change.

EXERCISE A

Read the sentences then repeat them.

1. Mom: Watch the children.

Sue: Mom told me to watch the children.
2. Officer Smith: Don’t use a cell phone when you drive.
Sam: The officer told us not to use a cell phone when we
drive.
3. Capt Flynn: Shine your boots.
Amn Luke: The captain told me to shine my boots.

Page 42 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 4

 EXERCISE B NOTES

Read the paragraph and the sentences.

A police officer stopped SSgt Swain because he was being careless
and driving too fast . The police officer didn’t give SSgt Swain a ticket ,
but he did tell him how to be a careful driver.
I
1. Always fasten your seat belt. \/

2. Ask passengers to buckle up. t/

3. Obey the speed limit t/
,

4. Stop at stop signs and look both ways. /

5. Watch out for children on bicycles and children
crossing the street.
^
6. Be careful when you are facing the sun.
Sometimes the sun in your eyes can cause you NOTE
The phrase Don’t drink
to have an accident. / and drive refers to drink ¬
ing alcoholic beverages
7. Turn on your lights when it is getting dark.
^ before or while driving.

8. Don’t drink and drive, i/

Work with a partner. Report these commands with asked and

told . Number 1 is an example.

I The officer told him to always fasten his seat belt .

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Student Text Page 43

 /'io ' - t-i
NOTES
0 GRAMMAR: COMPARING AND
CONTRASTING
Look at the chart.

Using like / alike, the same as, similar to and different from
to compare and contrast
Bob’s shirt is like Mike’s.
Their shirts are alike .
My name is the same as your name.
Our names are the same.
Tom’s car is similar to Allen’s car.
Their cars are similar.
Cats are different from dogs.
Cats and dogs are different.

Read the dialogs. Then practice them with another student.

1. Charlie: Our shirts are alike.

Jack: Yes, they are very similar.
Only the sleeves are
different.
Charlie: You’re right. The other
parts are the same.
m f {
m
1L
W M
Jack: Are my shoes the same
as yours?
Charlie: No, mine are different
from yours. Yours are a
different color.

2. Oscar: Soccer and American football are different.

Kevin: I know what you mean! The two games are not alike.
Oscar: American football is different from soccer.
Kevin: You’re right. The rules are different, the uniforms are
different, the teams are different , and the shape of the
soccer ball is different from the football, too.

Page 44 Noninfensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 4

 man*
NOTES
EXERCISE A

Fill in the blanks with the words from the box.

the same as like similar to different from

1. Jim’s car is dark blue and my car is light blue. They both have
four doors. My car is his car.
2. Kelly had pie and Hank had ice cream for dessert. Kelly’s dessert
was Hank’s. Her dessert was not
his.
3. His dog is large and white, with black ears. Her dog is large and
white, too. Her dog is his.
4. We were both born on the seventh of October. Your birthday is
mine.
5. It rained all day yesterday. It’s sunny today. Today’s weather is
yesterday’s.

EXERCISE B

With a partner, compare the following pictures.

1. 2.

& eg V
4.
3.

1 p&
(
v .
'
" r

Student Text Pag© 45

 NOTES
o: LISTENING: FOLLOWING DIRECTIONS
Look at the map and listen to the directions. Identify the
buildings mentioned and write the correct letter beside the
name of the building in the key.

* 1

Library
Drugstore

Page 46 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 4

 NOTES
£Sk READING: SCANNING FOR INFORMATION

Look at the menu to find the answers to the questions. Circle

the correct answer.

1. Are there drinks on the menu? 3. What is the most expensive

item on the menu?
a. yes b. no
a. pancakes with ham
2. Can you get pancakes without
eggs? b. two eggs with toast and
jelly
a. yes b. no c. two eggs with ham

WRITING: COMBINING ELEMENTS OF A

SENTENCE

Match the phrases to form sentences. Write a paragraph with

the sentences.

1. The work day in Alamo City a. between 5:30 and 7:00.

2. Most people get up early b. starts between 7 and 9

3. They get dressed, eat, and c. but some take the bus.
4. Many people drive to work, d. leave for work.
5. Some people live far away, e. so they ride the train to
work.

Student Text Page 47

 -User Notes-

Page 48 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 4

TED CAN REPAIR THE CAR . LESSON 5

'

few
fe:
i

tBsSe

^ VOCABULARY:

Noun Verb Other Expressions

advice borrow anyone a little white lie
feelings care about excited go out
friendship enjoy fast hurt (someone’s ) feelings
garage fix someone in my opinion
party guess maybe
roommate hurt / hurt / hurt tell a lie / a secret / a story
secret lend / lent / lent the time / the truth
story lie
tool not care for
truth park
repair
should

Student Text Page 49

 NOTES
LANGUAGE SKILLS

WRITING: COMBINING ELEMENTS OF A

SENTENCE
Expand sentences by combining terms,
phrases, and clauses.

o LISTENING : FOLLOWING DIRECTIONS

Look at a map and listen to directions in
order to identify specific buildings.

Page 50 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 5

^
NOTES
VOCABULARY: IN THE GARAGE

Repeat the new words; then read the dialogs.

SSgt Winston: What do you think? Can you fix it today? I need
my car back this afternoon.
Mechanic: You’re the first person in the garage this morning.
I’m sure I can repair it in a few hours.
SSgt Winston: That’s fast! I thought it would take a lot longer
because it’s an old car. Do you have all the tools
you need?
Mechanic: Yes, I have old tools to fix old cars, and new tools to
fix new cars.
SSgt Winston: Do you want me to leave the car here, or should I
park it out front?
Mechanic: Just leave it here.
I’ll park it out front
when it’s ready.

Later that morning...

SSgt Winston: I have lost my keys.

Have you see them?
SSgt Campbell: I haven’t seen them.
Did you lend them
to Sergeant Rogers?
SSgt Winston: No, I never let him borrow my keys.
SSgt Campbell: Maybe a student at the library found them and
took them to the master sergeant’s office.
SSgt Winston: I just remembered. I left them with the mechanic!

llfiPIggSllSll
Student Text Page 51
 NOTES EXERCISE A

Match the phases on the right with the phrases on the left.

1. The mechanic works in a. his wife’s keys?

2. SSgt Winston wants the mechanic b. another car.
3. The mechanic can fix the car c. out front.
4. The mechanic will park the car d. a garage.
5. Did SSgt Rogers borrow e. fast.
6. The mechanic didn’t lend the man f. to repair his car.

EXERCISE B

Use borrow or lend to complete the sentences.

1. Sam has some CDs. Sue wants to listen to them at her house.
Sue wants to the CDs from Sam .
Will Sam them to her?
2. Keith forgot his pencil again today. The teacher has a lot of pencils
on her desk.
Keith needs to a pencil from her.
Will the teacher him a pencil?
3. Mike needs an English grammar book. The school library has
many grammar books.
Mike needs to a book.
The library will him the book he needs.
4. Roger wants to read the new book. Jim just bought the book but
wants to read it first.
Roger wants to the book from Jim.
Jim doesn’t want to him the book right now.

Page 52 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 5

 NOTES
VOCABULARY: MY ROOMMATE
Repeat the new words. Read the story.

Donna and I are roommates. We live in the same apartment . We’re

also good friends. Our friendship started when we were in high school.
When I don’t know what to do, Donna
gives me advice. For example, I wanted
to go to Tom’s birthday party last
Saturday. I also wanted to go to dinner
with some friends who were visiting
from New York. I asked Donna what I
should do. Her advice was to go out with
my friends from New York.

Next month, Donna is going to go to France to study for a year. She

is very excited and talks a lot about the
trip. When she comes back, I know she

k-4
will tell us many interesting stories .

Friday is Donna’s birthday. We are

going out to a restaurant for dinner.
Maybe we’ll have French food, or maybe
we’ll have some Italian food. I’m not sure.
After dinner we’ll go to a movie.

Donna’s mother is here to visit. Donna cares about her mother very
much. Her mother is also excited about Donna’s trip to France. She will
visit her next summer.

Student Text Page 53

 mmsmmmmmmmmmm
NOTES EXERCISE

Work with a partner. Unscramble the statements. Then make a

question for each answer. Number 1 is an example.
I
1. roommates / no / they’re
No, they' re roommates.

Are they sisters?

2. in / friendship / school / their / high / began

3. gives / she / her / advice

4. birthday / wanted / she / Tom’s / to / party / go / to

5. friends / dinner / from / should / go / with / NewYork / to /

she / her

6. interesting / she / will / stories / tell / many

7. going / no / dinner / are / they / to / out

Page 54 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 5

^ VOCABULARY: A LITTLE WHITE LIE

Repeat the new words, and then read the dialogs.

Joe: Aren’t you eating anything? Harry cooked all this good
food for the party.
Jean: I know.
——
Harry: Hi, Jean. Get some food . I
made it all and lots of it!
Jean: Thanks, but I’m not hungry
right now. I ate a big dinner
at my parents’ house
tonight.
Harry: Well , maybe you’ll want some dessert later. Excuse me,
please. I’m going to go over and talk to Bill and Linda.
Joe: Jean, you didn’t have dinner with your parents! We were
watching the soccer game until 45 minutes ago.
f
Jean: I know. I didn’t want to lie , but Harry’s a terrible cook. I
got sick the last time I ate his food. I just told him a little
white lie because I didn’t want to hurt his feelings.
Joe: Oh! You’re right. Sometimes a lie, not a big one, just a
little white lie, seems like the best thing to do. To tell you
the truth, I don’t care for his cooking either But he was |
standing right next to me, and I had to take some.
Jean: Has anyone told him that people don’t like his cooking?
Joe: I don’t know, but someone really should.

EXERCISE

Work with a partner, and write five questions about the dialog.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Student Text Page 55

 j ^ VOCABULARY: CONVERSATIONS

Repeat the new words; and then read the dialogs.

1. Lou: Did you enjoy the movie?
Sam: No. I didn’t care for anything except the music. In
my opinion, the movie was very long and not very
interesting.
Lou: But, did you really like the music? I thought it was too
loud . It hurt my ears.
Sam: Well, I thought the music was the best part of the movie. I
really enjoyed it.

2. Ted: What did Frank tell you?

Sam: I can’t tell you. It’s a secret .
Ted: You can tell me the secret . I won’t tell people.
Sam: Sorry. I said it’s a secret. You’ll know tomorrow.
Ted: Okay, I guess I can wait until then. Can you tell me the
time? I have to meet Sue at 12:30.
Sam: Sure. That’s no secret. It’s 12 o’clock.

EXERCISE A

Complete the sentences with the words in the box.

care about enjoyed in my opinion

maybe guess hurt his feelings

1. Sam didn’t like the movie, but he the music.

| 2. Doug always does just what he wants. He doesn’t

what other people might want to do.

3. I didn’t like Bill’s new car, but I told him I did. I didn’t want to

4. We need to be at the office early tomorrow. I

we should leave the house at 6:15.
5. You’re only 15 years old , you are too young
to drive a car.
6. Let’s wait a few more minutes Tony will
come.

Page 56 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 5

 NOTES
EXERCISE B

Review this paradigm.

Imperative Indirect Object Direct Object

me
you a story.
him a lie.
her the secret.
Tell
us the truth
them the time.
someone
Frank

Now complete the sentences with correct expression from the

box. Use the correct form of the verb. You may use an expression
more than once.

tell me a secret tell them a story tell her a lie f:

tell you a lie tell him the truth tell me the time
' '

1
1. Dan: I need to tell you, and only you, something important.
Sam: Okay. You can
2. Mike: Paul told Mary that he’s 30 years old. He’s really 36.
Doug: Why did he ?
3. Student: Excuse me, can you ?
Teacher: Yes, it’s 9:30.
1
4. Lt Hill: I made a big mistake, but I don’t want to tell the captain .
Lt Bare: You should right away.

5. Mom: Are the children sleeping now?

Dad: Yes, I to help them fall asleep.
6. Major: Did that man ?
Captain: Yes. He told me he has insurance, but I know he doesn’t.
7. Liz: I don’t want to
Sara: You have to. The teacher needs to know why you didn’t
take the test.

Student Text Page 57

 NOTES
WRITING: COMBINING ELEMENTS OF A
SENTENCE
Match the phrases to form sentences. Write a paragraph with
the sentences. The first sentence is done for you. i

1. Last week Sandra went to the a. write a check.

bank and
2. Today she got her checks b. opened a checking
account.
3. Now she doesn’t need c. in the mail.
4. She’ll just d. to take money with
her.

1. Yesterday Joe had a. and the car behind

him hit him.
2. He was stopped at a red light b. so the other driver
got a ticket.
3. Joe wasn’t at fault, c. to be more careful
next time.
4. The policeman told the man d. an automobile
accident.

Page 58 Noninfensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 5

 Q LISTENING: FOLLOWING DIRECTIONS
NOTES

Look at the map. Look at the key. Listen to the directions. Write
the letter of the building next to its name on the key.

MAIN

—
i
i
B
c
r _ FE-_
“ L

BROADWAY

OLD TOWN SQUARE

D A
HOLLYWOOD ST. WESTWOOD ST.

KEY
Home Library
Restaurant Drugstore
School Grocery

Student Text Page 59

 ^ VOCABULARY: REVIEW

Exercises A, B and C review the vocabulary in Lessons 1 - 5.

vi * * &&&& ‘sr visv. mm ,<

^r ssrsisi#? at
-
-
-K ^ ; #.
EXERCISE A

Select the best answer a, b, or c.

1. Be careful. There’s a in the road .

a. law
b. straight
c. curve

2. Greg was late because he was in traffic.

a. heavy
b. light
c. right

3. The tall woman is behind the short man. She is him.

a. at fault
b. in back of
c. in front of
4. I need something to this map to the wall.
a. fasten
b. buckle
c. bother
5. The bank is the street from the school.
a. cross
b. across
1 c. crossing
1

Page 60 Nonlntensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 5

 NOTES
6. If you travel from one country to another, you need a
a. passport
I
b. checkbook
|
c. witness
7. Every check has to have a Without that, you can’t cash it. j
a. ticket
b. wallet
c. signature
8. Susan and I do many things together. We see movies and go to
concerts often. We have a great
a. insurance
I
b. friendship
c. roommate

EXERCISE B

Fill in the blanks with words from the box.

excited accident repair seat belt

I
bitter ticket traffic jam anyone
|
1. The police officer gave Jane a because she j
was driving too fast.
2. Terry just heard that he got the job. He is very
about it.
3. Has seen my keys? I can’t find them.
4. The coffee tastes We won’t drink it.
5. There was a big on the street this morning.
Three cars hit each other.
6. Buckle your before you drive.
7. The cars aren’t moving. It’s a( n )
I
8. I need a mechanic to the window in the car. I j
can’t open it.

Student Text Page 61

 NOTES
EXERCISE C

Match the number on the left with the letters on the right .
careless a. fix
complete b. money
cash c. something hidden
repair d. in back of
secret e. not taking care
behind f. fill out

Page 62 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 5

: _ SHOULD I ASK LT CLARK FOR HELP? LESSON 6

1
.

X
i
% GRAMMAR: USING SHOULD TO ASK FOR AND GIVE ADVICE
You should tell Maj Simms that you are leaving early.

USING COULD TO MAKE SUGGESTIONS

You could ask Frank to turn off the TV.

ADVERBS OF MANNER WITH - LY

Rose studied carefully for the test and then passed it easily.
USING HOW IN QUESTIONS ABOUT MANNER
Tom: How does Don drive?
Don: He drives carelessly. He had an accident last week.

/ FUNCTION: ASKING FOR AND GIVING ADVICE

John: What should I do with this wallet that I found?
David: You should look for a name and then call the owner.

VOCABULARY:
Other
badly easily
carefully how
carelessly safely
correctly slowly

Student Text Page 63

 NOTES
LANGUAGE SKILLS

^ LISTENING: IDENTIFYING THE TOPIC

Listen to a text and select its topic.

WRITING WHAT YOU HEAR

Write a short dictated text after hearing
it read.

r
WRITING: WRITING PARAGRAPHS
Expand sentences by adding terms or
phrases to form a cohesive paragraph.

Page 64 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 6

 NOTES
L); GRAMMAR: USING SHOULD TO ASK FOR
AND GIVE ADVICE

Read the dialogs; then look at the chart.

1. Dan: I didn’t pass the test. What should I do?

Tom: You should ask your teacher for help, and you should also
study every day.
2. Ron: Should I tell Mary that she wasn’t invited to the party?
Liz: Yes, you should. She needs to know.
3. Fred: Which tires should I buy?
Pete: In my opinion, you shouldn’t buy cheap ones. Tires are
very important. You should buy the best ones.

We should leave.
Should we leave?
When should we leave?

EXERCISE A

Unscramble the sentences and questions.

1. Q: I lost my wallet. What should I do?
A: call the police / should
2. Q: It’s raining. Should we go now?
A: shouldn’t leave now / no / we
3. Q: do / 1 / what / now / should
A: I think you should study.
4. Q: I / borrow / which book / should
A: Oh, you should borrow this one about camping.
5. Q: see / should 111 movie / that
A: No, you shouldn’t. I don’t think you’ll care for it.

Student Text Page 65

 ft GRAMMAR : USING COULDIO MAKE
SUGGESTIONS
Read the dialogs with your partners.
Bill: I can’t study in my room. My roommate’s friends visit him
every day and watch TV for hours. What should I do?
Art: You should tell them you need to study. You could also ask
them to turn off the TV sometimes.
Dan: You could ask your roommate to stop the visits for two or
three hours in the evenings.
Mel: I know. He could visit his friends in their rooms, not in
yours.

t* Use could only in affirmative sentences to give suggestions.

EXERCISE

In pairs, use could to give suggestions to solve each problem.

1. We need to get to the airport

with a lot of luggage, but we
don’t have a car.
2. You ate dinner in an expensive
restaurant. You can’t find your
wallet to pay.
!4»

3. You return to your car after £

studying in the library, but you
can’t find your car keys. It is now
10 p.m. and the library is closed.
I
4. You had a car accident a week
ago. The other driver caused it,
but won’t pay to repair your car.
5. You find a wallet on the bus.
There is no ID in it , but there are
five $100 bills.
A
6. Your new car has a lot of
problems. You have to take it to
the mechanic often.
a
Page 66 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 6
 NOTES
FUNCTION : ASKING FOR AND GIVING
ADVICE

Read the dialogs. Then practice them with another student.

1. Roger: I found this wallet. Is it your wallet?

Kevin: No, it isn’t. Maybe you should look in it to find an ID.
Roger: Yes, and then I could call that person right away.

2. David: It’s time for class and I forgot my book. What should I do?
Stan: You can borrow mine. I won’t need it until 10:00.
David: Thanks. I’ll give it back to you after this class.

EXERCISE

Read the letters. Give the writers your advice.

1 Dear Ruth,
I was using my friend’s car. I had an accident.
What should I do? Should I tell my friend, or
should I get it fixed and not tell my friend?
Careless

Dear Ruth,
My wife got a lot of money for her birthday. I
want to buy a new television set. She wants to take
a trip. What do you think we should do?
Needing a new TV

Student Text Page 67

 NOTES
VOCABULARY: DOES MIKE DRIVE SAFELY?

Repeat the new words and read the sentences.

m m
-
a &

1. Mike’s driving carelessly . 2. The pilots are walking

r
slowly.
Hi

'

i
3. Capt Reyes slept badly last 4. Ellen arrived safely ,

night.

a i

V
5. The students listened 6. Capt Reyes reads English
carefully . easily.

7. Wade answered the questions

correctly .

Page 68 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 6

 sea
GRAMMAR : ADVERBS OF MANNER WITH LY - NOTES

Read the paragraph and underline all the words ending with - ly .

Lora is an instructor in a driving school. She teaches people to drive

safely. First, the students must read their driving book carefully and
take a test. Almost all of her students study and pass the test easily.
Then, they can learn to drive on the road.
Last year, Lora had one very bad student. He was young and read
his book carelessly He did badly on the test , but he passed. On the road, I
he did not drive slowly He always drove fast. He never learned to drive j
well and did not graduate.

For most adjectives, make the adverb by adding - ly .

EXERCISE A

Complete the chart with adverbs and verbs from the text above.
Number 1 is an example

Adjective Adverb verb + adverb

1. safe safely drive safely

2. careful |

3. easy j
4. careless |

5. bad I
6. slow
!
|

BONUS: Find the adverbs for these adjectives in the text.

7.

8.
fast

good
J
!
I
Student Text Pag© 69
 NOTES EXERCISE B

Complete the paragraphs with words from the box. You may
need to use some of the words more than once.

badly well slowly

correctly
carefully fast easily

Last summer, Sam went to Germany because he wanted to learn

more German. He read the language , but he didn’t
speak it
At first, he said things and people didn’t un-
derstand him. Sam thought they spoke too He had
to ask them to repeat their sentences more Sam
listened and wrote new words in his notebook. He
always tried to spell them
Now, Sam understands German and can use it .

He doesn’t say things

—
EXERCISE C

Write the adjective and adverbs in the correct blanks.

I 1. clear I see the plane because

clearly the sky is
j 2. hungry Is Anna ?
I hungrily She’s eating her food
I 3. happy The little girl sang because
happily she was
j 4. excited The players sounded
excitedly They talked
I 5. sleepy Mary is watching TV
sleepily She looks
j 6. angry The boss sounds
angrily He is speaking

Page 70 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 6

 o- - P ® '
/,* \ !
1
- f f f£ |f
GRAMMAR - USING HOW IN QUESTIONS
51 f, , * v •
*
* '» * :
NOTES
V
ABOUT MANNER
Look at the chart. Then read the dialogs.

Lt Keller writes fast.

Does Lt Keller write fast?
| How does Lt Keller write?

In questions, use how in the same position as other question

words: what , which , when , where , etc.

1. Tina: How’s your exercise class going?

Joe: It’s going well. I feel better and healthier.
2. Ben: We had a test , but you arrived late to class. How did you
finish?
Don: Well , I had to work very fast, but I think I answered
correctly.
3. Lt Hill: How’s your old car working?
Lt Lake: It’s not working well. It needs a lot of repairs.
i&MMMM K i l l i l i t i i l:II s i11 M M S M M M i
4
• !§MI® tfliSil !$tilili # - s

EXERCISE A

Write a question with how and the verb in the answer. Number 1
is an example.

1. Chuck: How did you do on your test?

Mark: I did badly. My score was only 65.

2. Bill:
Pam: I’ll take the bus to the airport.

3. Lt Hill:
Lt Lake: The major spoke angrily.

4. Eric:
Joe: My boys played well.

5. Ann:
Rose: I’m not sleeping well this week.

Student Text Page 71

 NOTES EXERCISE B

Ask and answer questions like the example. In the question, use
how and the italicized word. In the answer, use the italicized
word and a word from the box.

badly correctly fast carelessly

well slowly easily carefully

Example: Mary was late this morning. She had to eat breakfast in
five minutes.
How did she eat?
She ate fast .

1. Don likes to cook . He fixed a big dinner on Sunday, and everyone

thought the food was delicious.

2. Ms. Brown is writing a letter for her boss. Everything in the letter
has to be right.

3. Frank and Pat have two young children. Last night the children
were sick and cried for hours. Frank and Pat didn’t sleep much.

4. Lt Brandon is driving to work. He’s drinking a cup of coffee and

talking to Capt Ball who is in the back seat. He isn’t thinking
about the traffic.

5. Paul wants to get a job at the bank. He had a lot of forms to

fill out . He took his time completing the forms. He wanted the
information to be correct.

Page 72 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 6

 EXERCISE C

Ask and answer questions with how. Use the words in the boxes.

badly
walk sing drive
carefully
say study review carelessly

play exercise correctly

write
easily
eat read draw
fast
dance plan park safely

cook sleep slowly

well

How do you spend your

I spend it fast, but IT buy-
.. . . , . ,
money?

LL

Student Text Page 73

 LISTENING: IDENTIFYING THE TOPIC

Listen to the paragraphs; then write the topic for each.

1.

; 2.
’

3.

LISTENING: WRITING WHAT YOU HEAR

Listen to the paragraph, and write what you hear.

Page 74 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 6

$ WRITING: WRITING PARAGRAPHS
NOTES

Read the paragraph first. Then rewrite it by adding one word or

phase from each numbered column to the space in the sentence
with the same number.

o 0 0 © 0 0
fast fast his safely often I think
good well difficult carefully usually I guess
careful correctly interesting every day sometimes I’m sure

SSgt Edwards is a O mechanic. I like working with him because he can

repair anything ©. He spends his time well and he enjoys © work. He
cleans his workplace 0. At the end of the day, he © looks tired , but © he
likes his work.

Student Text Page 75

 -User Notes-

Page 76 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 6

HE REALIZED THAT THE TANK WAS EMPTY. LESSON 7 : :
:

‘ '
' V f J ' Vi ?\ r . , \

S\

Bt, §

slitfS

iiggfg £ v££££.:;:: ;.£

i0: GRAMMAR: VERB + THATUOIM CLAUSE

Sara didn’t know that the test was today.

VOCABULARY:
Noun Verb Other IS
alarm clock hanger bathe almost
baggage ladies’ room fill ( up) empty
bath lady hang / hung / hung ( up ) full
bathtub laundry hope hard
bill men’s room realize pleased
blanket motel ready
closet pillow really
end restroom Expressions so
gas / gasoline sheet run / ran / run out of soft
gas station tank take / took / taken a bath
gauge

Student Text lillSlili! Page 77

P
|
 NOTES
LANGUAGE SKILLS

a LISTENING: IDENTIFYING THE TOPIC

Listen to a text and select its topic.

WRITING: COMBINING ELEMENTS OF A

SENTENCE
Expand sentences by combining terms,
phrases, and clauses.

Page 78 Nonintensive ALC , Volume 3, Lesson 7

 NOTES
VOCABULARY: GAS STATION
Repeat the new words; then read the paragraphs.

Alice and Andrew were getting ready to go on a trip. They had to

do the laundry because all their clothes were dirty. They washed and
dried their clothes. After they finished the laundry, they packed their
suitcases. They put all the baggage in the
car. They hoped to leave early the next
day. %
The alarm clock woke them up early I
the next morning. They were really tired.
They didn’t want to get up so early, but
they did. They started the trip with a
I
full tank of gasoline in the car. After
they drove for about five hours, Andrew
checked the gas gauge . He realized the tel
tank was almost empty . He didn’t want
to run out of gas. He stopped at a gas
station in the next city to fill up the car.
They filled up the tank and asked the attendant , “ Where are the
restrooms?” He told them that the restrooms were at the side of the gas
station. The men’s room was on the left and the ladies’ room was on
the right.

EXERCISE

Work in pairs. Answer the questions.

1. What were Andrew and Alice doing?

2. What did they have to do to get clean clothes?

3. What woke them up the next morning?

4. What showed Andrew that he was almost out of gas?

5. Where did he stop to get gas?

Student Text Page 79

 ^
NOTES
VOCABULARY: AT THE MOTEL

Repeat the new words; then read the paragraphs.

Alice and Andrew arrived at the motel at 6:30. They were glad
they had reservations because the motel was full. Many people were
traveling that day. When they got to their room, a lady was making
the bed. She was putting clean sheets on the bed. There were two soft
pillows on the bed and a blanket, too. There were two chairs in the
room. One was a nice soft chair. The other
was a hard chair. When Alice saw the
pretty motel room, she was pleased.
They were really tired at the end of
the long day. Alice wanted to take a bath
and relax. She filled up the bathtub and
stayed in the bath for 20 minutes. She
felt better after she bathed. Andrew
opened the suitcase and hung up some
of their clothes in the closet . He didn’t
hang up everything because there were
only three hangers in the closet. The next morning, they woke up at
6:30 without an alarm clock. They got dressed and went to pay the motel
bill . Then they went to the restaurant to have breakfast.

EXERCISE A

Work with a partner. Circle the letter T for true and F for false.

1. Alice and Andrew arrived at the motel at 6:30. T F

2. There were a lot of empty rooms at the motel. T F
3. They were tired at the end of the day. T F
4. Alice took a shower in the bathtub. T F
5. She stayed in the bath for 20 minutes. T F
6. Andrew put some clothes in the closet. T F
7. There were a lot of hangers in the closet. T F
8. The alarm clock woke them up at 6:30. T F
9. After they got dressed, they paid their bill. T F

Page 80 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3 , Lesson 7

 EXERCISE B
SHMBSSPWH
* MRH - ,-
• Xr
——
NOTES

Fill in the blanks with new vocabulary words.

1. Some people take a lot of when they travel.

2. I was late this morning. I didn’t hear my

1
3. Do you like to take a shower or a in the
morning?
4. Pete had to leave his car on the side of the road and walk home
because he
5. Please take the clothes out of the suitcase, and put them in the

6. The children put a lot of water in the , and

the water went all over the floor.
7. Beth has only one more test question to answer. She’s
finished.
8. I like to sleep with two under my head.
9. Do you have any dirty clothes? I am going to do the

EXERCISE C

Match the words on the left with the meanings on the right.

1. laundry a. instrument for measurement

2. gauge b. covering used on a bed
3. bathe c. warm covering used on a bed

4. blanket d. put clothes on a hanger

5. run out of e. dirty clothes to be washed

6. hang up f. happy, satisfied

7. sheets g. use up
8. pleased h. to take a bath

Student Text Page 81

 NOTES
EXERCISE D

Group the vocabulary words in this lesson into the three

categories. Some of the words will be used more than once. Be
prepared to explain your choices.

station

gas

motel

<djaundry
^I>

Page 82 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 7

 NOTES
GRAMMAR : VERB + THAT NOUN CLAUSE

Look at the charts.

Statement Subject Verb that noun clause

He speaks English. I think ( that) he speaks English.
Anna took the book. I hope ( that) Anna took the book.
We had a test today. I forgot (that) we had a test today.

That before a noun clause has no meaning in itself. It’s frequently

omitted in spoken English.
I think he speaks English.
I heard Joan is going to Germany.
A noun clause is used as a direct object after these verbs that indicate
mental activity:
forget guess hope realize learn remember
read know hear see think understand

Read the dialog. Then practice it with another student.

Kim: I think that the weather’s nice today.

Jim: Yes, it is. I guess that it’ll

be nice tomorrow again.

Kim: I heard it’s going to rain.

Jim: Oh, I hope it doesn’t rain . I

1
want to swim.

Kim: Did you forget that we have

a test on Monday? i
m
,"
H
Jim: Yes, I forgot. I guess I’ll have to study tomorrow.

Student Text Page 83

 NOTES EXERCISE A

Complete the sentences using a that noun clause. Number 1 is

an example.
i
1. John told the truth.

| Does Marsha know that John told the truth ?

2. Thomas didn’t tell a lie.
Anne knows .
3. Jason will leave on Friday:
Mary learned .
4. Today’s going to be very cold.
Did you hear ?
5. Pat has a new telephone number.
I Mike didn’t remember .
6. George forgot to sign his check.
Has the teller seen ?

EXERCISE B

Change the following sentences to the negative and replace the

bolded word with the one in parentheses.

Example: I think ( that ) you’re wrong , (right )

/ don' t think ( that ) you' re right.
1. Sue knows ( that ) she lost her checkbook , ( passport)

2. Tom realized he was driving fast , ( carelessly)

3. Pat read that American cars often need repairs, (seldom )

4. A1 heard (that ) the sky was going to be clear today , (tomorrow )

Page 84 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 7

 EXERCISE C NOTES

Read the paragraph. Then complete the sentences using one of

the verbs in the box. Remember to use the past tense
I
Last Saturday was a beautiful fall day. Major Adams sat outside
reading the newspaper. He read that the time was going to change on
Sunday at 1:00 a.m. In most of the US, people add an hour to the time
every April and subtract an hour every October.

know hear realize

see hope remember

1. When Maj Adams looked at his alarm clock on Monday, he

( that ) the time was 0630.

2. He was going to be late for work! He he had

to leave right away
3. He that there wasn’t going to be a lot of
traffic on the road.

4. As soon as he left the house, Maj Adams turned on the car radio
and that the time was only 6:00.

5. He that he was not late after all.

6. Then Maj Adams that the time had changed.

It was an hour earlier now. It was only 6 o’clock , not 7 o’clock.

O LISTENING: IDENTIFYING THE TOPIC

Listen to the paragraphs; then write the topic for each.

1.

2.

Student Text Page 85

 NOTES
WRITING: COMBINING ELEMENTS OF A
SENTENCE

Match the phrases to form sentences. Then write a paragraph

with the sentences.

1. Joe checked in at a. hangers in the closet.

2. There were no b. very angry.
3. He couldn’t c. a new motel.
4. Joe was d. hang up his clothes.

1. Jane cleans rooms a. the sheets and blankets.

2. She cleans b. in the motel on Elm Street.
3. She changes c. at the end of the day.
4. She is tired d. the bedrooms and bathrooms.

1. Jeff is upset a. losing his baggage.

2. They apologized for b. they won’t find it at all.
3. They hope to c. that the airline lost his baggage.
4. He’s worried that d. find it by tomorrow.

Page 86 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 7

 I APOLOGIZE FOR BREAKING YOUR WINDOW. LESSON 8
s«aisigBs

t >

#
v
Ztja
.

FUNCTION : APOLOGIZING AND RESPONDING TO APOLOGIES

J Robert: I apologize for breaking your window, Ms. Sims. It
was an accident.
Ms. Sims: You must be more careful. I hope that it won’t
happen again.

01
^i GRAMMAR: PREDICATE ADJECTIVE + THAT ADVERBIAL CLAUSE
Jimmy is happy that you can stay another week .

APOLOGIZE FOR + GERUND

Bob apologized for being late.

VOCABULARY:

Verb Other
apologize spill sorry
forgive / forgave / forgiven step (on) worried
mean / meant / meant ( to) worry (about)

Student Text Page 87

 NOTES
LANGUAGE SKILLS

m READING: IDENTIFYING THE TOPIC AND

MAIN IDEA
Read a paragraph and identify the topic,
main idea , and title.

WRITING: COMBINING ELEMENTS OF A

SENTENCE
Expand sentences by combining terms,
phrases, and clauses.

Page 88 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 8

 ^
NOTES
VOCABULARY: AN APOLOGY
Repeat the new words; then read the dialogs.

1. Jimmy: Don’t step on my shoes. You’ll get them dirty. I just

washed these tennis shoes.

Freddy: I’m sorry . I didn’t mean to step on your shoes. It’s so

crowded in here.

2. Waitress: I’m sorry. I didn’t mean to

spill cold water on you.
r
Customer: Don’t worry . It was an
accident.

3. Chuck: You look worried.

Tony: I am. I didn’t study for the

test .

Chuck: You should be worried. Mr. Ames said it was going to be a

difficult test. Maybe next time you should study more and
worry less.

4. Dan: I need to talk to you, Tom. I want to apologize to you.

Tom: You should. You really made me angry! I thought we were

good friends. Why did you tell Bill that I took his wallet?

Dan: Well, I saw you with his jacket at Cathy’s party.

Tom: Cathy asked me to hang up everyone’s jackets. I was just

taking them to the closet.

Dan: Then, when Bill was getting ready to go, he said his wallet
was gone.

Tom: Yes, and when he got home, he realized it was in his gray
pants hanging in his closet.
I
Dan: I really am sorry. I hope you’ll forgive me.

Tom: Yes, I forgive you. I was very angry, but I’m ready to forget \

Student Text Page 89

 NOTES EXERCISE A

Match the expressions to the group of phrases that complete

them.
Expressions
I’m pleased (that ) ...
I hope (that) ...
Sorry, I didn’t mean to ...
I’m sorry (that ) ...

I hurt your feelings.

1. I spilled water on you .
I stepped on your toes.
I came in late.

your mother is better,

2. you got a good grade on your test ,
you came to the party.
I met you.

you have a nice trip,

3. you get a good grade on your test ,
you find your wallet.
I didn’t hurt your feelings.

step on your toes,

4. worry you.
spill water on you.
come in late.

EXERCISE B

Use the adjectives in the box to make questions and answers.

worried sick cold sorry

busy upset bored interesting

Example:
Student 1: Are you sick?
Student 2: No, but I’m very busy.

Page 90 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 8

0 GRAMMAR: PREDICATE ADJECTIVE + THAT
ADVERBIAL CLAUSE
NOTES

Look at the chart.

predicate
Subject + BE adverbial clause
adjective
happy
pleased
glad
Bill’s (that) he went there.
angry
upset
sorry
Use an adverbial that clause to express cause or reason after the
expressions above.

Read the dialog with another student.

Thomas: Hi, Robert. I’m pleased that you came to my party.

1
Robert: I’m happy that I came, too.

Thomas: Tim isn’t here. Is he angry that I didn’t call him?

Robert: No, he isn’t upset that you didn’t call. He’s busy.

Thomas: I think that he’ll be sorry that he didn’t come.

Robert: I think so, too, but I’m glad that I came.

EXERCISE A

Match the clauses on the right with the clauses on the left to
form sentences.
1. The manager’s angry a. that the apartment is dirty.

2. Was Dr. Hill upset b. that someone left him a big tip.
3. The students are glad c. that her secretary was sick?

4. The waiter’s happy d. that three students are late?

5. The driver was sorry e. that they passed the test.
6. Is the teacher angry f. that he didn’t fill his gas tank.

Student Text Page 91

 NOTES EXERCISE B

Rewrite the two sentences as one sentence. Follow the example.

Example: Tom bought a small car. Is he happy?

Is Tom happy that he bought a small car?

1. Fred lost Jim’s new jacket. Fred is sorry.

2. His daughter broke the window. Is Mr. Murray angry?

3. Her husband remembered her birthday. Betsy was pleased .

4. The Martins lost their airline tickets. Are they upset?

5. Elaine was late for dinner. Paul wasn’t angry.

6. John moved to Prague. He’s not sorry.

EXERCISE C

Choose an adjective and make a sentence.

Example:
I' m happy that tomorrow is a holiday.

happy angry sorry upset pleased

glad sure sad excited worried

Page 92 Nonintensive ALC , Volume 3, Lesson 8

 NOTES
GRAMMAR: APOLOGIZE FOR + GERUND

Look at the chart.

Apologize (to someone) for + verb + ing

What is Beth apologizing to the instructor for?
She’s apologizing to the teacher for being late to class.
She apologized for being late to class.

Read the dialog with a partner.

Waitress: I apologize for spilling

your coffee. I’ll clean it up
immediately.

Mark: Yes, please do. And , bring

me another cup.

Waitress: Of course, sir. I’m very

sorry.
*

EXERCISE A

Read the sentence. Then complete the second sentence with

for + gerund. Look at the example.

Example: Jan opened Ted’s mail, but she won’t apologize.

Jan won’t apologize for opening Ted’s mail.

1. Jim spilled Don’s soup and apologized.

Jim apologized Don’s soup.
2. A1 bought the wrong size shoes for his wife, and he apologized.
A1 apologized the wrong size shoes.
3. Sue ate her brother’s candy. She won’t apologize to him.
Sue won’t apologize to her brother his candy
4. Sam apologized to his roommate. He broke the alarm clock.
Sam apologized to his roommate the
alarm clock.

Student Text Page 93

 NOTES
EXERCISE B

Write a sentence using the words given and the model.

apologize (to someone) for ( not) verb + ing

1. waitress / apologize / Mary / spill / orange juice

2. I / apologize / instructor / be / late

3. Lora / apologize / brother / break / watch

4. Sam / apologize / boss / arrive / late

5. Cindy / apologize / sister / hurt / feelings

EXERCISE C

Work with a partner. Write a question and answer with

apologize .

1. The travel agent lost our airline tickets. He apologized.

2. The barber cut Roy’s ear. He is apologizing.

3. Sara was sleeping in class. She apologized to the teacher.

Page 94 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 8

 / FUNCTION: APOLOGIZING AND
RESPONDING TO APOLOGIES
NOTES

Look at the chart.

Expressions for apologizing and responding to apologies

Here are some expressions we use to apologize to someone.
I’m sorry that I’m late.
I’m late. Please excuse me.
Forgive me for being late.
I apologize for being late.
Here are some expressions we use to respond to an apology.
That’s okay. Hope you are more careful in the future.
There’s no problem.
Don’t worry about it. But be more careful next time.
That’s all right.
I accept your apology. / 1 cannot accept your apology.

EXERCISE A

Repeat the dialogs; then read the dialog with a partner.

1. Waiter: I’m sorry, ma’am . Did I get any coffee on you?

Amy: No, don’t worry about it. Nothing spilled on me.

2. Mike: Can you forgive me, Sue? I didn’t mean to hurt your
feelings.
Sue: Sure, I know that you didn’t mean it . Yes, I’ll forgive you.

3. Simon: I want to apologize for not calling you yesterday. I was

very busy all day.
Roger: That’s all right . I’m glad you had time to call me today.

4. Jim: Excuse me. I didn’ t realize that you were sitting here. I’ll
move over.
Carla: No problem . Take your time.

5. Betty: I’m sorry I’m late. I hope you didn’t wait long.
Sandy: That’s okay. I arrived just a few minutes ago.

Student Text Page 95

 NOTES EXERCISE B

Match the response on the right with the apology on the left.

1. I’m sorry I’m late. a. That’s all right. But be

The traffic was very bad. more careful.

2. Excuse me. I didn’t mean b. I understand. Just watch

to step on your foot. your words next time.

3. I’m sorry. I didn’t mean to c. Don’t worry about it. Some¬

hurt your feelings. times I forget names too.

4. I apologize. I didn’t realize d . That’s okay. You may need

this was your table. to think about leaving
earlier from home.
5. I apologize. I just couldn’t No problem. We’ll take
remember your name. another table.

EXERCISE C

Work with a partner. Choose one situation. Write a dialog and

say it to the class.

1. You’re at a party. You spill your drink on someone.

2. You broke something at Helen’s house.
3. You forgot to pick up the pizza on your way home from work.
4. You forgot to bring your homework to class.
5. You bought milk and eggs for your mother. You forgot to buy bread.
6. It’s your mother’s birthday. You forgot to call her.

Page 96 Nonintensive ALC , Volume 3, Lesson 8

 NOTES
READING’ IDENTIFYING THE TOPIC AND
MAIN IDEA

Read the paragraph, write the topic, and select or write the
main idea.

Paragraph 1
Military bases are like small cities. The offices and buildings are
similar to the offices and buildings in a town. There are houses on base
for officers and enlisted people. There are also schools for the children of
those people who live on the base. There are gyms where you can work
out and places to play tennis, football, and baseball. The commissary is
like a large grocery store. The BX usually has just about anything else
that you need. Most bases also have hospitals to take care of anyone who
is sick. There’s also a gas station and a garage to repair your car. Last,
most bases have buses and taxis to take you where you need to go if you j
don’t have a car.
|
1. What is the topic of this paragraph?
2. What is the main idea of this paragraph?
a. Military bases and cities are similar.
b. You don’t need a car on the base.
c. There are schools on base.

Paragraph 2
Almost all the people in the world use some kind of money to buy the 1
things they need. In the past, rocks, shells, animals, animal’s teeth, and
cigarettes were used as money. Today, coins and paper bills are used as
money in most places. Coins are usually small and round with words,
numbers, and pictures on them. Bills come in different sizes and colors
and also have pictures, words, and numbers. In the US, bills used to be
green, but now they are using different colors to make the paper money.

1. What is the topic of this paragraph?

2. What is the main idea of this paragraph?

Student Text Page 97

 NOTES
WRITING: COMBINING ELEMENTS OF A
SENTENCE

Read the sentences. Write expanded sentences by adding one

word or phrase from each numbered column.

1. The (1) man stopped at the (2) motel to sleep in a (3) room.

1 2 3
tall new clean
tired old cool

2. The (1) parked her (2) in (3) of the commissary.

1 2 3
lady car front
captain truck back

3. The (1) driver drank (2 ) coffee with his (3) lunch.

1 2 3
tired hot late
hungry black expensive

Page 98 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 8

 TELL ME HOWTO. . . LESSON 9

ill . .
ill III II illill : .. .. Ill -v. " ' '

in
' '

in
"

; ;
' ' '

: .

$
.

GRAMMAR: HOW TO ( MANNER / METHOD)

SSgt Brown knew how to fix the car.

VOCABULARY:
Noun Other
candy bar time another
chewing gum (gum ) tray everywhere
chip vending machine favorite
coin return / release washing machine for
cream last
detergent Verb no
diet drink dispense out of
knob drop out of order
lever find / found / found out popular
machine get / got / got back stuck
nut insert
opening operate
selection stick / stuck / stuck (in )
snack teach / taught / taught
soda / soda pop work
soft drink

Student Text Page 99

1
I

NOTES
LANGUAGE SKILLS

o LISTENING: IDENTIFYING THE TOPIC AND

MAIN IDEA
Listen to a text and select its topic and
main idea.

WRITING: COMBINING ELEMENTS OF A

SENTENCE
Expand sentences by combining terms,
phrases, and clauses.

Page 100 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 9

 NOTES
VOCABULARY: VENDING MACHINES
Vending machines sell drinks, snacks, and other small things.
When you want to buy something, you
insert a bill or coins into the machine,
you make your selection, and you take r
it out of the tray at the bottom. Vending
machines are everywhere. You usually
see them in places where there are no
-
stores. You find them in hospitals, airports,
r
-

hotels, schools, and also in buildings on

military bases.
A vending machine operates without
a clerk. Some machines take a dollar
bill or sometimes a larger bill. Vending
V ME
machines can usually give back change
after you make your selection. When you
f 0
§|
^
yf ^
T:- »
^ _4
Li
J
make a mistake or your coins are stuck,
3r M the machine has a button to push, a knob
to pull, or a lever to turn to get back
your money in the coin return or coin
LJHI f fan
AI
^
Wzs
-MMZ/EC
WSSBm
»
— Wa
HI I
jreleasc
There are vending machines for
many different things. The ones you find
most often sell popular food and drinks
that large numbers of people like. Some
people’s favorite snacks are sweet foods
like candy bars, cookies, and chewing
gum, or salty ones like chips and nuts.
There are machines that dispense cold
drinks or hot drinks such as tea and coffee with or without cream and
sugar. Others dispense foods like cakes, sandwiches, ice cream, and
microwave dinners. Yet others dispense cigarettes, newspapers, stamps,
and postcards. You name it, you can usually find a vending machine that
sells it.

After answering the teacher’s questions, discuss these questions.

1. What products do vending machines sell in your country?

2. Where can you find vending machines in your country?

Student Text Page 101

 EXERCISE A

Write the words for the definitions.

| 1. in all places
5 2. something many people like
| 3. put something in a slot

| 4. to make a machine work

5. be in one place and not able to move
I 6. when there is no more of something
l 7. a small amount of food people eat between meals
8. a small handle or button on something

EXERCISE B

j Complete the dialog. Use the words in the box.

nuts got back selection sticking everywhere

insert tray coin return operate vending machine

Paul: I want a snack. Is there a here?

Mary: Yes, they’re in this building.
Paul: Here’s a vending machine. Do you know how to
it?
Mary: Sure, it’s easy. First , decide what you want.
Paul: Okay. I want some
Mary: Next , your coins. Then, make your
Your snack will drop into the

Paul: My coin is What do I do?

Mary: You can pull the lever here. It’s the
Paul: Look. I my coin.
Mary: Now you can try again.

Page 102 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 9

^
NOTES
VOCABULARY: WHAT DO YOU DO WHEN...?

Repeat the words and read the dialog.

Nancy: Did you get your soft drink?

Paul: No, I inserted my coins into the slot and pushed the
button for the diet drink , but nothing dropped into the
opening below.

Nancy: Did the coins drop?

Robert: Yes, but the machine won’t

dispense the soda . I tried
Use Correct Change

l
pushing other buttons, too,
but all the selections are
stuck. I think I’ll try to push
the machine to make my
selection fall down.
Sold Out (Ip
©
Nancy: No, don’t push the machine!
It might fall on top of you.
Look! The machine’s out
of drinks. A red light is on
!
next to all the soda pop
selections. Push the coin
release button to get your
money back.

Robert: I tried that , too, but my change didn’t drop into the coin
return tray.
Nancy: This machine is out of order . It doesn’t work . Call the
phone number on the machine. Tell the company about
the broken machine and your stuck coins.

ef
Yummy Yum Snacks
Vending Service
San Antonio, Texas
For problems call:

\
( 210 ) 555 -0036
J
Student Text Page 103
 NOTES EXERCISE A

Number the sentences in the correct order. Number 1 is an

example and begins the set of instructions.
You put coins in the machine, but they do not drop down. Follow
these instructions to get your money back.

a . Take the coins from the coin return tray.

b. Push the lever down, pull the knob out , or push the button.
c. Listen for the sound of coins dropping.
d. Insert your coins again.
*1 e. Look for the coin return lever, knob, or button.
f. Make your selection.
g Take your selection from the large opening at the bottom of
-
the vending machine.

EXERCISE B

Write the instructions using the sentences from Exercise A.

When the coins stick , . . .

first,

Next,
Then,

After that,

Now,
And then,

Finally,

Page 104 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 9

 NOTES
VOCABULARY: USING NO BEFORE A NOUN ..J
.

Msdt

Count Nouns Non -Count Nouns

m
*
m
l 3
-j &
m

Count nouns are things we can Noncount nouns are things

count . They are singular or we can’t count. They have no
plural. plurals.
There are no sodas. We have no coffee.
drinks , cream.
candy bars. chewing gum.

WS
EXERCISE

Make sentences with is / are + no or have / has + no . Follow the

rules above.
:

1. headsets / in the lab / today

i

2. milk / in the refrigerator / now

3. diet sodas / in the vending machine / downstairs

4. stores / new winter clothes / to sell

5. Tom / more change / to buy / a snack

6. I / money / for / a new car

Student Text Page 105

 NOTES
VOCABULARY: PLEASE SHOW ME HOW TO
OPERATE THIS MACHINE .

Repeat the new words. Then read the paragraphs.

When Willie moved away from home, he had to learn how to do his
laundry. The first time he went to the laundry
j room in the dorm, he didn’t know how to operate
a washing machine . He had to find out . Willie
I asked his roommate, Frank, to teach him how
j to operate a washing machine. These were the
I instructions he got from Frank.
First , put your light colored clothes in one
machine and your dark clothes in another
machine. They have to be in different machines.
: Next, select the correct temperature. Wash light
colors in warm water, and use cold water for dark colors. Put one cup
J of detergent in each machine. Then, insert four quarters in the slots.
Last, push in the coin tray.
Willie found out that it was very easy to operate a washing machine.
S He thanked the friend who taught him how to do it.

EXERCISE

Complete the sentences with the correct word.

Willie and Frank were roommates. Frank taught Willie how to

(1) a washing machine. He ( 2)
him how to put light clothes in one ( 3) and the
dark ones in ( 4) Willie learned where to put in
(5) and how to select the right water temperature.
He learned how much money to put in the (6) Now
Willie can easily wash his laundry.

Page 106 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 9

 ilia
NOTES
^ GRAMMAR: HOW + FO- INFINITIVE
(MANNER/METHOD)

Look at the chart.

Noun / How + Object

Subject Verb
Pronoun fo-infinitive Phrase
forgot

found out
knew
learned
Bill remembered how to fix the car.

showed

taught me

told

asked ( me )

EXERCISE A

Read the sentences and underline the how + to-infinitive.

1. Jim forgot how to operate this machine.

2. Did you find out how to repair the bicycle?
3. Kate doesn’t remember how to operate the new tape recorder.
4. Robert taught him how to use the washing machine again.
5. I don’t know how to drive a truck.
6. When did John learn how to swim?
7. Did Sue show Tom how to cook in the microwave oven?
8. The mechanic showed me how to fix the car.

Student Text Page 107

 NOTES EXERCISE B

Write the missing statement or question. Follow the example.

r
S Example: Pele showed Jim how to play tennis. Statement

Did Pele show Jim how to olav tennis? Question

Negative
No, Pele didn' t show Jim how to plav tennis , answer

1. Mary asked Jane how to cook the meal.

2.

Did Mr. Rogers show Andy how to repair the bicycle?

3.

No, Cathy doesn’t know how to operate the washing machine.

4. Max remembers how to fly a plane.

5.
Will my mother teach you how to fix cars?

6.

—
No, my friend didn’t tell me how to do the homework.

Page 108 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 9

 ~ NOTES
(j D LISTENING: IDENTIFYING THE TOPIC AND
MAIN IDEA
Listen to a paragraph. Select the topic and main idea.

Paragraph 1

1. What is the topic?

a . new places
b. different places
c. traveling together
2. What is the main idea?
a. Bill and John don’t like short trips.
b. Bill and John like to travel together.
c. The trips are long and interesting.

Paragraph 2

1. What is the topic?

a. Frank’s accident
b. the boy’s bicycle
c. a careless driver
2. What is the main idea?
a. Frank was in an accident because he was careless.
b. The policeman was riding his bicycle when Frank hit him.
c. Frank was in an accident , but it wasn’t his fault .

Student Text Page 109

r NOTES
WRITING: COMBINING ELEMENTS OF A
SENTENCE

for Bill went to the store. + He bought some sodas.

Bill went to the store for some sodas.

with Lisa made dinner. + She cooked lamb and rice.

Lisa made dinner with lamb and rice.

Read the two sentences. Combine them using for or with.

Example: Tom dropped four quarters in the slot.

He wanted a soda.
Tom dropped four quarters in the slot for a soda.

1. Bob used the vending machine. He used his last quarter.

2.
—
Ned is arriving at twelve o’clock. He is coming to eat lunch.

3. Sally wants to go on a trip. She wants Jan to go with her.

4. Mark went to the drugstore. He got some medicine.

5. I have a cup of tea every day. I put sugar in it.

Page 110 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 9

SUE EXERCISES BEFORE SHE GOES TO WORK . LESSON 10

Ok

FUNCTION : REQUESTING AND GIVING INSTRUCTIONS

Bob: Can you tell me how to operate this machine?
John: First , put the money in the slot.

$ GRAMMAR: ADVERB CLAUSES OF TIME

Barbara listens to music while she exercises.
James wasn’t eating when you called.
Where did you go after you left the library?

BE SUPPOSED TO
Dinner is at eight. You are supposed to be there at eight.

VOCABULARY:
Verb Other
be supposed to after lastly
before until
exact when
exactly while
finally

Student Text Page 111

 NOTES
LANGUAGE SKILLS

O LISTENING: IDENTIFYING CONNECTIVE

WORDS AND PHRASES
Listen to paragraphs and identify
transitional and connective words and
phrases.

Page 112 Nonintenslve ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 10

 / FUNCTION: ASKING FOR AND GIVING
INSTRUCTIONS
NOTES

Read the dialog.

John: Can you help me, please?

I put the exact amount
of money in this vending
machine, but the drink didn’t
come out. Is it out of order?

Mark: No, I don’t think it’s broken.

I bought a soft drink a few IHI
minutes ago. Maybe the coins
are stuck.
«3
John: What should I do exactly?

Mark: First, push the coin return.

Then, take your money from
the tray. Finally , try again .
% % . / j. 'i 1
..

How to ask for How to check for

How to ask for help: repetition: comprehension:

1. How do you 1. Say again?* 1. Do you want

operate this ( military me to say that
machine? expression ) again?

2. Can you show j 2. Can you explain 2. Do you want me

me how this that again? to repeat that?
machine works?

3. Can you teach 3. Can you repeat 3. Would you like

me how to use that? me to say that
this machine? again?

4. Do you know 4. Please, would 4. Should I repeat

how to operate you say that that?
this machine? again?

Student Text Page 113

 NOTES Read the dialog with a partner.

Mary: Do you know where I can get something to eat?

Chris: There’s a vending machine with snacks in the next

building.

Mary: Can you come with me and show me how to use it?

Chris: Sure. It’s easy. First, insert the money. Next , make your
selection by letter and number. Lastly , open the window
and take your sandwich.

EXERCISE

Choose a situation and practice asking for and giving

instructions with a partner.

• packing your suitcase

• putting gasoline in your car

• making tea or coffee

• making a sandwich

• making a bed

lilPII
GRAMMAR : ADVERB CLAUSES OF TIME

Can you give me

some advice before I Before you leave
fly to Toronto? for the airport ,
put your passport

i> n and ticket in your

pocket.
^

1
it
JJ
Page 114 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 10
Look at the chart. NOTES

Keep your seat belt fastened while you’re in the air.

While you’re in the air 9 keep your seat belt fastened.

Time clauses can start with before , after , when , while , and until.

EXERCISE A

Read the sentences. Then, underline the time clauses.

1. Greg exercised hard until the gym closed.

2. Before you leave the office, you should mail this letter.
:
3. Ms. Martin went to the drugstore after she left the dispensary.
!
4. Johnny always eats apples while he cooks.
5. When Richard goes to France, he will learn French.

EXERCISE B

Change the sentences that you read in the previous exercise.

Follow the example given in the chart.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Student Text Page 115

 NOTES EXERCISE C

Complete the sentences using before , after , when , while , or until .

1. She got up at 6:00. She left for work at 6:30.

She left for work she got up.
2. Mary cleaned the bathroom. At the same time, Ron cleaned the
living room.
Mary cleaned the bathroom Ron cleaned the
living room.
3. SSgt Sims went to work yesterday at 0630. He left at 1700.
SSgt Sims was at work yesterday 1700.

4. I leave the house. I lock the back door.

I always lock the back door I leave the house.
5. Lisa likes to read. She always does her homework first.
Lisa likes to read she does her homework.
6. John drank a cup of tea at 8:30. He went to class at 8:45.
John drank a cup of tea he went to class.

EXERCISE D

Use the words in parentheses ( ) and answer the questions in

complete sentences. The first one is done as an example.

1. Does Teddy read while he watches TV? ( yes)

Yes, Teddv reads while he watches TV.
Yes, while Teddv watches TV, he reads.

2. Did John go to the PX after he finished lunch? ( no, clinic)

3. Does Scott pick you up before he picks up his brother? ( no, after)

Page 116 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 10

 NOTES
4. Did Mrs. Carson lock the door before she left? (yes)

5. Did you read the paper while you were waiting? ( no, a book)

6. Did Mr. Gentry go to the commissary before he went to his

office? ( no, the PX)

EXERCISE E

Look at the italicized words in the sentence and ask a question.

Use when , what , where , or who. Follow the example.

Example: Michael watched the clock while he was working.

What did Michael watch while he was working ?
1. Rick eats while he watches football.

2. Mr. Peterson can’t leave until Ms. Lawrence calls .

3. Mr. Brooks will go to the commissary before he picks up his wife.

4. Margaret shampoos her hair after she swims.

5. Esther was swimming when Fernando called.

6. Mrs. Robinson will go to work after she gets a haircut .

Student Text Page 117

 NOTES EXERCISE F

Read the two sentences. Use the word in ( ) to make a new

sentence. Follow the example.

Example: Bobby brushes his teeth. He eats breakfast , ( after)

Bobby brushes his teeth after he eats breakfast or ,

After Bobbv eats breakfast he brushes his teeth .

1. Jeff ate breakfast. He walked to school, (before )

2. The soccer game is over. John is going to leave, (when )

3. Mr. Lewis can’t leave. Ms. Rice arrives, ( until)

4. Charles listens to music. He drives to work, (while )

5. John gets up. He takes a shower, (after )

$ GRAMMAR: BE + SUPPOSED TO
You Where
must not smoke are we supposed

r inside the building. to smoke?

A
a
BE supposed to can mean must , have to, or should . BE not sup¬
posed to can mean must not , may not , or should not .

Page 118 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 10

 §8181181

EXERCISE A NOTES

Read the phrases and put a check ( ) in the best box. Then
write the correct meaning ( must, must not, should , should not )
in the last column. The first two are examples.

supposed
not
supposed meaning
to
to
run red lights must not
study before a test should
travel without a passport
sleep in class
exercise every day
smoke in bed
tell a little white lie
pay for parking tickets
drive without car insurance
leave keys in the car
pay all bills on time
drive on empty (almost no gas )
take medicine when sick
drink and drive
return overdue library books

EXERCISE B

Answer your instructor’s questions using BE ( not ) supposed to .

Example: Instructor: Are you supposed to fasten your seat belt?

Student: Yes, I' m supposed to fasten my seat belt.
Instructor: Are you supposed to eat in class?
Student: No, I' m not supposed to eat in class .

Student Text Page 119

 NOTES EXERCISE C

Use BE ( not ) supposed to and make a new sentence.

Examples: Bill should turn off the lights when he leaves.
Bill' s supposed to turn off the lights when he leaves.
You must not eat in the classroom.
You're not supposed to eat in the classroom .
1. You have to tell the teacher before you leave the class.

2. I have to call my mother when I get back.

3. You should not talk during the test.

4. Drivers must slow down on icy roads.

5. Mary should apologize for being late.

6. Students must not smoke in this area.

EXERCISE D

Ask and answer the questions with a partner.

1. What are you supposed to do when you get on an airplane?

2. What are you not supposed to do when you are in the military?

S 3. What are you supposed to do when you are in a traffic accident?

4. What are you not supposed to do inside a library?

Page 120 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 10

^
NOTES
LISTENING: IDENTIFYING CONNECTIVE
WORDS AND PHRASES

Listen to the paragraphs and write the connective words you

hear.
Paragraph 1:
a.
b.
c.
d.

Paragraph 2:
a.
b.
c.
d.

Student Text Page 121

 NOTES

^ VOCABULARY: REVIEW

Exercises A, B, and C review the vocabulary in Lessons 6 - 10.

EXERCISE A

Select the best answer a, b, or c.

1. April comes March.

a. then
b. before
c. after
2. Don’t that box. It’s too heavy.
a. kick
b. lift
c. drop
3. Is the gas in your car in the back?
a. tank
b. box
c. trunk
4. The man walked very because he was tired.
a. easily
b. safely
c. slowly
5. This box is of paper, not books.
a. hard
b. full
c. soft
6. I like to eat potato with a sandwich.
a. chips
b. nuts
c. snack

Page 122 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 10

 , please. NOTES
7. Hang your clothes in the
1
a. baggage
b. tank
c. closet
8. Don’t go outside it’s raining.
a . until
b. while
c. before
~ o s k C3s j c t w J t3«
I?¥g.
^ EXERCISE B s*S E#s&s f
^s s s w w ^c s aasssEB !
'

Fill in the blanks with words from the box.

carefully safely everywhere

work soft stuck
1. A baby’s skin is nice and
2. Excuse me. Does this phone ?
3. I want my children to come home every day.
:
4. They were in traffic for two hours.
5. I looked for my wallet , but I couldn’t find it.
6. Please read this paper before signing it.

EXERCISE C

Match the word on the left with its meaning on the right. Write
the correct letter on the blank line.

1. easily a. statement of charge

2. gauge b. instrument for measuring
3. bill c. flat object for holding things
4. tray d. without difficulty
5. popular e. having nothing
6. empty f. well-liked

Student Text Page 123

 -User Notes-

Page 124 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 10

 I

I LIKE SHOPPING IN THE MALL. LESSON 11

.H * -emsz*** wsswwesrw

r
mm

mmaS
,,
GRAMMAR: PREPOSITIONS OF LOCATION
That store is in the mall.

GERUND AS OBJECT OF A VERB

Col Matthews likes shopping at the supermarket.

^ VOCABULARY:
Noun
adult supermarket down
cafeteria variety downstairs
clothing store in
department store Verb in back of
discount store shop in front of
elevator next to
escalator Other on
floor (level / story) above under
mall across (from ) up
parking lot at upstairs
shop behind
shopping center below Expression
stairs by go shopping

Student Text Page 125

 NOTES
LANGUAGE SKILLS

o LISTENING: IDENTIFYING THE TOPIC AND

MAIN IDEA
Listen to a text and select its topic and
main idea.

WRITING: WRITING PARAGRAPHS

Expand sentences by adding terms or
phrases to form a cohesive paragraph.

Page 126 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 11

^
NOTES
VOCABULARY: ROYAL SHOPPING CENTER
Repeat the words. Then read the text.

I
« fettyy#
ftmuufiutf

A shopping center is a group of stores and restaurants built

together in one area with one parking lot . It is usually a long building
with one or two floors divided into several shops or stores. Many
people like to shop in a shopping center because they can park in
front of the store and go shopping without walking very far. These
shopping areas usually have a variety of smaller clothing stores
and other small shops like restaurants, banks, bike or auto shops,
and barbershops. There is a door in the back of the building where
employees enter. Large supermarkets or discount stores are usually
part of the larger shopping centers. The supermarket or grocery store
sells food, small appliances, and plants or flowers. A lot of times the
supermarket has a drugstore, a photo shop, and an area with dishes and J
books. The discount store only sells food in cans, boxes, or bottles and
other things for the house at a very low price.

EXERCISE

Working with a partner, write five questions about the text to

ask the other students.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Student Text Page 127

 NOTES

ROYAL SHOPPING CENTER

Gta/iFi - GbepaAtmerit Silver Dollar Discount
City Supermarket
JiW Store
We’ve got We’re open 24 / 7. Why pay more?
everything for the Shop here for the Everything costs a
home and family. best variety of fruits dollar. Nothing more,
You’ll find all you and vegetables nothing less.
need here. in town. We save you money.

Long & Tall Short WESTERN BANK

Over 6' tall? We cut it like you Your friendly

More than 180 want it. Not too neighborhood bank.
lbs? We’re the short and not too Come to us for all
men’s clothing long. Haircuts for your banking needs.
store for you. adults and children. We’re here for you.

Sun Family
V Cafeteria
Good, healthy,
My Photo Shop
We sell cameras,
^ People’s Gym

Need to lose a few

home-made food. film, and more. pounds? Want to get
Stop in for breakfast, Learn how to take stronger? We’ll help
lunch, supper, or our great pictures in our you do both.
delicious desserts. photo classes.

EXERCISE

Read the store advertisements and answer the questions.

1. Where can you go to eat 6. Which store sells things for

lunch? the home?
J 2. Which store sells groceries? 7. Where can you save money?
3. Where can you buy film? 8. What kind of store is Long &
Tall?
4. Which store has cheap
prices? 9. Who sells soap and
detergent?
5. Which place cuts hair for
adults? 10. Where do people go to lose
weight?

Page 128 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 11

 NOTES
VOCABULARY: AT THE LOGAR MALL

Repeat the new words. Then, read the text and answer your
instructor’s questions about the text.

*
m
im
i
fr .m
I
m
t

A mall is a large building with more than one floor. To get from
one floor to the other you can go up or down the stairs, or use the
escalator or elevator. People can use the escalator or elevator to go to
the stores that are upstairs or downstairs in the mall.
Some of the malls are so big that they also have large garages under
the ground or in large buildings next to them.
Most malls have many stores and restaurants and at least one
department store . You can buy clothes for adults and children; and
you can also buy curtains, furniture, dishes, and tools at a department
store. There are clothing stores that are only for men or only for women.
The pet shop sells a lot of different things for cats, dogs, and birds. Some
people like shopping at
the mall because they \ '
!
i &k
can compare the prices
for the same thing in
different stores.
Some malls
have a cafeteria in
addition to the food
court. The cafeteria 1
is a restaurant where
people can see the
different kinds of hot
or cold foods before
they choose what they k:
want to eat.

Student Text siilil Page 129

 NOTES
| GRAMMAR: PREPOSITIONS OF LOCATION

THE LOGAR MALL

HOME DISCOUNT
AND STORE
GARDEN
STORE

hopW iirnr - SPORTS

SUPERSTORE
CAFETERIA InI L
DEPARTMENT Elll
STORE
Second Floor
PARKING
GARAGE
Escalator

Hill Stairs
Restrooms
.. Customer
Service DISCOUNT
|.. -
MOVIE
5
|Eievator THEATER STORE

-3 MEGASTORE
B FOOD COURT FURNITURE
A
F E f D C
DEPARTMENT
STORE
n First Floor
Entrance PARKING
GARAGE

Page 130 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 11

 EXERCISE A NOTES

Locate the places listed below on the floor plan of the mall.

THE LOGAR MALL DIRECTORY

First Floor Second Floor

A. Pete’s Pet Shop G. Eyeglass Shop
B. Myra’s Women’s Store H. My Child Clothing
Store
C. Kid’s Clothes &
Games I. Sam’s Drugstore
D. Leo’s Card Shop J. For Men Clothing Store
E. Starr Shoe Store K. Gene’s Variety Store
F. New Age Bookstore L. World Travel Agency

EXERCISE B

Read the statements, and underline the prepositions of location.

1. I enjoy shopping at the mall.

2. The first floor is below the second floor.
3. Customer service is on the ground floor.
4. The movie theater is by the food court.
5. The restrooms are on the second floor near the men’s store.
6. The stairs are in the parking garage.
7. More stairs are in back of the drugstore.
8. The escalator is in front of the sports superstore.
9. The bookstore is across from the women’s store.
10. The pet shop is next to the department store.
11. The home and garden store is above the movie theater.
12. The furniture megastore is below the sports store.
13. The discount store is behind the mall.

Student Text Page 131

 NOTES EXERCISE C

Listen and write the preposition in the correct location.

EXERCISE D

Ask and answer questions about things and people in the room.
Where’s the
teacher desk? > t>1
f \
\
H
Page 132 Nonintensive ALC , Volume 3, Lesson 11
 fit GRAMMAR: A GERUND AS THE OBJECT OF A
NOTES

VERB

The object of a verb is usually a noun or pronoun. The object of a verb

can also be a gerund.

Subject Verb Gerund

enjoys
Brian receiving e-mail.
doesn’t enjoy

Add -ing to a verb to make a gerund.

There are certain verbs that can be followed by gerunds.

Subject Verb Gerund
Mike starts moving next week.
The boys enjoy playing soccer
Does Bill mind stopping here?
LT Kline didn’t begin exercising until 0700.
Janet finished eating before Peter.
The Martins don’t like driving at night.

EXERCISE A

Read the text and underline the verb + gerund combinations .

Brian began using computers at work. He immediately enjoyed
working with them. They helped him work faster and better He thought j
of all kinds of ways they could be useful. Soon, he started thinking about j
buying a computer for his home.
First , he read a book about computers. After that , he began shopping |
for a computer He didn’t stop shopping until he found just the right one.
When Brian is at home, he likes sending e-mail to friends and family. 1
He also likes receiving e-mail. Sometimes, he has 15 to 20 e-mails to
read after he gets home from work. Brian usually doesn’t go to bed until j
he finishes answering every e-mail.

Student Text Page 133

 NOTES
— i
EXERCISE B
m wmmmmmmmm

Answer the questions. Use the words in parentheses ( ) .

I
1. Does John enjoy sleeping late on Sunday? ( yes)

2. When did Lora begin studying Spanish? ( at six years of age )

3. Do you like helping the cook in the kitchen? (no)

4. When did they finish studying for the test? (at midnight )

5. Do you like going to the beach on vacation? ( yes )

EXERCISE C

With a partner, ask and answer questions. Look at the example.

Example: Student 1: what kind of food / enjoy / eat?

What kind of food do vou eniov eating ?
I
Student 2: Chinese food
I eniov eatina Chinese food .
3
1. Student 1: when / did start / play soccer?

Student 2: five years ago

2. Student 1: do mind / meet after six?

Student 2: no / later

Page 134 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 11

 NOTES
Student 1: when / enjoy / watch TV?

Student 2: before / go to bed

Student 1: did / Peter / finish / fix car yesterday?

Student 2: yes / six o’clock

Student 1: do / Mary / like / eat / that restaurant?

Student 2: yes / there

O LISTENING: IDENTIFYING THE TOPIC AND

MAIN IDEA
Listen to a paragraph, and select the topic and main idea.

Paragraph 1

Topic: Main Idea:

a . careless drivers a. Seat belts are important.
b. seat belts b. Many people have bad accidents.
c. car accidents c. Careless drivers cause accidents.

Listen to another paragraph and write the topic and main idea.

Paragraph 2

Write the topic:

Write the main idea:

Student Text Page 135

 NOTES
WRITING: WRITING PARAGRAPHS

First look at the chart and read the paragraph. Then, rewrite it
by adding one word or phrase from each numbered column to
the space with the same number. Not all choices are correct.

TIME AND MONEY

What happens to your money when you save $25 every month?
3% (interest*) 6% (interest)
20 years $8, 228 $11,609
30 years $14,605 $25,238
40 years $23,209 $50,036

* Interest is money that a bank pays you when you save your money
there.

0 0 © 0 0 ©
buy cash week correctly early work
learn fruit month overnight a better grow
understand money calendar immediately something play

I Everyone needs to O one important rule about money: money and time
1 work together. What does this mean? It means that time makes things
1 grow bigger. It takes time for a small tree to grow big and have fruit. It
i also takes time for money to grow When you save 0 every © and put it
1 in the bank, it begins to grow With more time in the bank, there’s more
S money in your savings account. But it doesn’t happen ©. People should
ii save today for © tomorrow Do what people with a lot of money do: let
your money 0 for you.

Page 136 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 11

LET ME INTRODUCE. . . LESSON 12

r
1

i''

FUNCTION: GREETING AND INTRODUCING PEOPLE

Maj Allen: Let me introduce you to Capt Dole. Capt Dole, this is
Maj Lewis.
Capt Dole: It’s a pleasure to meet you, Maj Lewis.

GRAMMAR: PREDICATE ADJECTIVE + TO INFINITIVE

We’re ready to eat lunch.
She’s not upset to hear the news.

VOCABULARY:

Noun Verb Other Expressions

introduction decide (to) afraid (of ) Have you met .. .?
neighbor introduce alone How do you do?
rule let / let / let everybody I’d like you to meet . ..
supper receive everyone It’s a pleasure to meet you.
shake / shook / shaken polite / politely Let me introduce .. . to ...
write / wrote / written down

Student Text Page 137

 NOTES
LANGUAGE SKILLS

1
O LISTENING: IDENTIFYING WORD STRESS
Listen to a word and determine the
syllable with the primary stress.

WRITING: WRITING PARAGRAPHS

Arrange ideas and write logically
sequenced sentences to form a cohesive
paragraph.

MAKING AN OUTLINE
Organize ideas in an outline as
preparation for writing a paragraph.

Page 138 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 12

^
NOTES
VOCABULARY: MAKING INTRODUCTIONS
Study the chart; then read the dialogs.

Rules for Military Introductions

Speak to and look at the person of higher rank first .
Call the higher-ranking person by rank and last name , or by “ sir” f
or “ ma’ am .”
Tell the person of higher rank the lower- ranking person’s rank I
and last name .
Always look the person of higher rank in the eye and shake his I
hand .
Be polite .

1. Major: Colonel Carter, let me introduce Captain Brown to

you. He’s new here. Colonel Carter, this is Captain
Brown.
Colonel: How do you do , Captain Brown?
Captain: How do you do, sir?

2. Col Ray: John, have you met Major Lee?

Col Fry: No, I haven’t.
Col Ray: I’d like to introduce him to you. Colonel Fry, I’d like
you to meet Major Lee.
Col Fry: It’s nice to know you, Major Lee.
Maj Lee: It’s a pleasure to meet you, sir.

3. Lt West: How do you do, Colonel Sand? I’d like you to meet Major
Mary Knight.
Col Sand: It’s a pleasure to meet you, Major Knight.
Maj Knight: Thank you, sir. It’s a pleasure to meet you, too.

Student Text Page 139

 NOTES

Ms. Davis, this is Mr.

Jared Black. Mr. Black,
this is Ms. Mary Davis. It s a pleasure,
Ms. Davis.

INTRODUCING MEN TO WOMEN

EXERCISE A

Listen and complete the rules for making polite introductions.

1. When you . adults, speak to the

first.

2. Look at . and tell

the . full name.
i 3. Then, tell the . the . full name.
1 4. The . is supposed to _ the
woman offer to . his hand.

Page 140 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 12

 NOTES
,
Mr. Black, this
is Thomas Dole. It s nice to meet
Tommy, this is you Tommy.
Mr. Black.
It’s nice to meet
you too, sir.

> >
flu Jk
«
*LI LI JJ
INTRODUCING CHILDREN TO ADULTS

EXERCISE B

Listen and complete the rules for making polite introductions.

1. Speak to and look at the or person

first.

2. the older person the younger person’s

3. Tell the person the title and last

name.
4. During the , the younger person
speak and answer questions politely.

Student Text Page 141

 ^
NOTES
VOCABULARY: NEIGHBORS
Read the dialog.

Susan: Hi, Liz . I’d like you to meet Joan. She’s my new neighbor.

Liz: Hello, Joan. It’s nice to meet you .

Joan: It’s a pleasure to meet you, too.

Liz: What do you think of our neighborhood?

Joan: I like it . Susan is introducing me to the neighbors.

Everyone is so friendly.

Susan: Yes, that’s why I like living here, too. Everybody knows
each other. They are always ready to help out. I’m sure
you’ll receive lots of help while you’re moving in.

Joan: That’s great. I was afraid of moving here alone , but now
I see there’s nothing to worry about.

Liz: That’s right. Here, let me write down my phone number

for you. Call me any time you need help.

Joan: Thanks.

Susan: Liz , did you decide to join us for supper tonight?

Liz: Yes, but I need to go now. I’ll see you at seven .

EXERCISE

Match the words with their definitions.

1. everybody a. to get
2. rule b. all the people
3. neighbors c. without anyone else
4. receive d. something you must do
5. decide to e. the people who live near you
6. alone £ to make a choice
7. write down -
g to put words on paper
8. supper h. light meal served in the evening

Page 142 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 12

 .. '

NOTES
A / FUNCTION: INTRODUCING PEOPLE

Practice introductions.

Colonel Low, How do you

How do you
1. A Have you met B do, Captain C
do, sir?
Captain King? King?

Richard , I want \ Hello, Tom .

I’m fine, \
thanks. It’s a \
A you to meet my ) B How are ) c pleasure to / 3
friend , Tom . / you? / meet you . /
1
Hello, Ann. Let \ \ \
me introduce \
)
It’s nice to \ Thanks. It’s \)
A Don Flint . Don, B meet you, ) c good to meet
this is Ann / Don. / you, too. /
Grey. /
EXERCISE
EXERCISE Books open
Written cue
Role-play the situations. Oral response
Groups
|Divide the students into
j groups of three. Each
3 student takes a role, A, B,
A Captain Steve Ward A Ms. Penny Royal |or C. Students will use the
B Colonel Dan Brown B Ms. Denise Winters ,3 examples in the function

4 above to guide them as

C Captain Sarah King C Mr. Allen Hood they read the introduction
J scenarios and practice ap-
Captain King arrived Ms. Royal is the j propriate introductions.
today at her new base. manager of a store. Mr. j Allow each group to per ¬

She knows Captain Hood works for her. His form at least one intro¬
friend, Denise, would duction for the class. Ask
Ward from her last j observers to critique the
base. She’ll work for like to work there, too. 1 performances in terms of
Colonel Brown. 1 their appropriateness.
A David Sharp
B Joe Woods
C Laura Fisher
David and Joe are old
friends. They see
Laura at the mall.
David and Laura are
friends from work.

Student Text Page 143

 NOTES
GRAMMAR: ADJECTIVE + TO INFINITIVE

Look at the chart.

Subject + BE Adjective To + Infinitive

Ted isn’t ready to leave the party.
: Mr. Davis will be pleased to speak at graduation.
Why was Calvin upset to hear about the accident?
Janet and Paul are happy to be back in town.
Frank was glad to help Judy move.
i Lt Brooks is sorry to say good-bye to his men.

Is Linda afraid to live alone?

EXERCISE A

Combine the sentences .

Example: SSgt Harris is happy. He has a new car.
SSpt Harris is happy to have a new car.

1. Jane isn’t afraid. She lives alone.

2. Jack was pleased. He heard from Ted.

3. The doctor isn’t ready. He’s not going to the gym.

I
4. Timmy is glad. He has a new bicycle.

—
5. Maj Stevens was sorry. He heard about the accident.

Page 144 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 12

 NOTES
EXERCISE B

With a partner, unscramble the words to make questions.

1. them / see / was / to / Peter / go / sorry / ?

2. they / were / to / what / upset / find out / ?

3. John / afraid / drive / to / is / Mexico / to / ?

4. movies / to / you / be / when / ready / the / go / to / will / ?

EXERCISE C

Answer the questions. Look at the example.

Example: I’m late. Can you pick up my clothes at the
laundry? (yes / happy)
Ves, I' d be happy to pick up your clothes .

1. Lt Campos lost his wallet. Did you know that? (yes / sorry / hear )

2. It’s very dark in here. Are you afraid to be alone? ( no / not afraid)

3. There’s Terry. Do you want to meet her? (yes / pleased )

4. I don’t have enough money. Can I borrow some? (yes / glad / lend )

5. I have to finish this today. Can you help me? (yes / ready)

Student Text Page 145

 NOTES
WRITING: WRITING PARAGRAPHS

Match the phrases and write a paragraph.

1. A credit card lets you a. anything with a credit card.

2. You can buy almost b. it can be a problem, too.

3. You can use it c. you don’t have the money to pay

the bill.
4. It’s easy to use, but d. pay for things without cash.

5. It’s a problem when e. in stores, restaurants, and on

the Internet.

Q LISTENING: IDENTIFYING WORD STRESS

Listen to the word and circle the number of the stressed

syllable.

Example: Open - O pen

© 2 3 4 5
( 1) 1 2 3 4 5 (5) 1 2 3 4 5
(2) 1 2 3 4 5 (6 ) 1 2 3 4 5
(3) 1 2 3 4 5 ( 7) 1 2 3 4 5
(4) 1 2 3 4 5 ( 8) 1 2 3 4 5

Page 146 Nonintensive ALC , Volume 3, Lesson 12

 NOTES
WRITING: MAKING AN OUTLINE

Read the information below.

The Internet
One of the best things about the Internet is that it puts the world
at your fingertips. The Internet lets you chat, or talk, with people on
the other side of the earth. You can make new friends and find out
interesting things about the places they come from. The Internet also
lets you send e-mails to family and friends with only a quick push of a
button. Finally, the Internet lets you shop from home. When you shop
on the Internet , you don’t have to worry about traffic and parking.
Internet shopping saves you time and money! Go online. Open your
window to the world .

The Internet

chat (talk) send e-mail shop

make new find out

no traffic saves time
interesting to friends to family
friends or parking and money
things

EXERCISE A

Complete the outline with information from above.

1.
2.
B.
1.

C.
1.
2.

Student Text Page 147

 NOTES EXERCISE B

fi Complete the outline and chart outline with information from

| the text below.

US States
The United States of America has 50 states. It took the US many
years to grow into the big country, or nation , that it is today. Each state
joined , or became part of, the nation at a different time. Each state also
received a nickname when it became part of the nation. For example,
New York became part of the nation in 1788. It’s the 11th state and is
called the Empire State. Texas is called the Lone Star State. It became
part of the US in 1845 and is the 28th state. Hawaii is the 50 th state. It
became part of the nation in 1959. It’s called the Aloha State.

US States
A. New York
1.
2.
3. Empire State

B.
1. Lone Star State
2.
3.
C. Hawaii
1. 50th State
2.
3.

Page 148 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 12

CAN YOU CHANGE A FLAT TIRE? LESSON 13

m <*
*
m 31
’M m
M **£.
L -..-
* mm
.. . .

: -

1
H

^ GRAMMAR: SIMPLE PRESENT AS FUTURE TENSE

The bus arrives tomorrow.

^ VOCABULARY:
Noun
air
Verb
cover
Other
common
Expressions
in a hurry
cover hurry ( up ) enough the back ( of )
hub cap inflate extra the front (of )
jack jack up flat
key loosen loose
lug nut lower quick
tire raise quickly
trunk remove spare
wheel replace tight
wrench tighten

Student Text Page 149

 "“
I
'

NOTES
LANGUAGE SKILLS

o LISTENING: IDENTIFYING CONNECTIVE

WORDS AND PHRASES
Listen to paragraphs and identify
connective words and phrases.

o.
») j SPEAKING: GIVING AND CARRYING OUT
INSTRUCTIONS
Use connective words to give and carry
out instructions.

WRITING: WRITING PARAGRAPH

INFORMATION
Write the topic and main idea of a
paragraph.

MAKING AN OUTLINE
Organize ideas in an outline as
preparation for writing a paragraph.

Page 150 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 13

 NOTES
VOCABULARY: CHANGING A TIRE

Use the text to define any new words.

PFC Sosa is going to vehicle repair school. He just got the book for
the class. When he opens the front of the book, he learns that it’s a
common mistake to forget to check all the tires once a month. It is
important to keep enough air in them and inflate the tires when they |
need air He also learned what to do when a tire goes flat. Look at the
page he read.
2-2 . VEHICLE MAINTENANCE. |
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
First, you should quickly move the vehicle off the road. Hurry up and move
the vehicle out of traffic onto flat land .
Next, open your trunk with your key. There should be an extra tire and some
tools in the trunk in the back of the vehicle. Take out the spare tire, the
wrench , and the jack which are under the cover. Put them on the ground by
the flat tire.
Don’t be in a hurry . Take enough time to do the job safely and right .
Remove the hub cap which covers the center of the wheel . Then , loosen
Ca) the lug nuts, but do not take them off. The lug nuts fasten the wheel and tire
to the vehicle.
Next, put the jack under the vehicle near the flat tire. Slowly jack up the
vehicle. Make sure you raise it until the flat is off the ground. After that,
remove the lug nuts and put them in a safe place next to the spare or inside !
the hub cap. Pull off the flat tire and put it under the vehicle near the jack. j
Next, put on the spare tire, replace the lug nuts, and tighten them with the
wrench. Then lower the vehicle until the tire touches the ground. Make sure
the lug nuts are tight and put the hub cap back on. The lug nuts should never
be loose. If they are loose, the tire could come off, and you might cause an
accident.
Finally, remove the jack. Put the jack , wrench , and flat tire in the trunk. Take
the flat to a tire shop for repairs.

Student Text Page 151

 wmmmmmMimMfflMfflmmmmmM

NOTES EXERCISE A

Choose the word that best completes each sentence.

wrench 1. The tire replaces a flat tire.

key 2. A raises and lowers a vehicle.

tire 3. A covers a wheel.

wheel 4. The is usually in the back of the car.
hub cap 5. A opens a vehicle’s doors and trunk.
cover 6. The loosens and tightens lug nuts.
spare 7. A has a tire around it .
trunk 8. The fasten the wheel to the vehicle.
jack 9. A goes over something.
lug nuts 10. A has air inside it.

EXERCISE B

Listen and complete the paragraph.

Yesterday, Bob and Tom were traveling on a mountain road. They

i heard a loud sound. The vehicle turned to the right.
1 They had a tire! Bob moved the vehicle to the side

I of the road because there was flat land to change

! the tire. Tom opened the and removed the spare
I tire, the jack, the wrench, and an old blanket. He
1
1
the ground with the old blanket and put the tools on top. Then, Bob
! the nuts and began to the vehicle
a few inches off the ground. He the flat tire with
I the tire. It began to rain. Bob and
j returned the tools to the trunk. Lastly, Bob and Tom drove to a garage to
j repair and the tire with

Page 152 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 13

 EXERCISE C NOTES

Find two words that are opposites and write them below.
Number 1 is an example.

£ 1 loose / tight
%
8
&
2.
looseii front 3.

/oH 4.

m
m
g
%
NS
'0 r 5.

6.

EXERCISE D

Choose the best answer to complete the sentences.

1. I can’t talk now. I’m
a. a cover
b. in a hurry
c. on a tire
2. Carrots are . vegetables in the United States.

a . common
b. flat
c. enough
3. Please _. We don’t want to be late.
a. shake up
b. replace
c. hurry up
4. Do we have money for the ticket?

a. air
b. flat
c. enough

Student Text Page 153

 EXERCISE E

Listen. Use numbers to put the pictures in correct order.

r
r

V
0. _
© ~

i
rm i

M ] 11
0p )J

m JJH
^
Hsjb
li>

Page 154 Nonintensive ALC , Volume 3, Lesson 13

 NOTES
GRAMMAR: SIMPLE PRESENT TENSE AS
FUTURE

Look at the chart and listen to your teacher.

Subject Verb Time Expression

will arrive
is going to arrive
The bus is arriving tomorrow.
arrives
Sometimes we use the simple present tense to talk about a
future scheduled action.

EXERCISE A

Read the dialog. Then, practice it with another student.

Col White: Hello, Ms. Dodson. When am I leaving on my trip?

Travel Agent: You leave tomorrow, sir. You need to be at the airport
at two o’clock.
Col White: What time will the plane take off ?
Travel Agent: Your plane takes off at 2:45.
Col White: When is the plane going to land in Florida?
Travel Agent: The plane lands at 8:35 that evening.
Col White: Will someone pick me up at the airport?
Travel Agent: Yes, the hotel car picks you up at 8:45 and takes you
to the hotel.
Col White: When will I return?
Travel Agent: Sunday morning. Your plane leaves Florida at
9 a.m. It arrives here at 3:05 that afternoon. Here’s
a schedule for the trip, sir.
Col White: Thank you for the information.

Studenf Text Page 155

 NOTES EXERCISE B

Change the verbs to present tense to express future time.

|
Example: The game will start at 6 p.m. tonight.
The game starts at 6 p . m. tonight .

1. The train will arrive at 7:30 tomorrow evening.

2. Mrs. Swanson will speak to the men this afternoon.
3. Jane is answering the phone from 9:00 until 10:30 tomorrow.
4. Larry is going to drive to Munich next Monday.
5. The plane is taking off at 9:45 tomorrow.
6. Thirty students are graduating next Thursday.
7. Mel is going to learn how to operate the machine tomorrow

EXERCISE C
S
s Use the correct form of the verbs in the box to fill in the blanks.

do ride travel begin start

I

1. SI: When PVT Stash training?

S2: He tomorrow.
2. SI: Where the Carters next week?

| S2 They to Munich next Monday

3. SI: When the class on Friday?

S2: It on Friday at 12:30 in the afternoon.

4. SI: Who with John on Thursday?

S2: Larry with John on Thursday.

5. SI : Who Larry with on Friday?

1
S2: Larry with Bob on Friday.

Page 156 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 13

 NOTES
EXERCISE D

Look at the italicized word(s) and write a WH - question.

Example : He leaves tomorrow.

When does he leave?

Joe plays baseball next Friday.

What does Joe olav next Fridav?

1. Mr. Davis teaches students from noon until 2:00 next week.

2. Ms. Lawrence leaves at 4:00 in the afternoon.

j

3. A1 swims at Sam’s gym today.

4. Charlie comes home at 7:00 tonight.

5. Mrs. Smith cooks fish on Friday.

6. The Greens check in at the hotel tomorrow.

Student Text Page 157

 NOTES
O LISTENING: IDENTIFYING CONNECTIVE
WORDS AND PHRASES
Listen to a paragraph and write the connective words.

Paragraph 1:

a.

b.

c.

d.

Paragraph 2:

a.

b.

c.

d.

e.

f.

Q„ ) SPEAKING: GIVING AND CARRYING OUT

INSTRUCTIONS

: Use connective words to tell how to do these things.

1. change a tire
2. make coffee
3. play soccer
4. tie a necktie
5. put on a uniform
6. use the Internet

Page 158 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 13

$ WRITING: WRITING PARAGRAPH
INFORMATION
NOTES

Write the topic and main idea.

1. Martha’s husband gave her some money for her birthday. She
couldn’t decide how to use it. She thought about buying furniture
and other things for the house. Then she thought about using her
money to buy new clothes. She couldn’t decide. She put her money |
in the bank.
Write the topic.

Write the main idea in a complete sentence.

2. Joe’s sick. He doesn’t feel well. His head and throat hurt. He’d like
to take some medicine. There are many medicines in the drugstore,|
but he’s afraid that he’ll take the wrong one. He thinks he should
see a doctor, but he’s afraid the visit will be expensive. While Joe is j
trying to decide between a doctor’s visit and medicine, he is getting
worse.
Write the topic.

Write the main idea in a complete sentence.

—
Read the paragraph then select the best title.
3. Beth needs to repair her car. Today the back of the car started to
shake. Yesterday smoke started to come from the front of the car.
She was afraid to drive it. She took her car to a repair shop. The
repair was expensive, but Beth paid it. It’s better to be safe than
sorry.

a. Beth’s New Tires

b. Beth’s Car Repairs
c. Beth’s Repair Shop

Student Text Page 159

 NOTES
$ WRITING: MAKING AN OUTLINE

Read the paragraph and complete the outline.

Paul wants to take a vacation in Hawaii. He called the airline for

reservations. The clerk gave him some information about flights. On
Mondays, there are two flights, one in the morning at ten and another in
the afternoon at two. On Wednesdays, there is one flight at eleven in the
morning and another at three in the afternoon . On Saturdays, there are
three flights: one at nine o’clock in the morning, another at one in the
afternoon, and another at eight o’clock in the evening. Paul’s going to
take the Saturday morning flight. Then he’ll have more time in Hawaii.

Flight Information

| Moiiday | Wednesday | 1 Saturday |

1 1 1 1 1 1
10 2
a.m. P m.|
] 11
a.m.
3 9
a.m.
1 8
- p.m. p.m. p.m .

Title:

A. _
1.

2.

1.
2.

2.

3.

Page 160 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 13

WOULD YOU INTRODUCE YOUR FAMILY? LESSON 14

«5
TV

FUNCTION: MAKING AND RESPONDING TO POLITE REQUESTS

Clerk: Could you write your name on the check, please?
Customer: Sure, I’d be happy to. Could you lend me your pen?

$ GRAMMAR: CAN / COULD, WILL / WOULD AS REQUESTS AND

RESPONSES
Would you . . . ? Yes, I will , or Sorry, I can’t .

REPORTED SPEECH ( REPORTING COMMANDS)

What did the teacher say? She said to report to her office.

VOCABULARY:
Noun Verb Other
aunt marriage can certainly
baby nephew collect married
collection niece could of course
cousin parent hand out single
folks relative marry
grandfather uncle mind Expressions
grandmother pass out do ... a favor
grandparent will get / got married
would

Student Text Page 161 ;T

 NOTES
LANGUAGE SKILLS

READING: SELECTING A SUMMARY

Read a paragraph and select the best
summary for it.

SCANNING FOR INFORMATION

Scan a written text for specific
information.

WRITING: COMBINING ELEMENTS OF A

SENTENCE
Expand sentences by combining terms,
phrases, and clauses.

-
Page 162 Nonintensive ALC , Volume 3, Lesson 14
^
NOTES
VOCABULARY: COLLECTING FAMILY PICTURES

i
w
k
MM
The word family means more than just the parents and children
who live together under one roof. Family also means a group of people
with the same relatives. These are grandparents, aunts, uncles,
nieces, nephews , and cousins. Relatives are also people who belong to
the family by marriage .
Many families like to remember
important times with pictures, or
photographs. Parents want pictures
to help them remember when a new
baby comes, grows up, graduates
from school, and then marries.
; • There’s usually at least one person in
every family who takes and collects
g
the family’s photos. A big collection
,
) of family photos is a wonderful thing
to have!

Student Text Page 163

 NOTES EXERCISE A

Look at the family tree and read about Mary and John.

Mary and John met many years ago. They were both single then,
| and they soon became good friends. One year later, they decided to get
married. Their folks were very happy when they heard the good news,
j In the years that followed, Mary and John had two children, Sara and
1 Tom. Now Sara and Tom are married with children of their own. Mary
j and John enjoy being grandparents.

r
4
grandmother grandfather

A ft
4

m a

Page 164 Nonintensive ALC , Volume 3, Lesson 14

 EXERCISE B NOTES

Use the family tree to complete the sentences.

1. I’m your sister’s daughter. I’m your

2. I’m your sister’s son. I’m your

3. You’re my mother’s brother. You’re my

4. You’re my uncle’s wife. You’re my

5. My mother’s father is my

6. We belong to the same family. We’re

7. My mother and father are my

8. My mother’s or father’s parents are my

9. My mother’s mother is my

EXERCISE C

Match the word to its definition.

1 . folks a. uncle’s child

2. single b. to become someone’s husband or wife

3. collect c. living together as husband and wife

4. marry d. family or parents

5. parent e. a very young child who can’t talk

6. marriage f. a person’s mother or father

7. baby g - to bring similar things together

8. cousin h. not married

Student Text Page 165

 NOTES
GRAMMAR : COULD / CAN, WOULD / WILL
AS REQUESTS AND RESPONSES

Polite Requests Responses

Would you mind helping me Yes, I’ll be happy to help you.

hand out the test? I’d like to, but I can’t right now.

Could you do me a favor and Certainly. I’ll be glad to.

pass out these letters? Sorry, I’m busy at the moment.
Of course, I will.
Will you open the door, please?
Sorry, I can’t. My hands are full.
Sure, you can. What time?
Can I use your car tomorrow? No, you can’t. My car’s in the
garage.

EXERCISE A

Match the phrases .

- • Would you hand out the

papers?
a. Yes. When do you want to go?

2. Will you open the b. Sorry, there isn’t any in the

window? bowl.
3. Could I borrow your book? c. I’d like to, but my wallet’s at
i home.

— Would you drive me to the

mall?
d. Certainly. I’ll pass them out
now.
5. Will you give me some e. Of course. Black or with
sugar? cream?
6. Would you mind lending f. No problem. I’ll park it in
me a dollar? front.
7. Can you get me a cup of
coffee?
g - I can’t . It’s stuck.

8. Could you move your car, h. Sure. Enjoy reading it!

please?

Page 166 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 14

 EXERCISE B NOTES

Use the word in ( ) to answer the questions.

Example: Could you lend me twenty dollars? (no)

No. 1 can' t. 1 don' t have anv monev.

1. Would you mind waiting ten more minutes? (no)

2. Will you take Mr. Ruiz to the BX? ( yes)

3. Could you take my brother to school today? (no)

4. Can you please pass the salt? (yes)

5. Would you help Barbara with those boxes? (yes)

SiiffilSIlfSI

EXERCISE C

Change the statements into polite requests.

1. I want you to give me your pencil, (will)

2. I want to borrow your car this weekend , (could )

3. I want you to correct my pronunciation, (would )

4. I want to take a break, (can )

5. I want you to hand me the phone, (will)

Student Text Him Page 167

 NOTES
/ FUNCTION: MAKE AND RESPOND TO POLITE
REQUESTS

How to make a polite How to say yes to a How to say no to a

request: polite request: polite request:

1. Would you help 1. Of course. I’d be 1. I’m sorry, I can’t

me, please? happy to. at the moment.
1 1
: 2. Could you please 2. Certainly. How 2. I’d like to, but I
help me? can I help? can’t right now.

3. Will you help me, 3. Sure. I’ll be glad 3. No, I’m sorry.
please? to. I ... .
4. Can you do me a 4. Yes, I can. 4. Sorry, I can’t.
favor? I ... .
5. Do you mind 5. No problem. 5. Sorry, no. I ... .
helping me? i !|
/ :s : : : :s . . : a : :: . •
.

EXERCISE

Role-play making polite requests.

Role 1 Role 2 Situation

The child wants to

Son Grandfather
borrow the car.

PVT Green wants to

PVT Green SGT Brown
go to the restroom.

The teacher wants the

The teacher LT Powell
tests passed out.
The man wants to
Single man Single woman invite the woman to
dinner.
Joe wants Luke to
Joe ( Luke’s cousin ) Luke collect the tools and
put them into the box.

Page 168 Nonintensive ALC , Volume 3, Lesson 14

 '

NOTES
READING: SELECTING A SUMMARY

A GOOD SUMMARY ...

\/ gives the main idea and the most important information.

does not show your opinion of the reading,
t/ is very short.

EXERCISE

1. Many people enjoy working in their yards and gardens. For them,
it may be hard work, but it’s also fun. They like picking up leaves,
pulling grass out of flower and vegetable gardens, and cutting the
grass around the garden. In the spring and summer, they grow
vegetables and fruits. Then, in the summer and fall, they eat the ij
fruits and vegetables from their gardens . Some people like to grow j
different kinds of flowers, too. Certainly this kind of work is good
exercise. These people enjoy what they are doing and don’t mind
working hard in their yards and gardens.

Choose the best summary.

a. People enjoy eating fruits and vegetables from their gardens. They
also enjoy growing flowers.
b. A lot of people enjoy working in their gardens. They get good
exercise because there are many things to do. They think the work
is fun .
c. Many people like exercising in their yards. They eat fruit and work j
out in the summer and fall. They enjoy growing stronger in their
gardens.

Student Text Page 169

 NOTES
1
2. You can make many new things from old tires. You can put big
tires in a park for children to climb. You can also make carpets,
small rugs, and small things for the office with old tires. Some
people cut out parts of the tires to make bottoms for shoes. Other
people cut tires into very small pieces and put them on the ground
around flowers and trees to keep the ground from getting too dry
on hot summer days. Don’t keep your old tires in the backyard. Use
them to make other things!

| Choose the best summary.

a. Old tires make good bottoms for shoes. People use the old tires to
put on the bottom of shoes. The shoes feel nice on your feet , and a
person doesn’t have to buy new ones for a long time.
b. Don’t keep your old tires in the backyard or in the garage. Cut
them into very small pieces, and put them on the ground.
c. You can make many things with old tires. You can use these things
in parks, in offices, on your shoes, and in your garden.

3. Newspapers are important to Ned. He wants to know the local

news and the news from around the world. He gets a morning
paper and an evening paper. Every day he reads both of these
papers he also reads the business news. He thinks that he’s a
,

better businessman because he knows the news of the world and

his city.
I
Choose the best summary.

a. Ned gets a morning and evening paper He reads them both every
day.
b. Keeping up with the world news is important to Ned. He thinks
this makes him a better businessman.
c. Ned reads two newspapers. He likes to read the business news.

Page 170 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 14

 NOTES
WRITING: COMBINING ELEMENTS OF A
SENTENCE
;

Combine the two sentences to make a new sentence.

1. He loosened the nuts. He loosened them with a wrench.

2. The man removed the hubcap. He removed it from the wheel.

3. Brad raised the car. He raised it with the jack.

4. Mary goes to class. She goes at night.

5. Fred drove his car. He drove it to work. |

READING: SCANNING FOR INFORMATION

Find the answer to the question in the advertisement.

1. How much are hub caps?

2. What is the name of the store?

3. How much is a set of tires?

4. What is the phone number?

5. What is the address?

Student Text Page 171

 NOTES
0 GRAMMAR: REPORTING COMMANDS

thT\
(" Get to work now?)
^ What did
\ isergeant say? J
/ He said to get to \
\ work now. J

O
Sergeant Bean Private Ray

Read the examples with a partner.

Si
Private Lee Private Ray

1. Dad: John, give the dog some food.

Mary: What did Dad say?
John: He said to give the dog some food.
2. Peter: Don’t answer the phone.
Joan: What did he say?
Walter: He said not to answer the phone.
3. Don: Take the car to the garage, please.
Jane: What did he say?
Joe: He said to take the car to the garage.

I Come j here. j Don’t go there.

nr
^
|He said | to come | here. I He said I I not to go I
Remember to change the verb to the infinitive.
there.

Page 172 Nonintensive ALC , Volume 3, Lesson 14

$ GRAMMAR: REPORTING REQUESTS
NOTES

Can you work What did he

late tonight? ask you?

jJV "

Ross
IL
Jack Don Jack

Read the examples with a partner.

1. Mary: Can you come to the party on Friday?
George: What did she ask you?
Joan: She asked me to come to the party on Friday.
2. Jim: Would you help Tim with the repairs?
Joe: What did Jim ask you?
Sam: He asked me to help Tim with the repairs.
3. Lisa: Could you arrange the flowers in the vase?
Peter: What did she ask you?
Gloria: She asked me to arrange the flowers in the vase.

Would you open the door, please?

She asked me to open the door.

Be sure to change the pronoun and verb in reported speech.

Student Text Page 173

 NOTES EXERCISE A

Ask and answer questions about the commands. Number 1 is an

example.

Lt Rose: Go to the dispensary at 0700.

SSgt Jones: What did Lt Rose say?
Lt Berry: He said to ao to the dispensary at 0700.

Travel Agent: Do not bring a knife on the airplane.

Customer 1: What did she say?
Customer 2:

Teller: Would you say your full name, please?

Linda: What did he ask you?
Susan:

SSgt Harris: Sir, call Captain Ford before noon.

Maj Brown: What did SSgt Harris say?
Lt Green:

Father: Don’t leave the door open.

Jill: What did Dad say?
Tommv:

Mary: Would you put some gas in the truck?

Joe: What did she ask you?
Steve:

Ms. Ellis: Could you work late tonight?

Robert: What did Ms. Ellis ask you?
CULTURAL NOTE Bobbv:
In the US if you have a car
accident , a fire, medical
emergency, etc., the number Maj Smith: Get Capt Powers on the phone.
you need to call is 911.
Amn Riley: What did Maj Smith say?
Amn Star:

Page 174 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 14

 EXERCISE B

Read the text and underline the commands and requests.

Man Drives Truck into Department Store Window!

The police received a 911 call from Clark’s Department Store

yesterday. The store manager said to the police, “ Come immediately!
Someone just drove a truck into the front window of the store!”

When the police officer arrived at the store, he asked, “ Could you
explain what happened?” The store manager said , “ An old man was
driving the truck. He got very sick. He ran off the road and into the store
window. He’s in the truck now. Help him, please.” At the same time, a
|
woman said loudly “ Will someone please get a doctor?” Another woman
said, “ Call an ambulance now!” Then, a young man said, “ Help me get
the old man out of the truck!” Everyone worked together to get the old
man out of the truck. When the ambulance arrived, the police officer
said, “ Take the man to the hospital.”

The man spent one night in the hospital. He’s resting at home now.
His wife said , “ I was very upset about my husband’s accident, but so
|
many wonderful people came to help. Would you please thank all the
nice people who helped my husband?”

EXERCISE C

Answer questions about the text above using indirect speech.

Student Text Page 175

 -User Notes-

Page 176 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 14

 :

WHAT KIND OF WORK CAN I DO? LESSON 15

What kind of
newspaper article can I
write?

o
° o

GRAMMAR: EXPRESSING ABILITY WITH BE ABLE TO

Charles can / is able to take a vacation this year.

VOCABULARY:

Noun Verb Other

article news be able to famous
boss newspaper own
business occupation type Expression
businessman salesman work on What (kind of work) do you do?
businesswoman salesperson
cashier saleswoman
company secretary
dentist work
driver writer
magazine

Student Text Page 177

 LANGUAGE SKILLS

Qf LISTENING: IDENTIFYING WORD STRESS

Listen to a word and determine the
syllable with primary stress.

$ WRITING: COMBINING ELEMENTS OF A

SENTENCE
Expand sentences by combining terms,
phrases, and clauses.

Page 178 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 15

^
NOTES
VOCABULARY: OCCUPATIONS

Repeat the new words and read the sentences.

/ Vi
-- f
* /

m
k 1: /

Joe is a businessman. He has Becky is a secretary. She types

a small business. He owns five letters, answers the phone, and
taxis. His drivers really like the takes messages for her boss. Her
work . They like taking people to boss is Joe.
different places.

r r
r
r-
f
A
fm
Jill is a saleswoman . She sells Mike is a student and a cashier
computers for a big company . in a shop. He likes taking the
She wants to change her money, and he’s able to stand on
occupation because she doesn’t his feet and smile all day. He’ll
like traveling all the time. She make a good salesman when he
j
thinks a salesperson’s work is graduates from school.
very difficult.

Student Text Page 179

 NOTES

r k ^
'

"X
r xfjP
k
Nancy is a dentist. She works Paul is a famous writer. He
on people’s teeth. Many people writes articles for newspapers
come to her because she fixes and magazines. He writes about
people’s teeth well. important people who are in the
news .

EXERCISE A

Match the columns. Number 4 has more than one answer .

1. Writers a. collect money and give change.

2. Cashiers b. work on people’s teeth.

3. Drivers c. work in business.

4. Businesswomen d. try to sell things to people.

5. Secretaries e. take people and things to places.

6. Dentists f. type letters and answer phones.

7. Bosses g. write articles and books.

8. Salespeople h. manage or own offices and companies.

Page 180 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 15

 EXERCISE B NOTES

Complete the sentences with words from the box.

articles famous businessman occupation

work
business newspapers magazines own

Mike Jones lives in Dallas, but people everywhere know about him .
This is because he is
I
for the he
writes. He sells them to and These
articles are usually about things that are happening in the US. Right
j
now, he’s writing a story about the American family in today’s world.
He really likes his , but he’s also thinking about
what he’ll be doing in ten years. He’s thinking he might change his
He thinks he might want to a small
He can see it now: It’ll be a small shop, but it’ll be
full of interesting and hard-to-find books. He’ll have the best books of
any bookstore in Dallas. He knows he’ll be a great ,
because he has a “ head” for business1.

1 have a head for something - to be very good at something

Student Text Page 181

 msSBss
NOTES EXERCISE C

Read the paragraph and answer the questions.

I f f
$ *£
v

'
. 4

Rosetti’s is a famous restaurant. The owner, Emilio Rosetti, came to

the United States with his family 20 years ago. He had only $2000.00
and his mother’s cookbook. Today, he has all the things he needs, but it’s
hard work. Emilio has many people working for him. He has cooks and
dishwashers working in the back of the restaurant and cashiers and
waiters working in the front. He’s always repairing something in the
restaurant, too. When people ask, “ What kind of work do you do?”
Emilio just smiles and says he’s in the restaurant business. He’s very
busy and very happy with his occupation.

1. When did Emilio come to the US?

2. What did Emilio bring with him when he came to the US?

3. What is Emilio always doing?

4. Who works in the front of Rosetti’s?

5. What kind of work does Emilio do?

6. How does Emilio feel about his occupation?

Page 182 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 15

0 GRAMMAR: USING BE ABLE TO
NOTES

I was able to run five miles.

PAST I wasn’t able to run five miles.

She’s able to run five miles.

PRESENT She isn’t able to run five miles.

The soldiers will be able to run five miles.

FUTURE The soldiers won’t be able to run five miles.

«$ Be able to is similar to can , but it can be used in present, past,

and future statements.

EXERCISE A
1
Change can to BE able to. Look at the example.

Example: A cat can climb trees.

!
1
A cat is able to climb trees.

1. I can touch my toes.

2. What can you buy with a dollar?

3. Can a dog swim?

4. Animals can’t speak.

5. Jim couldn’t play basketball well.

6. They can’t arrive here tomorrow morning.

Student Text Page 183

 NOTES EXERCISE B

Write answers with ( not ) BE able to . Use the words in

parentheses. Numbers 1 and 2 are examples.

1. Can you help me tomorrow? (yes)

Yes, I' ll be able to help you tomorrow .

2. Who was able to run five miles? ( the boys )

The boys were able to run five miles.

3. Can he operate this big machine? ( yes)

4. Will you finish the homework? ( no)

5. When can Sue go back to work? ( next week)

6. What can people do with computers? (send e-mail)

7. Can we fly to the moon? ( no)

8. Who will pass the test tomorrow? (I )

9. Can animals speak? ( no)

10. Were the children able to swim in the lake? ( no)

Page 184 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3 , Lesson 15

 EXERCISE C NOTES

Complete the sentences.

1. Last year, I wasn’t able to .
2. Now, I’m able to .j
3. In another year, I’ll be able to .1
4. In 100 years, people will be able to .|
I
5. Children aren’t able to .
6. Adults are able to .
7. Birds are able to .I
8. With a lot of money a person’s able to S

9. Without money, a person isn’t able to

EXERCISE D

With a partner, ask and answer questions. Use BE able to . Make

up your own questions for Numbers 7 and 8.
1. How many sit-ups can you do?

2. Can you touch your toes?

3. How far can you walk?

4. Can you stay awake all day when you didn’t sleep the night before?

5. Can you sleep on an airplane?

6. Can you watch TV and read at the same time?

7.

8.

Student Text Page 185

 ^ LISTENING: IDENTIFYING WORD STRESS

Listen to a word and circle the number of the stressed syllable.

Example: de SCRIP tion 1 © 3 4 5

1. 1 2 3 4 5 5. 1 2 3 4 5

2. 1 2 3 4 5 6. 1 2 3 4 5

3. 1 2 3 4 5 7. 1 2 3 4 5

4. 1 2 3 4 5 8. 1 2 3 4 5

mi

1
WRITING: COMBINING ELEMENTS OF A
SENTENCE

Select the best word for each blank and rewrite the paragraph.

o 0 0 o 0 0
car dirty work hospital study hotel
newspaper hungry buy restaurant eat garage
cat sleepy find bank leave bank

Katy was on vacation. She bought a O . She was © and she wanted to
© a ©. She wanted to © before she went back to the ©.

Page 186 Nonintensive ALC , Volume 3 , Lesson 15

 NOTES
VOCABULARY: REVIEW WHAT YOU LEARNED

Review vocabulary from Lessons 11 - 15

EXERCISE A

Match each vocabulary item with its opposite.

1. upstairs a. together
2. lower b. downstairs
3. hurry c. give
4. adult d. raise
5. loosen e. slow down
6. receive f. child
7. alone g tighten

EXERCISE B

Complete the paragraphs with words from the box.

boss everyone owns famous business

mind be able to common would decided

:
Sarah’s store sells balls, baseball gloves, football uniforms, and
anything else you need for sports. Her family the
Sarah’s brother manages the store for her.
Next Saturday, Sarah is going to marry a writer.
All the workers in the store want to go, but the store stays open until
nine o’clock so they won’t go.
Her brother asked her, “ . you
closing the store Saturday afternoon?” It’s not a thing !
for the store to close; but Sarah is the !
She to close the store. She said to the people, “ Next 1
Saturday, the store will close early. can come to my
wedding.” Sarah’s a good businesswoman! She keeps her workers
happy.

Student Text Page 187

 NOTES EXERCISE C

Circle the best answer.

1. Greg has an interesting stamp

a. marriage
b. occupation
c. collection

2. Jim is his old car.

a. working at
b. working on
c. working about

3. Mike likes his occupation. He

a. works in a bank
b. eats donuts
c. drinks tea

4. The weather was not correct.

a. time
b. information
c. money

5. There are many to read at the library.

a. folks
b. articles
c. cashiers

6. I lost Bob’s pen. I need to it.

a. loosen
b. raise
c. replace

7. I need to buy more gas. I don’t have to get to work.

a. enough
b. jacks
c. flats

8. Could you ? Would you return this book to the library?

a. be in a hurry
b. do me a favor
c. remove the key

Page 188 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 15

 9. Can you help me fix the door? It sticks. NOTES
Bob:
Bill:
a. Sorry, I will.
b. Of course I can.
c. Certainly. I’ll pass it out.

10. Her daughter is a polite girl. She always

a. eats pie and ice cream.
b. cleans and dries the dishes.
c. says “ please” and “ thank you.”

11. I want to eat lunch in the school today.

a. cafeteria
b. escalator
c. supper

12. Do we have a umbrella in the house?

a. flat
b. spare
c. quick

13. You’re late for school. You have to

a. withdraw
b. keep on
c. hurry up

14. Bill: Do you have my phone number?

Tim: No, I don’t. I’ll now.
a. receive it
b. write it down
c. decide to do it

15. Put the on the sugar bowl, please.

a. air
b. wheel
c. cover

16. Mary is my cousin. She is a

a. wrench
b. relative
c. man

Student Text Page 189

 -User Notes-

Page 190 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 15

 HOW FAR IS IT FROM EL PASO TO HOUSTON? LESSON 16

Amarillo

Lubbock*

I Paso

FUNCTION : INFORMAL SOCIAL CONVERSATION

Bob: What kind of work do you do?
Alice: I’m a teacher. I teach English and Russian.

GRAMMAR : IMPERSONAL IT
Don: Is it cold outside?
Tim: It’s 35 degrees Fahrenheit.

HOW FAR. . .? AND HOW LONG. . .?

1
Kim: How far is it to Dallas?
Ted: It takes about four hours to get there.

VOCABULARY:

Noun Other Expressions

temperature about it (impersonal ) How far ...?
far long How long ...?
Verb from pleasant It takes ... to ...
take / took (distance / time ) how

Student Text Page 191

 NOTES
LANGUAGE SKILLS

READING: SELECTING A SUMMARY

Read a paragraph and select the best
summary for it.

SCANNING FOR INFORMATION

Scan a written text for specific
information.

WRITING: COMBINING ELEMENTS OF A

SENTENCE
Expand sentences by combining terms,
phrases, and clauses.

Page 192 Nonintenslve ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 16

 . . v
.
.
. : : ; ; ' '

. r

^ VOCABULARY: NEW YEAR ’S EVE IN THE CITY

Repeat the new words and read the paragraph.

New Year’s Eve in New York City is one of the biggest parties in the
world. Every year thousands of people from all over the world come to
Times Square. How far from home do they travel? How long does it
take to arrive? On New Year’s Day most people don’t care. They want
to be in the city It may be 30 degrees outside on December 31st. They
may leave pleasant temperatures to go there. These people don’t care.
They just want to be in the middle of the city at Times Square about
60 seconds before midnight. They want to count down the last seconds
of the old year. They don’t want to be far from the big ball with all the
lights. They want to see the ball drop to mark the start of the new year

EXERCISE

Complete the dialogs with words from the box.

from about take(s) pleasant

how long temperature far it

1. Dan: The day is sunny and warm. It’s very

Ken: I know. The is about 70° today.
2. Kate: is a day?
Carol: A day is 24 hours.
3. Tom: How long does it to drive
Austin to Houston?
John: takes two hours to get there.
4. Mary: Is Dallas from San Antonio?
Joe: No. It’s 270 miles.

Student Text
'
Bfi : i Page 193
 NOTES
$ GRAMMAR: USING HOW LONG...? AND
HOW FAR...?
Look at the chart and listen to your teacher.

How long .. .?
Use How long to ask questions about time.
How long is the movie?
How long did he work there?
Use How far...? to ask questions about distance.
How far is the mall from here?
How far did you travel today?

EXERCISE A

Match the questions with their answers.

1. How long did you wait in the office? a. 200 ft.

1 2. How far is Bangkok from Moscow? b. 2 weeks
3. How long was his vacation? c. 10 years
4. How far did he hit the ball? d. 4396 miles
5. How long was he a pilot? e. 20 minutes

EXERCISE B

With a partner, ask and answer questions.

I 1. How far is your home from here?

2 - How long do you have to travel to get to work everyday?
| 3. How far is New York from here?

1 4. How long will you study English?

| 5. How far can you run?
? 6 How long do you want to stay in the military?
-
7. ?

Page 194 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 16

$ GRAMMAR: USING THE IMPERSONAL IT
NOTES

/T X^

1. A: What time is it?

B: It’s midnight.
A
2. A: What day is it?
B: It’s Tuesday.
3. A: Is today May 24?
B: No, it’s May 25.
4. A: Is it going to rain today?
B: Yes, it’s starting to rain now.
5. A: What’s the temperature today?
B: It’s very hot. It’s 95 degrees Fahrenheit.
6. A: How cold is it in Canada in the winter?
B: It’s very cold. It snows.
7. A: How far is it to Austin?
B: It takes an hour to get there by car.
8. A: How long does it take to get to the mountains?
B: It takes about four hours.
9. A: Is it far to your office from here?
B: No, it’s only 5 miles from here.

Use it as the subject of sentences about time, weather,

temperature, and distance.

Student Text Page 195

 NOTES EXERCISE A

Ask and answer questions about the time and date.

Example: SI: What time is it in Cairo?
S2: It’s 9:00 p.m. on Friday.
SI: When it’s 9:00 p.m. in Cairo, what time is it in
Tokyo?
S2: It’s 3:00 a.m. the next day in Tokyo.

THE WORLD CLOCK

© Honolulu
Friday, 28 May
Morning
^ ‘ -
5

Washington, D.C.
Friday, 28 May
Afternoon
4

Madrid
Friday, 28 May
Evening

Cairo
Friday, 28 May
4 .

Bangkok
Saturday, 29 May
r. Tokyo
Saturday, 29 May
Evening Morning Morning

EXERCISE B

Put a time on the clock. Then, ask your classmates questions

about your city clock and the clocks of the world. Use the
example from Exercise A.

SI: What time is it here?

S2: ( It’s 3 p.m. on Friday.)
II 2
* V
SO 2
SI: When it’s 3 p.m. on Friday here,
-

9 3
what time is it in Tokyo?
8 4
7 6 5. S2: ( It’s 9 p.m. in Tokyo. )

Page 196 NonintensSve ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 16

 EXERCISE C NOTES

Ask and answer questions about distance and time.

Example: SI How far is it from San Antonio to Dallas?

S2 It’s 270 miles from San Antonio to Dallas.
51 How long does it take?
52 It takes about 5 hours by car.

ATLANTA
DRIVING DISTANCES
710 CHICAGO
100 Miles = 2 Hours Driving Time (without stops)

820 920 DALLAS

790 1090 250 HOUSTON

LOS
2190 2050 1400 1540 ANGELES
NEW YORK
850 810 1560 1610 2790 CITY
1000 SAN
1210 270 200 1390 1820 ANTONIO
620 710 1310 1370 2650 240 JlIgMwASH. D.CI .

EXERCISE D

Ask and answer questions using the forecast chart below.

Example: SI: Is it going to rain on Tuesday?
S2: No, it’s not going to rain on Tuesday.
SI: How warm will it be on Thursday?
S2: It’s going to be 85 degrees.
5-DAY WEATHER FORECAST

TODAY MONDAY
o
o
TUESDAY
&o
WEDNESDAY THURSDAY
Wind Rain Clouds Sun and clouds Sun
LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH
52° 62° 59° 65° 60° 72° 67° 79° 70° 85°

Student Text Page 197

 NOTES
< / FUNCTION: INFORMAL SOCIAL
CONVERSATION
I Listen to your instructor; then read the dialogs.
Jim: It’s good to see you, Sara . How are your parents?
Sara: They’re fine. And how’s your brother?
Jim: He’s doing well. He just got a new job.
Sara: Oh, really? What kind of work does he do?
Jim: He’s a salesman. He sells computers for a big company in
California.
Sara: That’s great! How’s the weather there?
Jim: It’s beautiful. It’s sunny and warm most of the time.
Sara: Sounds wonderful. Please tell your brother “ hello” from
me.

EXERCISE A

Read the sentences with a partner.

Talking about the family

How’s the family? Fine, thank you. And yours?

How’s your wife? She’s fine, thanks.
I spoke with my son yesterday. Did he have good news?
I visited my parents last month. Oh, really. How are they?

Talking about the weather

How’s the weather in Dallas? It’s pleasant right now.

Do you like this hot weather? Yes, it’s good for swimming.
When will the weather change? I don’t know exactly.
Is it colder here or in your country? It’s colder in my country.
Talking about occupations

What do you do? I’m a salesperson. I sell cars.

How’s your work? Not good. I want another job.
What kind of job do you have? I’m a truck driver.
What are you working on? I’m repairing a truck.

Page 198 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 16

 EXERCISE B NOTES

Match the questions and answers .

*•
1

&
s* m r
m
»
.
1. How’s your son feeling?
2. How do you like this rainy weather?
3. Do you have a job?
4. What kind of work would you like to do?
5. My parents called me last night.
6. What are you working on?
7. Do you think it’ll snow today?
8. How are your wife and the new baby?

a. Did they have good news to tell you?

b. Yes, it’s very cold and there are so many clouds.
c. I’m fixing this old bicycle.
d. He’s better, thanks.
e. No, I’m out of work right now.
f. I’d like to manage a big company.
g. They’re both doing well. Please come and visit them soon.
|
h. The rain’s good for my vegetable garden.

Student Text Page 199

 NOTES EXERCISE C

Read the short dialogs.

1. SI: How are the children? 2. SI : Do you have a job?

S2: All three are sick. S2: No. Not right now.
SI: Oh, I’m sorry to hear it. SI: I see.

3. SI: How was the weather in 4. SI: Is it always this hot in

London? summer?
S2: It rained every day. S2: Sometimes it’s hotter.
SI: That’s too bad. SI: You don’t say.

5. SI: What do you do? 6. SI: How’s your niece?

S2: I own a newspaper. S2: She finally graduated.
SI: Really? SI: That’s great!

EXERCISE D

Practice making small talk with your classmates and your

instructor.

Talk about: Respond to information with:

your job That’s interesting.
your family That’s wonderful!
the weather That’s too bad.
I’m sorry to hear it.
I see.
Okay.
Really?
Oh?

Page 200 Nonintensive ALC , Volume 3, Lesson 16

 NOTES
JH4 ,
li^PWMS?SS»
READING: SELECTING A SUMMARY
Study the chart; then, select the best summary.

A GOOD SUMMARY . ..

gives the main idea and the most important information .

does not show your opinion of the reading .
is very short .

I
m
Things move quickly in New York City. Everyone is in a hurry to
get somewhere. But where do they go to relax? Every day the people
of New York leave their worries at work and enter the gates of Central
Park , a large garden in the center of the city. After a long day, they enjoy l
relaxing in the park on one of the 9,000 benches or under one of the
26,000 trees. They play games on the Great Lawn, or watch a show at
the Delacorte Theatre. Some take a walk through the zoo. It doesn’t take ;
them long to forget their worries.

a. Many people enjoy hurrying through the garden at Central Park.

They can see people playing games. They sometimes leave their
wallets in the park and go back to work.
b. Many people enjoy relaxing in Central Park. They do things like
playing games, watching shows, sitting under trees, and looking at j
animals.
c. Many people leave their worries in Central Park. There are a lot of
trees and people. Because so many people play games in the park,
it is difficult to relax.

Student Text Page 201

 NOTES
WRITING: COMBINING ELEMENTS OF A
SENTENCE

Match the sentence parts.

Sally’ s Party

1. Sally is having a small a. movie to watch.

2. She’ll order b. and ask them to come.

3. Second , she’ll choose a c. party tomorrow night.

4. Finally, for dessert she’ll d. but Sally enjoys seeing

friends.
5. First , she’ll call her friends e. pizza tomorrow evening.

6. Then, she’ll go shopping f. serve pie and ice cream.

7. This kind of party is work, g. for drinks and snacks.

EXERCISE

Write the sentences above in the best order.

Page 202 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 16

 S y;y ;; ; mssm- ; ::
. ; :: ;v
. : y v VWH .
.
.
.
"

NOTES
READING: SCANNING FOR INFORMATION
Read the questions. Then, scan the weather page to answer the
questions.

1. How’s the weather in San Antonio today?

2. What’s the low temperature in New York this morning?

3. How’s the weather in Chicago today?

4. What’s the high temperature in Houston this afternoon?

5. What’s happening in Dallas?

6. Is it cold in Los Angeles this afternoon?

Student Text Page 203

 -User Notes-

Page 204 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 16

 . ,/ 8B&S& ¥ frl VS? 92
' \ '

HAVE YOU MADE AN APPOINTMENT? LESSON 17

KL

r\\
' :~4 <
'

\ . ; >*•

/ FUNCTION : MAKING A MEDICAL APPOINTMENT

Clerk: Dr. Hale’s office. May I help you?
John: I need to make an appointment for my annual checkup.

$ GRAMMAR: PRESENT PERFECT ( BE / HAVE WITH SINCE / FOR )

Maria has had a fever since Monday.
Rex has been sick for a week.

IlHHHHnHHBSiaSnHeseiax
VOCABULARY:
Noun Verb
appointment come / came / come in parallel
checkup connect perpendicular
dot make / made / made (it ) regular
emergency see / saw / seen (a doctor ) since
exam sometime
examination Other still
inch annual then
middle any longer vertical
patient anymore
physical horizontal Expression
problem in How about.. .?
symptom out

Student Text Page 205

 NOTES
„
LANGUAGE SKILLS

Q LISTENING: IDENTIFYING THE TOPIC

Listen to a text and select its topic.

READING: FOLLOWING INSTRUCTIONS

Follow written instructions.

Page 206 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 17

 NOTES
VOCABULARY: MEDICAL APPOINTMENTS

There are four different kinds patient is well again after the first
of medical appointments that problems end.
people usually need to make. A
receptionist at a doctor’s office will ANNUAL PHYSICALS
answer the phone and talk to the A patient may also call to make
patient to find the best time to an appointment for an annual
see the doctor . physical . Patients have an
REGULAR APPOINTMENTS examination like this one time
a year. The exam takes more time
When patients call to see the than a regular appointment . The
doctor because they are sick, they receptionist schedules two hours
usually need an appointment
for the physical because the doctor
that is about 20 minutes long.
has to check all parts of the body
Then they make a regular
appointment . The doctor will
and do many tests.
ask them questions about how EMERGENCIES
they feel or which parts of their
body hurt . He’ll ask about their Patients sometimes need to
problems and symptoms. see a doctor immediately because
they are very sick or they were in
CHECKUPS an accident . Often , emergency
After the first appointment , patients go immediately from
patients sometimes need to the doctor’s office to the hospital .
make a second appointment for For very bad emergencies, the
a checkup. In this appointment , patient should call 911, and not
the doctor just checks that the the doctor’s office.

EXERCISE A

Read the text. Then answer your instructor’s questions.

The receptionist.

» *

Student Text Page 207

 NOTES
EXERCISE B

Read the sentences. Write T for true and F for false.

1. The receptionist answers the phone.

( ' 2. Regular appointments are usually 20 minutes long.

3. An annual examination happens two times a year.

4. Patients never make a second appointment.

5. Patients call 911 for bad emergencies.

6. Doctors usually send emergency patients home to rest.

7. A physical exam is about 2 hours.

8. There are 4 kinds of medical appointments.

9. People tell the receptionist their symptoms and problems.

EXERCISE C

Write the correct word on the line. Use the words in the box.

out symptoms see the doctor

physical patients emergencies

1. Dr. Jones will be _ all morning. He’ll

return this afternoon.
2. All new . must fill out these papers.
3. He doesn’t feel well. He needs to .
4. Before I can play soccer, I need to get a _
5. The doctor wants to know all your
6. Please go to the hospital for all bad .

Page 208 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 17

^ VOCABULARY: IS DR . COLE IN?

Read the dialog of a phone conversation with a partner.

Receptionist: Dr. Cole’s office. May I help you?

Mr. Thomas: Is Dr. Cole in?
Receptionist: Dr. Cole is out until 9 o’clock. Are you a patient?
Mr. Thomas: Yes. My sore throat is worse. Is Dr. Jones in?
Receptionist: No. Dr. Jones doesn’t work here anymore .
Mr. Thomas: He doesn’t work there any longer? That’s too bad . I liked
him.
Receptionist: Let me look at the schedule, { pause ) Can you come in at
10:30?
Mr. Thomas: No. I want to come in sometime sooner than that , please.
Receptionist: How about 9:30? Can you come in then?
Mr. Thomas: Yes, I can make it then. Thank you.
Receptionist: May I have your name and phone number?
Mr. Thomas: Dan Thomas, 555-2239.
Receptionist: Okay, Mr. Thomas. We’ll see you at 9:30.

EXERCISE A

Work with a partner to put the words in order.

1. don’t / we / eat / anymore / there

2. in / captain / is / the / ?

3. can’t / make it / then / 1

—
4. live / any longer / he / on / doesn’t / Main Street

5. mall / go / sometime / week / this / we / can / the / to

Student Text Page 209

 NOTES
EXERCISE B

Select the correct answer .

1. The doctor is giving Bob
a. an exam
b. a symptom
c. a fever
d. an appointment

2. Every year in June, our office has picnic.

a. an ugly
b. an annual
c. a rainy
d. a round

3. Paul got up late. He can’t to class on time.

a. be out
b. make it
c. get on
d. check in
4. The Wilsons don’t live in Dallas They moved to Miami.
a. sometime
b. always
c. any longer
d. seldom
5. Gina’s house will be ready in June. She’s staying with us
until
a. anymore
b. any longer
c. sometime
d. then

6. I’ll visit Washington But, I don’t know when.

a. sometime
b. regular
c. any longer
d. then

Page 210 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 17

 / FUNCTION: MAKING A MEDICAL
APPOINTMENT

1 . MAKING A REGULAR APPOINTMENT

Receptionist: Dr. Davis’ office. May I help you?
Patient: This is Joe Lewis. I have a fever. I’d like an appointment
to see Dr. Davis sometime today.
Receptionist: How about at 2 o’clock, Mr. Lewis?
Patient: Yes, I can get there by 2:00.
Receptionist: We’ll see you then .
Patient: Thank you.

2. MAKING AN APPOINTMENT FOR AN ANNUAL PHYSICAL

Receptionist: Dr. Davis’ office. May I help you?
Patient: Good morning. This is John Smith. I’d like to make an
appointment with Dr. Davis for an annual physical exam.
Receptionist: Good morning, Mr. Smith. The doctor only does physicals
on Mondays. March 5th , at 8 a.m., is the first appointment
that I can give you.
Patient: That’s fine. Thank you.
Receptionist: We’ll see you then, Mr. Smith. Please don’t eat anything
after 8 p.m. the night before the exam.

3. FINDING A NEW DOCTOR

Receptionist: Dr. Davis’ office. May I help you?
Patient: Good morning. This is Jan Dole. I’d like to make an
appointment with the doctor. I’m not sick. I’m new in
town, and I’m looking for a doctor for my family.
Receptionist: Can you make it into our office on Thursday, March 5th, at
10:00?
Patient: Yes, that’s fine. I can come in then.
Receptionist: May I have your name again and a phone number?
Patient: Jan Dole, 555-4321.
Receptionist: Thank you. We’ll see you Thursday at 10:00.

Student Text Page 211

 NOTES EXERCISE A

Match each question with its answer.

1. Is the doctor in? a. No, I’m just sick.

2. Is this an emergency? b. Bill Thompson.

3. Are you a regular patient? c. My head hurts badly.

4. May I have your name? d. I can make it then.

5. Do you have insurance? e. No, I’m a new patient.

6. What symptoms do you have? f. I had an exam in May.

7. When was your last checkup? g- No, I don’t.

8. How about Friday at 10:00? h. No, he’s out today.

EXERCISE B

In pairs, put the sentences in order. Number 1 is an example.

MS . TAYLOR IS CALLING FOR AN APPOINTMENT

No, but my temperature is up to 101.9.

I’d like an appointment, please.

Can you come in at 3 o’clock today?

Yes, that’s fine.

Is this an emergency?

May I have your name and phone number, please?

1* Dr. Davis’ office. May I help you?

Jane Taylor, 555-9876.

We’ll see you at 3:00, Ms. Taylor.

Pag© 212 Nonintensive ALC , Volume 3, Lesson 17

 EXERCISE C NOTES

In pairs, role-play making an appointment. Use the schedules in

Appendix H.

mm
i
mm
•semmW' M

m-
'

&
m
I
*
I

O LISTENING: IDENTIFYING THE TOPIC

Listen to a paragraph and select the topic.

Paragraph 1:
a. keeping healthy
b. finding a doctor
c. getting checkups
Paragraph 2:
a. pay phones
b. local calls
c. wrong numbers
Paragraph 3:
a. how to get ready for a test
b. how to memorize new words
c. how to write test questions

Student Text Page 213

 NOTES
GRAMMAR: PRESENT PERFECT ( BE / HAVE
WITH SINCE / FOR )

Look at the chart and listen to your instructor.

I / We
have been here for ten minutes.
You / They
(not)

He / She / It has had the ball since 1 p.m.

Now Present Perfect Tense

For refers to a period of time that
started in the past and continues up
to now.
Sue has been here for two hours.
#
Since refers to a point in time in the
past when something started and is
still true.
We have been in class since 7:30.

Actions that began in the past and are still happening.

EXERCISE A

With a partner, take turns reading the sentences. Then change

the sentence using a contraction. Look at the example.

Example: I have been in the USA since 1992.

I' ve been in the USA since 1992.
1. Jill has been in class for three hours.
2. The team has had PT since last night.
3. We have had a great vacation for six days.
4. The officers have been in a meeting for over two hours.
5. You and I have had different roommates since January.

Page 214 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 17

 EXERCISE B NOTES

Review the chart. Underline all the verbs and time markers in
the sentences.

has now.
bought in May.
Jim his car
for four months.
has had
since May.

1. Right now, it is 1 p.m. in the afternoon. Dan went to the shopping

center at 11 a .m. He is still there. He has been at the shopping
center for two hours.
2. Jim had a truck last year. He has a new car now. He has had it for
four months.
3. The ship is in the ocean. The sailors have been on the ship for eight
months.
4. Mr. Wilson was in New York last week. He is still in New York. He
has been in New York since last week.
5. It is 3 p.m . We came to school seven hours ago. We have been here
since 8 a.m .

EXERCISE C

Write the correct verb tense on the line.

1. Dan and Jim at the gym yesterday.

are / were / have been
2. My brother my tools since Friday.
has / had / has had
3. Lt McBride in the US Air Force now.
is / was / has been
4. Tom in the country since last week.
is / was / has been
5. The Millers a son in 1998.
have / had / have had

Student Text Page 215

 NOTES EXERCISE D
|1

Write for or since on the line.

for a week (a period of time)

Sat Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Mon Tue

since Monday (a point in time)

j 1. for five years 6. last month

| 2. since 10:00 p.m. 7. Wednesday
3. June 8. 45 minutes
4. a month 9. two hours
5. 1999 10. vesterdav

EXERCISE E

Rewrite the sentence using the present perfect. Number 1 is an

example. Use contractions.

1. Captain Hunt is in Texas, (for one month )

Captain Hunt' s been in Texas for one month.

2. The airmen aren’t in the barracks , (since this morning)

3. You have a bank account , (since last year )

4. I am home from work, (for two hours)

5. Pat isn’t in the office, (since Monday)

Page 216 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 17

 1
NOTES
V GRAMMAR: ASKING PRESENT PERFECT
QUESTIONS

Look at the chart and listen to your instructor.

<
They I have been to the US before.

y
| Have |;
>| they | been | to the US before?

EXERCISE

Read the answer, then write a yes / no question. Number 1 is an

example.

I Have you had this appointment long?

Yes, I’ve had this appointment for three months. / Yes, I have.

2.
Yes, I’ve had this job since last year. / Yes, I have.

3.
No, he hasn’t been sick all week. / No, he hasn’t.

4.
No, we haven’t been in the library for an hour. / No, we haven’t.

Yes, he’s been in France for five years. / Yes, he has.

6.
No, the teacher hasn’t given the test. / No, she hasn’t.

7.
No, she hasn’t eaten lunch? / No, she hasn’t.

8. j
Yes, they have seen that movie. / Yes, they have.

Student Text Page 217

 NOTES
READING: FOLLOWING INSTRUCTIONS

This is a horizontal line.

j This is a vertical line.

|j These are parallel lines. They don’t cross or connect .

| These lines are perpendicular to one another.

• This is a dot .

This line is one inch long.

EXERCISE
1

Read the instructions. Draw the lines and dots in the boxes on
the next page. Number 1 is an example.
1. Draw a square. Put a dot in the middle , or center of it.
2. In the middle of the box, draw three horizontal lines that are
parallel.
3. Draw three dots but not in a straight line. Connect the dots with
lines.
4. Draw a horizontal line near the bottom of the box. At the end of it ,
draw a vertical line going up. These lines are perpendicular to one
another.
5. Draw a one-inch line. Mark the middle of the line with a dot.
6. Draw a one-inch line near the bottom of the box. At each end of the
line, draw a one-inch perpendicular line going up. Then, connect
the tops of these two lines with a line that is parallel to the first
line.

Page 218 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3 , Lesson 17

 if NOTES
s
i
5;

1. 2. 3.
;
&

1
4. 5. 6.
I
i
I
I

:-

I
::

'

I
i

I ;

ii Wt&XMWMMs i IS
"

Student Text
.• . : . : V V:: :.: . mm MM .•• -ySS
liifc MMik : Page 219
 -User Notes-

Page 220 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 17

 mmm
HAS HE BEEN FEELING SICK? LESSON 18
MHHMiii

m i
V r

m‘H Jill

0 GRAMMAR: PRESENT PERFECT PROGRESSIVE

Tom: Have you been studying English today?
Mary: Yes, I’ve been studying all day.

^ VOCABULARY:

Noun
ache nurse
Verb
ache
back pain catch / caught / caught
backache sneezing cough
chest stomach run / ran / run
cold stomachache
cough
earache Other Expression
fever runny run / ran / run a temperature
headache

Student Text Page 221

 NOTES
Language Skills

READING: USING CONTEXT CLUES

Determine a word’s meaning from
context clues.

o LISTENING: MAKING INFERENCES

.g gnp§gg

Listen to a short dialog and select the

correct inference.
WRITING WHAT YOU HEAR
Write a short dictated text after hearing
it read.

Page 222 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3 , Lesson 18

 NOTES
VOCABULARY: DESCRIBING SYMPTOMS
Nurse: Ms. Lewis, the height on your
chart is five feet and five
Iff? inches. Is your weight still 135
pounds?
Jan Lewis: Yes, it is.
- Nurse: You told me you caught
a cold. What are your
symptoms?
Jan Lewis: I’m coughing and sneezing .
Nurse: Sneezing and a cough . Any
fever?
Jan Lewis: Yes. I’ve been running a temperature all day. My head
feels hot.
Nurse: Let’s check your temperature with
a thermometer. Do you have any
other problems, like a headache,
earache, or stomachache?
.
Jan Lewis: My head was aching, but it
doesn’t ache any longer. My
stomach and ears are okay.
- 1

Nurse: Do you have a runny nose?

Jan Lewis: Yes, it’s been running since yesterday. I have been
carrying tissues' in my purse.
Nurse: Well, you have a temperature. It’s 101 degrees. Just relax.
The doctor will be in to see you in a few minutes.

EXERCISE A

Fill out Jan’s medical chart.

PATIENT: Lewis Jan

LAST NAME FIRST NAME
DATE WEIGHT HEIGHT TEMP SYMPTOMS

1 a soft thin piece of paper used for wiping noses

Student Text Page 223

 NOTES EXERCISE B

Repeat the sentences after your instructor.

1. Jan has a backache. 4. I have a headache.

Her back aches. My head aches.

2. She has an earache. 5. Jan has a chest pain.

Her ear aches. Her chest hurts.

3. Jan has a stomachache. 6. Jim has aches in his legs.

Her stomach aches. He has pain in his legs.

EXERCISE C

Match each vocabulary word with its meaning.

1 1. ache a. medical person who helps doctors

2. chest b. to have a fever

: 3. nurse c. top front of body below the neck

; 4. runny d. aches, coughing, and nose running

1
5. to run a temperature e. something wrong

6. cold f. a nose with a cold is like this

; 7. problem g - a continuous dull pain

i

Page 224 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 18

 NOTES
EXERCISE D

Use the words in the box to label Jan and Frank’s symptoms.

cough runny nose

chest pain earache backache
headache stomachache

Q
i *

V
Q

V II
6
: * r- i
m

mx
i
i
k

' J

Student Text Page 225

 NOTES
0 GRAMMAR: PRESENT PERFECT PROGRESSIVE

Choose a verb from the box and write it under the picture it
describes.

o 0

He has been . Who has been . _?

shopping
cooking
washing
working

She has been . Have they been _?

the dishes.

I / We /You /They have

(not ) been verb + ring
He / She / It has

Page 226 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 18

 EXERCISE A NOTES

Read the paragraph and underline the present perfect

progressive.
| [
Mary hasn’t been feeling well all week. She hasn’t been eating all her
meals. She just doesn’t like the taste of food. She has decided to call her
doctor, Dr. Jones, and tell him her symptoms. Mary’s been going to Dr.
Jones since she was a little girl.
Her appointment is for 10 o’clock. She’ll take the 9 o’clock bus to his
office. Mary doesn’t drive. She’s been taking the bus all her life.
Mary has been thinking about her symptoms all morning. What has
been making her feel so bad? Maybe it was that fish she ate last week.
She’s sure that’s the reason. Her stomach has been hurting since then.
Mary’s decided never to eat fish again.

EXERCISE B

Select a verb and write it in the present perfect progressive.

Clean and sleep are examples.

clean run read study

sleep eat cough cook

Example: clean
Jack' s dirty because he' s been cleaning the house.

sleep
She' s tired because she hasn' t been sleeping.

1. My eyes hurt because

2. He’s not hungry because
3. I’m going to the doctor because
4. Don will pass the test because
5. Our feet hurt because
6. Kate’s hot because

Student Text Page 227

 NOTES EXERCISE C

|Write a yes / no question for each statement using the verb in

i the parentheses. Number 1 is an example.

: 1. You look tired ( run )

, Have you been running ?

2. You’re wet. ( swim )

3. You look thinner, (exercise )
s 4. She looks angry, ( waiting long)
5. He’s hungry again (eat enough )
,

6. You look sleepy, ( rest )

EXERCISE D

Write information questions for the verbs in the parentheses in

.
Exercise C above Number 1 is an example.

1 Why have you been running?

2. Where
3. How long
4. Why
5. What
6. How long

EXERCISE E

On a piece of paper, write time phrases that can be added to the

sentences using the present perfect progressive in the exercises
above.
Example: all morning

Page 228 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 18

 S * \ < iT * v ; . • • .. ^ • . • ; >

EXERCISE F NOTES

With your partner ask and answer questions about the picture .
Be sure and use time phrases Look at the example. .
Example:

I Has he been watching TV all morning?

No, he hasn' t been watching TV all
P morning . He' s been watching TV for an
hour.
:
How long has he been watching TV?
He hos been watching TV since 3:00 p.m.

r lar
m
.

.
*
/

P i
„•

© Q

|g . — ‘ v
is*

m _
.
....

SL

n
i
m
V * <$•

V !

l
*

Student Text Page 229

 NOTES
READING: USING CONTEXT CLUES

Read the sentence. Use the words in the sentence to find what
the underlined word means. Write may be, is not, or is on the
line. Look at the example.

Example:
a. Stop at the intersection.
An intersection P}QVpe a street corner.
may be a kind of gate.
r0PY. Pe a store.

b. Stop at the intersection with the traffic light.

An intersection may be a street corner.
may be a kind of gate.
is n t a store.
°
c. Stop at the traffic light at the intersection of Martin
and Pine Streets.
An intersection !§. a street corner.
ilDPl. a kind of gate.
is not a store.

1. a. Peggy bought a magenta dress.

Magenta cheap.
long.
red.

b. Peggy bought an expensive magenta dress.

Magenta cheap.
long.
red.
c. Because she likes the color, Peggy bought an expensive
magenta dress with a short skirt.
Magenta cheap.
long.
red.

Page 230 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 18

 NOTES
2. a. I received a publication today.
A publication a call.
a magazine.
a package.

b. I received a publication in the mail today.

A publication a call.
a magazine.
a package.
c. I received a publication in the mail today. There are
some very interesting stories in it .
A publication a call.
a magazine.
package.

3. a.
Indigestion _ _ a stomachache.
. a sore muscle.
. a fever.

b. John’s temperature is okay, but he has indigestion.

Indigestion a stomachache.
a sore muscle.
a fever.
c. John’s temperature is okay, but he can’t eat because he
has indigestion.
Indigestion _ _ a stomachache.
. a sore muscle.
_ a fever.

Student Text Page 231

 NOTES
LISTENING: MAKING INFERENCES

Listen to three short conversations. Then select the correct

answer for each one.
1. The man is
a. staying home
b. planning a vacation
c. buying a plane ticket
d. renting a car

2. The man and woman work

a. in a store
b. at a school
c. for a magazine
d. in a restaurant

: 3. The two women

a. were late
b. had a flat tire
c. had an accident
d. were lost

LISTENING: WRITING WHAT YOU HEAR

Listen to a paragraph and write what you hear.

Page 232 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 18

I WILL LEARN TO DRIVE WITH CAUTION. LESSON 19
MMMK &$£$$£

lilt
SPEED
LIMIT
«ONE
4 ft £

WAY
.|

i XING

FUNCTION: INFORMATION ABOUT SAFE DRIVING

Lisa: What should you do when you see a railroad crossing?
Roger: Slow down and look both ways.

PS GRAMMAR: VERB + TO- INFINITIVE OF PURPOSE

I failed to learn the rules of the road.

VOCABULARY:
Noun turn Other
caution way ahead
crossing ahead of
instructor Verb cautious
intersection become / became / become cautiously
lane confuse in advance
mind fail ( to) lost
pedestrian flash miles an hour
railroad crossing follow miles per hour ( m.p.h.)
right-of-way get / got / gotten nervous
sidewalk mean / meant / meant one-way
sign pass relaxed
signal pull over two-way
speed signal
speed limit slow down
steering wheel speed / sped / sped ( up)
stop sign yield

Student Text Page 233

 NOTES
LANGUAGE SKILLS

O LISTENING: FOLLOWING INSTRUCTIONS

Listen to specific instructions and follow
directions.

Page 234 Nonintensive ALC , Volume 3, Lesson 19

^ VOCABULARY: THE DRIVING LESSON
Read the dialog.
Dad: Are you ready for your driving lesson?

Mark: Yes, but I get nervous behind the steering wheel .

Dad: You’ll become

more relaxed after
some lessons with
an instructor .
He’ll teach you how
f
‘1 1
to drive cautiously
at the right speed
and how to keep
your mind on the
road .

Later that same day ...

Dad: How was your driving lesson?

Mark: It was great , Dad! I feel a lot better now. The instructor
showed me how to be a cautious driver and how to
follow all the rules of the road. I learned how to make a
safe turn and how to pass other cars safely.

Dad: Good. After three more lessons, you’ll be ready for the test.

;
EXERCISE
v 'WKCWBKSH- -
. *&*&*£*&« nv . '

Write T for true and F for false.

1. Mark is a relaxed driver

2. A teacher will show Mark how to drive carefully.

3. Mark won’t learn to drive at the right speed .

4. The instructor taught Mark how to be a careful driver.

5. Mark didn’t learn how to make a safe turn.

6. Mark learned how to pass safely.

Mark is ready to take his test.

Student Text Page 235

 ^
NOTES
VOCABULARY: WHAT DO YOU THINK?

Read the e -mail message below.

From: Mark Swenson Sent: Sat 4/3/2007 11:02 a.m.

To: Jake Masters
Subject: What do you think?
Jake,
My dad finally gave me the keys to the car so I could go to the
movies. On my way to pick up John, I got lost . I didn’t stop to ask
for directions; I just kept looking for the correct street. I was trying
to be cautious.
Then, the street signs confused me. Next , I turned, but I failed
to signal . I didn’t realize a police officer was behind me. His car
lights were flashing, and I got very nervous. I sped up. The police
officer didn’t like that. He drove ahead of me, and he used a hand
signal to tell me to pull over. He said I was driving 20 miles an
hour above the speed limit . The officer didn’t want to hear my
explanation, and he gave me a ticket! Next time, I’ll slow down.
I thought my dad would be angry, but he wasn’t. He said I needed
to learn to drive with caution. Then, he said I had to work for the
money to pay for the ticket. That’s okay, I guess. I got upset when he
also said I couldn’t drive for a month! What do you think?
Mark

EXERCISE A

Fill in each blank with a word from the box.

failed to nervous lost pull over

speed up relaxed pass sign
mind steering wheel confuses cautious
| ' '
•

1. You’re not driving fast enough. Please

2. He didn’t know where he was. He was

3. Never another car on a hill.

4. Lots of traffic and noise me when I drive.

Page 236 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 19

 NOTES
5. I think we have a flat tire. We need to
6. Turn the to go left or right.
7. She didn’t do her homework. She do it.

8. I’m not worried or upset before a test. I’m

9. I don’t like to fly. I get when I have to fly.

10. A gives information or directions.

11. Be when you walk on ice!

12. Think about what you’re doing! Keep your on

what you’re doing.

EXERCISE B

Match the vocabulary term with its meaning.

1. flash a. give a message with hands or a sound

2. ahead of b. change in the direction you are going

3. turn c. how fast you may drive

4. speed limit d. teacher

5. signal e. in front of

6. speed up f. to become

7. caution g - to obey; in back of

8. instructor h. to shine light suddenly

9. follow i. be careful

10. get j - go faster

Student Text Page 237

 NOTES
VOCABULARY: ROAD SIGNS AND RULES
Read the information about road signs in the United States.

The stop sign tells you to The yield sign tells you to slow
make a full stop. down and yield to other cars.
Give them the right-of -way .

i
In most cities, pedestrians At a railroad crossing, slow
don’t walk on the street , down, look both ways, and stop
they walk on the sidewalk . when you see or hear a train.
This sign shows where they
may cross the street. It’s a
pedestrian crossing.

*
There’s an intersection
ahead. Two roads cross. Slow
down and look carefully in all
directions.
ALL WAY
This sign, together with the
stop sign , means all traffic at
the intersection must stop.

Page 238 Nonintenslve ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 19

 NOTES

SPEED
LIMIT
WfllW W
^ 40
You can go two ways on most This sign tells the speed, or
streets, but some are one - way miles per hour (m.p.h.) , you
streets. You may drive in only can drive. You should not drive

m
one direction. faster than the speed limit.

oz: A.
o
\ /

o
/ I \

When a yellow light flashes, Before you turn, signal with

that means use caution. Go your car lights or use hand
slowly and yield to other traffic. signals. This person is signaling S
in advance that he will make
a right turn.

Drive in the right lane of a two-way street until you

want to pass or go ahead of another car.

Signs on roads give drivers rules, instructions, or directions to

follow.

Student Text Page 239

 NOTES
EXERCISE A

Match each word to the word it goes with.

1. two-way a. limit

2. turn b. down

3. slow c. light

4. speed d. signal

5. flashing e. street

6. wrong f. sign

7. stop -
S rules

8. steering h. crossing

9. railroad i. way

10. follow j. wheel

EXERCISE B

Answer the question.

1. Which sign must people wait for their turn to go?

2. What do you call the place where streets cross?

3. What does m.p.h. mean?

4. Where do you drive over to cross a river?

5. What does the yellow light mean?

6. On which side may you pass on a two-way street?

7. When should you signal that you want to turn?

8. What do you call a person who is walking?

9. What kind of street goes in only one direction?

10. What is the word for how fast something moves?

Page 240 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 19

 NOTES
EXERCISE C

Complete the paragraph with the words in the box.

Pedestrians should use the and not

ways walk in the street. Vehicles have the

crossing -n street, and they may not be able to
cautiously
to pedestrians. Pedestrians should
sidewalk
intersections cross the street only at the pedestrian
yield and never between Before they cross
right-of-way the street , they need to look both

and enter the street

EXERCISE D

Draw a traffic sign from your country, and write the rule for it.
Explain to the rule to the class and give examples of where you
can see this sign.

Student Text Page 241

 NOTES
/ FUNCTION : ASK AND GIVE INFORMATION

There’s a stop Slow down and look

Traffic moves only
both ways at the
ahead. You must one way on this
stop before street. You must railroad crossing.
continuing. Don’t When a train is
drive and turn in
coming, stop and
just slow down! that direction.
wait until it passes.

1. 2. a

This sign tells you

the speed limit in There’s an
Slow down or stop
intersection ahead.
miles per hour. Do to give the right-of-
not drive faster Look to the right
way to vehicles on
and left for other
than the speed the other road.
traffic.
limit on the sign.

4. S. fi

Ahead, two lanes

will become one.
You may not turn
Move from the Don’t turn left at
right lane to the here to go in the
this intersection.
opposite direction.
left lane, and yield
to other cars.

7. 8. 9.

You are near a Pedestrians may

school. Watch for
There’s a curve cross the street here.
children. Slow ahead. Slow down Slow down, and
and keep right. Don’t watch for people
down and be ready
to stop. pass in the curve. on foot. Be ready to
stop.

10. 11 . 12.

Page 242 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 19

 NOTES
EXERCISE A

Ask a classmate questions about the traffic signs below.

o o ©

5
* + roEiaw‘Y

0
^
4
“

0 GF

ft
SPEED
LIMIT

70
k o

B STOP 4
Student Text Page 243
 NOTES EXERCISE B

I Discuss the meaning of the sentences.

1. Be careful! He’s backing up. Get away from there.
2. Get down, get down! Incoming missile!
3. Be on the look out for explosives. (BOLO)
4. Hit the ground! / Hit the floor!
5. Don’t touch that. It’s dangerous.
6. Hold it right there. / Hold it! Don’t come any closer.
7. Come back! / Come here.
8. Get out! Get out!
9. The IEDs (improvised explosive device ) are in this area.
; 10. Get on / off the bus, humvee, plane, etc.
i 11. Look out!
I
j! 12. Run don’t walk. Quickly, quickly
13. Where’s your ID, / gear, / etc.?
14. Go, now!
15. Get away from there!
16. Look for cover! Get cover!
17. Go straight to your tent , base, vehicle, etc.

I 18. Go get (the ) medic, help, interpreter, etc., ASAR

j 19. Do you understand what I said?
j 20. What’s your business here?
| 21. Where did you just come from?
. 22. Don’t get close to that!
j 23. ALWAYS take someone with you.
1 24. Don’t talk. Just stay there.
| 25. What do you need? / What do you want? / What is it you want?
I 26. This is a restricted area. Go around.

Page 244 Nonintensive ALC , Volume 3, Lesson 19

0 GRAMMAR: VERB + 70-INFINITIVE OF
PURPOSE
NOTES

I came
Why did you to meet new people.
come here?
I came I came
to learn English. to have fun.
English
?
Class
8:30 - 10j00 F

John came to learn English.

Bill came (here) to meet new people.

Sam came (to the school) to have fun.

Sam didn’t come (to the school) to study.

When the to-infinitive follows a verb, it tells the reason for doing
something.

Student Text Page 245

 NOTES EXERCISE A

Complete the sentences with an infinitive from the box.

to start to eat to buy to meet

to borrow to watch to study to make

1. Ann called the doctor’s office _ an appointment.

2. Mike came some money from his uncle.

3. We didn’t stay the end of the game.
4. Did Ken go to the restaurant his friends?
5. Henry isn’t moving to Arizona _ . a new job.
6. Can I use my credit card an airline ticket?
7. Roger went to Spain last summer Spanish.
8. Bill never stops breakfast on his way to work.

EXERCISE B

Use the words in parentheses to answer the questions.

1. Did you pay Ted to wash the windows? ( no / cut the grass )

2. Why did Robert call so late? (apologize for his mistake )

3. Do you always work late? ( no / make extra money)

4. What did the children use the paper for? (draw pictures)

5. Why will Janet go to the market? ( buy some vegetables )

Page 246 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 19

 EXERCISE C NOTES

Write questions for answers given.

1.
No, I don’t go to the gym to relax, I go there to work out .

2.
She’s going to travel to Germany to visit her grandmother.

3.
No, you shouldn’t open the window to let in some air.

4.
They’re stopping to ask for directions because they’re lost.

5.
No, he won’t use his bicycle to ride to school .

EXERCISE D

Complete each statement or question with £o-infinitive.

Complete Numbers 9 and 10 with a sentence and question of
your own.

1. We don’t use cars

2. Did von P'0 t,o school
3. People need money
4. Will von visit a travel -ent
ap 7

5. You should use a wrench

6. Do vou take vour car to the mechanic
7. T alwavs go to the mall
8. Are thev
J
stoppinp
Jr o
- 7

9.
10 . ?

Student Text Page 247

 - LISTENING: FOLLOWING INSTRUCTIONS

Listen to your teacher. Draw the symbols in the correct square

in the grid. Use the information in the key at the right.

A B C | KEY

A park

1 river

*H airport

building

2
•c highway

telephone

A railroad

3 m restaurant

A mountains

EXERCISE

Draw one or more shapes in each box of the grid.

A B C

Page 248 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 19

 MnMS
1
WHAT’S WRONG WITH MY CAR? LESSON 20
m&mmmsMmmmm *a& Wk *c issmiB $» ras
^
:

V
1

^ )
; GRAMMAR: ADJECTIVE (NOUN + SUFFIX - Y )
They drove on the snowy streets and icy roads.

TOO + ADJECTIVE
I can’t eat this soup. It’s too hot .

LINKING VERBS ( BECOME / GET )

Mary got lost on her way to the airport.

VOCABULARY:
Noun Verb Other
brake become / became / become greasy
charge charge noisy
credit get / got / gotten oily
engine grease too
grease guarantee
guarantee oil
motor stall
noise tune ( up)
oil warm ( up)
part
service
tune-up

Student Text Page 249

 NOTES
LANGUAGE SKILLS

^ LISTENING: FOLLOWING INSTRUCTIONS

Listen to specific instructions and follow
directions.

JSH READING: IDENTIFYING THE TOPIC AND

MAIN IDF A
IVIMUM lUtn

Read a paragraph and identify the topic

and main idea.

Page 250 Nonintensive ALC , Volume 3, Lesson 20

^
NOTES
VOCABULARY: HE NEEDS A MECHANIC
Repeat the new words and read the paragraphs.

Larry likes to work on his car. He changes the oil in his car every
3,000 miles. He uses five quarts to oil the parts that move inside the
engine . He also greases the
front end of his car. He puts
grease in all of the places that
need it. He enjoys the greasy ,
oily work, but there are some
car problems that Larry can’t
fix by himself.
i
For example, this morning
Larry started his car, and it
began making a lot of noise . :
The car stalled twice. After he
warmed up the engine, it was still too noisy. He didn’t think that he
could repair it himself. He called a mechanic:
Larry: This is Larry Jones. My car stalled two times this
morning, and the motor’s making a strange noise.

Mechanic: Bring it to the garage, Mr. Jones. I’ll check the engine and
give it a tune-up for you. Is anything else wrong?

Larry: Yes, as a matter of fact , the brakes don’t feel right when I
use them.
Sam: I’ll be glad to check the brakes, too.
Larry: Thank you. Can you tell me how much you’ll charge for
your services?

Sam: I won’t know until I look at your car.

Larry: When do I have to pay you?
Sam: When you pick up the car. You can pay with cash, by
check, or you can put the charges on your credit card.
Larry: I know you guarantee your work, but how long is the
guarantee?

Sam: I give all my customers a 30-day guarantee. When I fail to

do a job right the first time, I repair the car at no charge,
or you get your money back.
Later, Larry took his car to the mechanic. The mechanic tuned up
his car and fixed the brakes. Larry charged the work on his credit card.

Student Text Page 251

 EXERCISE A

Mark each statement with T for true and F for false.

1. Larry’s motor stopped two times this morning.

2. Larry hears a noise when he stops his car.

3. The mechanic will check only the engine.

4. The mechanic doesn’t know how much the repairs will cost.

5. The mechanic never returns customers’ money.

EXERCISE B

Complete each sentence with a word from the box.

part charges charge oiled

credit guarantee brake guarantees

1. Use the emergency when you park on a hill.

2. You have my that the car works.
3. Jim didn’t pay cash for his car. He bought it on
4. The tire company its tires for 50,000 miles.
5. When I can’t pay cash for an item, I it.
6. We didn’t have enough money for all the hotel
7. We saw only the first of the movie.
8. After he the lock, it was easier to open the door.

Page 252 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 20

 '
EXERCISE C i NOTES

Complete the chart and compare with other students .

These can stall: These usually have a guarantee:
a. a truck a.

b. b.

c. c.

d. d.

These need oil: These give a service:

a. a.

b. b.

c. c.

d. d.

These have a motor: These have brakes:

a. a.

b. b.

c. c.

d. d.

You can charge these: You can warm up these:

a. a. j

b. b.

c. c.

d. d.

Student Text Page 253

 NOTES
$!
1ijxi ' ^r
’
£
? '<* >?;„
GRAMMAR: ADJECTIVE ( NOUN + SUFFIX - Y)

noun suffix - y adjective

O
cloud
+
-y
= 9?8 S
cloudy

EXERCISE A

Fill in the blank with the correct form of the word.

grease 1. My hands were

greasy 2. My hands were covered with

oil 3. I don’t like fish.

oily 4. Fish is very healthy.

storm 5. There’ll be a rain tomorrow.

stormy 6. Tomorrow will be a day.

leak 7 . Does that cup have a ?

leaky 8. Is that a cup?

snow 9. fell all day yesterday.

snowy 10. Yesterday was a day.

fun 11. Everyone likes to have

funny 12. That is a joke.

Page 254 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 20

 EXERCISE B NOTES

Use the adjective form of the word in italics to fill in the blank.

Spelling Changes for Noun to Adjective

Nouns ending in a consonant add y. -
sleepsleepy
-
oil 4 oily
-
Nouns ending in -e , drop the e and add -y
-
grease greasy
-
ice icy
Nouns ending in -un , double the -n and add -y .
fun
run
—— funny
runny

Not all nouns can change into adjectives by adding -y .

1. The children have soap on their hands.

The children’s hands are
2. The sun usually shines in San Diego.
It’s usually in San Diego.
3. Does it rain much in the summer?
Is it very in the summer?
4. There was ice on the streets last night.
The streets were last night.
5. Does the soup have too much water in it?
No, the soup isn’t
6. When is there a lot of noise in the cafeteria?
It’s very in the cafeteria at noon.
7. There weren’t any clouds in the sky this morning.
The sky wasn’t this morning.
8. Is there salt in the ocean?
Is the ocean ?

Student Text Page 255

 NOTES
0 GRAMMAR: USING TOO + ADJECTIVE

Example: The baby’s hat is too large ,

or
The hat is too large for the baby.

. .

Too means more than enough, or more than one needs, or more
than one wants.

EXERCISE A

Choose the answer that is true.

1. That shirt’s too expensive.

a. $1.00
b. $200.00

2. This is too hot for a spring day.

a. 110°F
b. 40°F

3. That’s too far for a run.

a. 50 miles
b. 1 mile

4. This is too long for a class.

a. 15 minutes
b. 9 hours

5. That book’s too heavy.

a. 50 pounds
b. .5 pounds

Page 256 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 20

 NOTES
EXERCISE B

Use the word( s) in parentheses to write a sentence using too .

1. This coffee doesn’t taste good, (bitter )

2. She didn’t get on the first bus. (crowded )

3. Billy won’t wear those pants, (dirty)

4. I’ll be able to finish the homework, ( not difficult)

5. We didn’t have a picnic , (rainy)

6. They never order the chicken , ( greasy)

~
f |j j) LISTENING: FOLLOWING INSTRUCTIONS
Put the punctuation mark in the correct box. Use the key.

Columns Key |

B C Colon
A
Comma
1 ! Exclamation Point
- Hyphen
2
() Parentheses
3 Period
“ ” Quotation Marks
4
; Semicolon

Student Text Page 257

 GRAMMAR: USING THE LINKING VERBS
GET AND BECOME

tired.
got
better.
He
healthier.
became
a captain.

«$ Use only an adjective after get . Use an adjective or a noun after

become .

EXERCISE A

Match the two sentences.

1. When Emily gets too bored , a. the riders get angry.

2. Because she lost her ring, b. it sometimes rains.

3. When the sky gets cloudy, c. she goes shopping.

4. After she graduated from college, d. Jenny became sad .

5. Every time the bus is late, e. Lisa became a writer.

EXERCISE B

Fill in the blank with the correct form of get or become .

1. We lost because we forgot the map.

2. Janet studies medicine. She wants to a doctor.
3. Please turn off the TV. It’s too noisy in here.
4. Let’s go home. I’m tired of sightseeing.
5. Before he a father, Mark will look for a job.
6. Mark a cautious driver after his accident.
7. We practiced , and the work easier.
8. I think it’s going to rain. It’s very cloudy.

Page 258 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 20

 EXERCISE C NOTES

Complete the statements with your own words.

1. I usually get tired when

2. I become angry when

3. I get sick when
4. I get hungry when .

5. . when I exercise
6. when I watch TV a lot
7. when I do badly on a test

EXERCISE D

Interview a classmate and write his or her answers.

1. Do you usually get tired when ?

2. Do you become angry when . ?

3. When do you usually get sick?

4. When do you usually get hungry?

5. What happens when you exercise?

6. Do you get . when you watch TV a lot?

7. Do you get . . when you do badly on a test?

8. _?

Student Text Page 259

 READING: IDENTIFYING THE TOPIC AND
MAIN IDEA
THE TOPIC . . .
is the subject of the paragraph ,
k' is a word or phrase.
THE MAIN IDEA . . .
says what the writer thinks is important about the topic.
is a complete sentence.

|Example:
When you have colds, don’t give them to other people. Cover your
I nose and mouth when you sneeze and cough. Take your medicine, and
I follow your doctor’s advice. When your cold gets worse, stay home and
J rest. You’ll get well fester and your friends and family will be happier.
: They don’t want to catch your cold.
Topic: colds

Main Idea: Don' t give vour cold to other people.

EXERCISE

Read the paragraph. Then write the topic and the main idea.

A lemon is not just a fruit. A lemon is also a name for car which
1 doesn’t work right. When you buy a car,
|you don’t want to get a lemon. It has one
|problem after another A used car, or car
I which someone else owned before you did,
| can be a lemon. To buy a good car and not
j a lemon, try to get a lot of information K*
j about the car Talk to the owner Look at
|old bills for repairs. Ask about accidents.
Finally, ask a mechanic to look at and test
@ Up -
j drive the car With all this information,
j you can be almost sure that the car you want to buy isn’t a lemon.
Topic:

Main Idea:

Page 260 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 20

 I WOULD LIKE A REFUND, PLEASE. LESSON 21
isislBSisSiaiiliiSiiiaiiiisliiS(Ss|«saaiiSiiiiSSHiiiiS
^ii
it
V
imm
*

NX
mm

..
gy

FUNCTION : EXPRESSING DISSATISFACTION

Joan: I’d like to return this.
Clerk: Would you like to exchange it for another one?
Joan: No, I would like a refund please.

10 GRAMMAR : INDEFINITE PRONOUNS

James: Did anyone go to the game?
Dora: No, everyone watched it on TV.
ADJECTIVE CLAUSES
I am the one who broke the lamp. He’s the person that fixed it.

VOCABULARY:
Noun Verb Other
bug exchange anybody unhappy
fly give / gave / given back dissatisfied which
hose leak leaky who
leak refund no one
refund satisfy nobody
sales slip satisfied Expression
satisfaction somebody on sale
that

Student Text Page 261

 NOTES
LANGUAGE SKILLS

o LISTENING: IDENTIFYING THE TOPIC AND

MAIN IDEA
Listen to a text and select its topic and
main idea.

WRITING: COMBINING SENTENCES

Combine related sentences into a
compound sentence.

Page 262 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 21

^ VOCABULARY: SATISFACTION AND
DISSATISFACTION
Repeat the words. Then read the text.
NOTES

Jim bought a new hose for his yard at the U-Save department store
yesterday. When he read the paper this morning, he saw that the same
kind of hose was on sale at another store for four dollars less. He was
unhappy because he paid the regular
price for his hose.
Later Jim fastened his new hose
to an outside faucet and turned on
the water. The hose leaked! He felt
dissatisfied and decided to go back
to the U-Save store and tell the clerk
that he didn’t want a hose with a leak
in it.
The clerk took the leaky hose and
m
said, “ I’ll be happy to exchange this
for another hose. We always try to satisfy our customers.”
Jim told her that he didn’t want to exchange it, he said, “ No, I’d like
to get a refund .”
“Ican certainly give back your money,” the clerk said. “ Do you still
have your sales slip?” After Jim showed it to her, she refunded his
money.
Then Jim went to Save-More and bought a hose exactly like the first
one. Now he felt satisfied. He was very pleased to save four dollars.
Jim felt satisfaction when he turned on the water and the new hose
didn’t leak. He began to water his garden. But his satisfaction changed
to dissatisfaction again when he saw bugs eating his plants. Jim
became upset and decided to go inside and
relax in front of the TV.
Jim took a cold drink from the refrigerator
and sat on the couch to watch a basketball
game. Then he saw a fly circle the room . It
flew into his glass. Jim really doesn’t like
bugs.

Student Text Page 263

 NOTES EXERCISE A

Write four statements about the story. Ask a partner if they are
true or false.

I 2.
3.
| 4.

EXERCISE B

Fill in the blanks with the correct word.

satisfy satisfied satisfaction

flies bugs dissatisfied

1. There is great in a job well done.

2. There are many types of in the garden.

3. Joan’s cakes her family. They all like them a lot.

4. Dr. Jones is with his secretary’s work. She’s good.
5. are small bugs with wings.

6. Edgar was with the weak coffee.

|;j.-;* v i o V K^ ^ w :n ; V!*

EXERCISE C

Complete the sentences.

1
1. I was dissatisfied when

2. I was satisfied when — .

.

3.1 got a refund when

j
4. One bug I have seen is ___
5.1 once gave back —
6.1 once had a leaky

llllillillil
Page 264 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 21
/ FUNCTION: EXPRESSING DISSATISFACTION
NOTES

Customer: Excuse me, waiter.

Waiter: Is everything all right, sir?
Customer: Well, this coffee tastes bitter to me.
Waiter: I’m sorry. I’ll bring you another cup immediately.
Customer: Thank you .

Customer: I came to pick up my watch. I left it here last

week.
Clerk: I’m sorry, it’s not ready.
Customer: You said it would be ready today What’s the
problem?
Clerk: We had to order a part . It should be ready
tomorrow.
Customer: Would you mind calling me when it’s ready?

EXERCISE A

Select one word from each column to make correct sentences.

i
Look at the example sentence.

angry at the news

unhappy with Andrew
upset 1 about | the service
dissatisfied by j the waiter

1. I' m angry with the waiter.

3.
4.

Student Text Page 265

 NOTES EXERCISE B

Role -play with a partner.

• Customer in a store • Salesperson in a store

The shirt that you bought You’ll be glad to refund the
la last week is too tight. You customer’s money, but you lb
want your money back. You must have the sales slip
have your sales slip. first.

• Customer in a restaurant • Server in a restaurant

You’re a customer and You’re the waiter who
2a you’re dissatisfied with the served the customer a meal. 2b
meal. Tell the waiter. Try to make the customer
satisfied.

EXERCISE C

Write a role -play with a partner.

Page 266 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 21

:Q
:
GRAMMAR: INDEFINITE PRONOUNS

indefinite pronouns Examples

(a person,
someone + Someone broke his window.
but we don’t
somebody know who) ? Did somebody break his window?

no one + No one broke the window.

(no person)
nobody + Nobody in this room broke the window.
(any person, + Anyone could break a window.
anyone
but we don’ t ? Did anyone hear the window break?
anybody know who)
He didn’t see anybody break the window.

EXERCISE A

Circle the best answer.

1. can learn English. 5. will be at the airport

a. Anybody by 2:30 p.m.
b. Nobody
a. Anyone
2. Could please help me b. Someone
for a minute?
6. Did watch the baseball
a. somebody game last night?
b. nobody
a. no one
3. wears a tie to a gym. b. anyone
1
a. Anybody 7. My teacher says can
b. Nobody learn math well in 6 weeks.

4. Captain Ray won’t talk to a. someone

about the accident. b. no one

a. anybody
b. somebody

Student Text Page 267

 EXERCISE B

Read the newspaper story and answer the questions.

Heartville, Texas III Todciy^S NfiWS Sunday, March 23

gg Police look for truck driver

There was an accident at the corner of Main Avenue and 7th
Street late last night. A truck came down Main Street and ran
into a store window No one saw the accident, but someone heard
the noise and called the police. When the police arrived , they
found the truck, but not the driver. The police are now looking
for the driver of the truck. They are asking anyone with
information to call 555-4321.

1. Did anyone see the accident?

2. Did anyone hear anything?

3. Did anyone call the police?

4. Are the police looking for anyone?

5. What are the police asking?

Page 268 Nonintensive ALC , Volume 3, Lesson 21

 NOTES
EXERCISE C

Write a new sentence that means the opposite. Number 1 is an

example.

1. He had no one to talk to.

He had someone / somebody to talk to .

2. I didn’t see anybody.

3. Someone called the police.

4. Somebody’s in the building.

5. Nobody can pass the test.

6. Give it to anyone.

EXERCISE D

Change these statements to questions. Number 1 is an example.

1. He had no one to talk to.

Did he have anyone / anybody / someone / somebody to talk to? |
2. I didn’t see anybody.

3. Someone is calling the police.

4. Nobody’s in the building.

I
5. He didn’t give it to anyone.

Student Text Page 269

 NOTES
O LISTENING: IDENTIFYING THE TOPIC AND
MAIN IDEA

Listen to the paragraphs and write the topic and main idea.

1. Topic:
Main idea:
2. Topic:
Main idea:
;

0 GRAMMAR : ADJECTIVE CLAUSES

Adjective clauses
An adjective clause is a group of words that describes a noun or
pronoun. Adjective clauses begin with who, which, or that.
Who refers to people.
^ passed the test.
I’m the only person who
Which refersto things.
I want a car which doesn’t use much gas.
That refers to both people and things.
I like the apartment that has the big kitchen.
The man that spoke to you is Sam Owens.

EXERCISE A

Fill in the blank with who , which , or that .

j 1. Do you know the general is visiting the base.

j
2. Is this the tool broke last week?
3. I’d like to speak to the person sent this letter.
4. Is she at the bank is open late?
5. Mr. Wilson is the one helps the students.

Page 270 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 21

 NOTES
EXERCISE B

Select the adjective clause that best completes the sentence.

1. The pen ... is mine. a . who study hard

2. The clerk ... was very polite. b. which goes to New York

3. The flight ... is late. c. that’s on the table

4. Students ... do well on exams. d. who helped me yesterday

EXERCISE C

Ask your partner the questions and listen to the response.

1. Is that the book that has the answers? ( yes)

2. Was that the writer who became famous? ( yes )
3. Did they give you the address of the store which sells watches? ( no) :
4. Is she the woman that answered the phone last night? ( yes )
5. Was Captain Smith on the flight that left at noon? ( no)

EXERCISE D

Write the question for each answer.

1.
Yes, he’s the driver who missed the turn.

2.
No, this isn’t the car which was in an accident last week.

3.
Yes, this is the radio that doesn’t work.
j
4.
No, they aren’t the friends that I told you about.

Student Text Page 271

 $ WRITING: COMBINING SENTENCES
Combine the sentences using which, that or who .

Example: This is the bus. It goes downtown.

This is the bus which / that goes downtown.

1. That’s the apartment. It’s for rent.

2. I can’t find the clerk. He helped me.

3. The driver missed the turn. He was speeding.

4. The car belongs to his brother. It’s 50 years old.

5. The students passed the test. They studied.

—
6. The bowl is from Egypt. It’s on the table.

7. They have a new boss. He’s difficult to work with.

8. Dr. Clark gave me the medicine. It made me well.

Page 272 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 21

^
NOTES
VOCABULARY: REVIEW WHAT YOU LEARNED

Review vocabulary from Lessons 17 - 21.

EXERCISE A

Match the word to its meaning.

1. an ache a. medical examination

2. a physical b. to give someone what they want

3. to give back c. pain

4. to satisfy d. return

5. a symptom e. a sign that you are sick

6. a charge f. how much money you have to pay

EXERCISE B

Fill in the blank with the correct word.

stalled chest fever

bug horizontal earache
service pleasant perpendicular

1. His head feels hot. He has a

2. There was a in my food. It had six legs.
3. I was unhappy with the They didn’t help me.

4. A square is made of two vertical and 2 lines.

5. My ear hurts. I have an
6. Two lines that connect at a 90 degree angle are
7. My car stopped while I was driving. It
8. He was hit in the during the accident.
9. The trip was We enjoyed it.

Student Text Page 273

 NOTES EXERCISE C

Match the number on the left with the letters on the right.

1. customer a . roof
2. leaky b . brake
3. motor c. satisfaction
4. emergency d. card
5. charge e. oil

EXERCISE D

Choose the best answer to complete the sentence.

1. There’s a with my camera. I can’t load the film .
a . chest
b. patient
c. problem

I 2. The doctor is giving Bob

a. an exam
b. a symptom
c. a chest

1 3. Beth is using a thermometer. She has a

a . schedule
b. temperature
c. credit

4. The neck the head to the body.

a. aches
b. catches
c. connects

5. He has a in his arm .

a. pain
b. cold
c. physical

Page 274 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 21

 6. When my radio didn’t work, I took it back and got a NOTES

a. charge
b. refund
c. signal

7. When the Smiths couldn’t go on their trip, the travel agent gave
them that they could use for another trip.
a. change
b. service
c. credit

8. The students papers to check their answers.

a. leaked
b. exchanged
c. stalled
I
9. Our television repairman his work.
a. exchanges
b. stalls
c. guarantees
10. Sara really likes her new computer. She’s with it.
a. leaky
b. unhappy
c. satisfied

Student Text Page 275

 -User Notes-

Page 276 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 21

 THAT MOVIE IS ENTERTAINING . LESSON 22

n n 4

w
- '

PI
FUNCTION : ASK FOR AND GIVE OPINIONS
Jane: Did you like the new movie?
Joe: As a matter of fact, I thought it was great.

5l GRAMMAR: COULD ( PAST ABILITY)

We could see Bob, but he couldn’t see us.

VOCABULARY:

Noun Verb Other

cards could almost rude
channel entertain boring since
commercial feel / felt / felt dull terrible
entertainment frighten entertaining terribly
love laugh (at) frequently wonderful
plan love frightening
program plan (to) funny
spend / spent / spent great Expressions
impolite As a matter of fact,
reasonably In fact, ...

Student Text Page 277

 NOTES
LANGUAGE SKILLS

READING: USING THE DICTIONARY

Follow a specific series of written
instructions.

'
. miillllSIllfi IP v WM Wk Util ; . 2;
" V"•/
'
-? a i M l II
'
:

:
^ LISTENING: WRITING WHAT YOU HEAR
Write a short dictated text after hearing
it read.

Page 278 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 22

 p GRAMMAR: COULD ( PAST ABILITY) NOTES

I?
f

L
He can swim well.
PRESENT
He’s able to swim well.

PAST
He could swim very fast when he was younger.
He was able to swim very fast when he was younger.

Use could to express past ability. It means was able to.

EXERCISE A

Read the dialogs with a partner.

1. Don: Can you run a mile in five minutes?
Mike: I could when I was younger, but I can’t now.
2. Gloria: Could Henry repair the motor?
Ben: No, he couldn’t . He didn’t have the right tools.
3. Sam: How well could you hear the instructor?
Scott: I could hear her very well when she spoke loudly.
4. Tony: What could Sara eat while she was sick?
George: She could eat only soup.
5. Allen: Could your wife cook when you married her?
Bob: No, she couldn’t . But her mother taught her right away.

Student Text Page 279

 EXERCISE 6

Write questions with could . Number 1 is an example.

I Could you drive when you were 16?

Yes, I was able to drive when I was 16.

2.
No, Fred wasn’t able to mail the package.

3.
Yes, I was able to run ten miles ten years ago.

4.
No, he wasn’t able to help the lieutenant with his car.

5.
Yes, Ann was able to dance well when I met her.

6.
No, I wasn’t able to swim when I was four.

EXERCISE C

Answer the questions with could or couldn’t .

1. Was Joe able to describe the accident? ( No)

2. How much homework were you able to do? (about half of it)

3. Was Henry able to hear the TV? (Yes)

4. Were you able to change the reservations? ( No)

| 5. Who was able to read before he started school? (Bob )

Page 280 Nonintensive ALC , Volume 3, Lesson 22

 EXERCISE D NOTES

Work with a classmate and ask could questions. Use the words
and phrases in the boxes.

Could you ...?

swim when you were a child

salute
when you were five years old
draw
read before you began school
drive when you were ten years old
play soccer
cook anything before you finished school
run very fast when you were younger
play cards
a few years ago
speak 2 or more languages
use a computer easily before you became a soldier

Could you use

a computer easily a few No, I couldn’t. I didn’t
.. years ago? have one. Could you?

Studenl Text Page 281

 NOTES
VOCABULARY: ENTERTAINMENT ON TV

ENTERTAINMENT @ alcnews cmm . I

[ TELEVISION j NEWS | MOVIES RESTAURANTS HOME

Television
What ’s on TV tonight?
Go straight to the different kinds of TV schedules:

m Satellite, Cable, etc. Don’t spend time trying to

locate the newspaper schedules. This is a great way
to find out everything about the week’s TV schedule.
Click here for All Schedules .

Programs
Information about the variety of TV programs for
this summer. Find out which programs have no
boring commercials during the movies:
News, Family, Talk, etc. Click here for All Programs .

Channels
Find out which channels you feel are right for
you and your family, and which are the most
entertaining: NBC, HBO, CNN, ESPN.
Click here for All Channels .

Television News
Who are the most popular actors this year? Which
: programs do we love most? Which are terrible?
Which entertain people the best?
Click here for the Latest Story .
I
Y*. News that entertains us
Since they are both so famous, they married in
secret! Who married an actor on a plane?
Click here for Our Entertainment .

Page 282 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 22

 EXERCISE A NOTES

Complete each sentence with a word from the box.

feel since entertaining spends channels

boring variety entertainment commercials entertain

1. TV has a large of family shows.

2. NBC and HBO are examples of TV

3. I can’t go with you now I have to work.

4. My boss a lot of time at work.

5. Cities like Paris offer a lot of

6. We that too much TV is bad for children.

7. I change channels during the

because I think they are so

8. We like to . our friends on weekends.

9. Funny movies are usually very .

EXERCISE B

Match each word with its meaning.

1. since a. show on TV or radio

2. to spend a day b. funny and / or interesting

3. variety d . advertisement on TV or radio

4. to love e. because
5. program f. CNN, for example
6. channel g. many different things

7. entertaining h. to like very much

8. commercial i. to use time to do something

9. entertainment j. interesting things to do or see

Student Text Page 283

 NOTES
/ VOCABULARY: WATCHING TV

Mel: Do you like to watch family channels?

Sid: Yes, they’re wonderful . They have great shows. I just love them.
My family watches them frequently . What do you think?
Mel: Well, I feel that the shows are usually dull . There are too
many shows only for children and too many love stories.

Jan: What do you think of talk shows?

Sue: I think they’re terrible, just awful. And you?
Jan: As a matter of fact , I think they’re frequently very entertaining.
Sue: But the people on them are terribly impolite , really rude .
Jan: I think they’re funny . You’re supposed to laugh!

Joe: What’s your opinion about news programs?

I Kay: Since I like watching the news, I think they’re great. In fact, I
watch them while I eat supper. What about you?
Joe: I find them reasonably interesting. Sometimes I’m interested in
what they say, but I usually watch the sports news and nothing
else.

EXERCISE A

Write the word in the proper column.

great GOOD BAD

dull
rude
funny
awful
impolite
interesting
terrible
entertaining

Page 284 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 22

 NOTES
EXERCISE B

Complete the sentences with your opinion. Number 1 is an

example.

1. My favorite entertainment on TV is people dancing

2. I love watching
3. I think shows are reasonably 1
J
interesting.
4. As a matter of fact, I think shows are
wonderful.
5. shows are terrible.
6. I really like shows that are
7. Love stories are to me.
8. I think that are terribly
boring to watch.

EXERCISE C

Ask your classmates their opinions and take notes.

Ask What do you think of ? How do you feel about ?

PROGRAM STUDENT 1 STUDENT 2

MUSIC SHOWS

GAME SHOWS

SPORTS PROGRAMS

NEWS PROGRAMS

COOKING SHOWS

TALK SHOWS

REALITY SHOWS

COMMERCIALS

Student Text Page 285

 NOTES
: READING: USING THE DICTIONARY

Scan the dictionary page, then do the exercises on the next

page .
about ( prep.) 1 . relating to; on the love (n.) 1 . a strong feeling of
subject of: The teacher talked fondness for a person: His love for
about her vacation. (adv ) 2. his wife and family is very
approximately; a little more or strong. ( v.) 2 . to have very
less than: Houston is about 200 strong feelings for ; to care for a
miles from San Antonio. person , thing, or activity: I love
my wife and children very much.
after ( prep.) 1 . at a later time: / I love my country. / I love to
Mary went to the library after
play soccer. / I love to eat fruit.
class. (conj.) 2. following the
time when: Sue ate lunch after rest ( raj 1 . inactivity after
she finished the test. exercise: I’ ve worked for three
hours. I need a rest. ( v.) 2 . to lie
answer (n.) 1 . a reply to a
down; to stop being active: After
question, letter, etc.: What’ s the
work all day, I rest for 30
answer to Number 3? ( v. ) 2. to minutes. Then I get up and cook
reply to a question, letter, etc.:
dinner.
Did you answer all the questions ?
No, I answered only five . since ( prep.) 1 . from a time in the
past: She’ s been sick since
back ( n.) 1 . rear / reverse of yesterday. (conj.) 2 . because:
something: Please put the desks Since I don’ t have a car, I’ll have
in the back of the room. / The to take the bus.
driver sits in front and the
children sit in back . 2 . the part of time (n.) 1 . precise instant
a person’s body opposite the ( minutes / hours ): What time is
chest: Don’t pick up that heavy it ? It’ s nine o’clock . 2 . occasion:
box. You’ll hurt your There was a time when people
back . (adj.) 3. of the back/rear: didn’t have cars.
Don’t go out that door. Go out the
up (adv.) 1 . from a low place to a
back door.
high place: The plane went up
letter .
(n ) 1 . symbol of the very fast . The pilot in the plane is
alphabet: My name begins with my father. ( prep.) 2. to a higher
the letter “ G” . 2. mail: I received place: Her parents live just a mile
three letters from my husband . up the road.
He’ s in Europe for six months.

Page 286 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 22

 EXERCISE A NOTES :

Read the sentence. Look up the underlined word on the

previous page. Write the number of the correct definition on the
blank line.

l 1. My answer for Number 10 is wrong.

2. The children love to watch TV.

3. Steve jumped up from his chair.

4. Let’s go to the party after class.

5. The love of a child for his mother is wonderful.

6. The baby weighs about 8 pounds.

7. Little Johnny broke the back window.

8. All boys will sit in the back.

9. Pam always answers the questions correctly.

10. I work too much. I need a rest.

EXERCISE B

Find the best word in the dictionary page to complete each

sentence. Write the word on the line. Change the form of the
word if necessary. Number 1 is an example.

1. Is it t me to go to the party?
'
2 Sam always on the sofa when he’s tired.
3. The between a husband and wife must be strong.
4. There was a when people didn’t have planes.
5. I’ve had this car last year.
6. Her name has five in it .
7. Some elevators can go very quickly.

8 Fred to play soccer.

Student Text Page 287

 ^
NOTES
VOCABULARY: THAT’S A GREAT SHOW.

Answer the questions your instructor asks.

Steve: We want to review the movie

The Great Mountain . It
entertained everyone who
saw it . Everybody loved it.
There wasn’t a dull moment
in the movie. I plan to see
it again. What about you,
1
Jill?

Jill: I think The Great Mountain i

m
is a wonderful movie.
Families take the time to
go and see it together. The
next movie is Something to
Laugh About. In fact, it’s a
terribly funny story. I loved it
and laughed a lot. How about
you, Steve?
Steve: Well, I didn’t like it at all. As a matter of fact, I thought it
was boring. The only thing more boring is playing cards
alone! I almost laughed one time, but in the end1, 1 didn’t.
Jill: Steve, are you telling me that you thought Something to
Laugh About was a dull movie?
Steve: Yes, as a matter of fact, I did. It was too long, and there
was nothing to laugh about. We just don’t have the same
opinion about this movie, Jill. Now, today’s third movie
is Dark Days, Part 4 . It was better than Dark Days 3. It
satisfied me because it frightened me. What did you
think, Jill?
Jill: I’m not sure. Sometimes it was frightening; but , in my
opinion, it wasn’t always interesting.
Steve: And I thought it was great! Well, I’m sorry, but that’s all
the time we have today. Our plan is to review more new
movies tomorrow. See you then.

1
in the end-a conclusion made after thinking about something for some
time.

Page 288 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 22

 NOTES
EXERCISE

Match the sentences with similar meanings. Number 1 is an

example.

e 1. This movie is boring. a. It was a great movie.

2. I think it was okay. b. It frightened me.

3. I felt it was wonderful. c. How did you feel about it?

4. What’s this movie’s story? d. I laughed a lot.

5. I felt afraid. e. It’s dull.

6. What did you think about it? f. What’s it about?

7. It was terribly funny. g. In fact, it wasn’t bad.

(f) LISTENING: WRITING WHAT YOU HEAR

Listen to the paragraph and write what you hear.

Student Text Page 289

 -User Notes-

Page 290 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 22

 I!

THIS RESTAURANT SERVES GOOD FOOD. 23

»»!»#,«>«<• ‘i
- * . LESSON
MW iOTWM » fl®« ®>S»
^ . ^ - .!
«»A.vT ¥ «
j
*
>< « •» '' J V VV

m wmm

=
K
fiiyi
r *
.

fi
tft

-
Q
'

GRAMMAR: REPORTED SPEECH

Tom told me that he liked the food at Charlie’s Cafe.
PREPOSITIONS OF TIME
I go to school from 8 to 3 o’clock every day.

^ VOCABULARY:

Noun
dish
Other
after on
at prompt
Verb before promptly
intend ( to) busy reasonable
recommend for rudely
serve impolitely sharp
in
loud Expression
loudly If you ask me

Student Text Page 291

 NOTES
LANGUAGE SKILLS

READING: IDENTIFYING THE TITLE AND

MAIN IDEA
Read a paragraph and identify the title
and main idea .

SELECTING A SUMMARY
Read a paragraph and select the best
summary for it.

Page 292 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 23

 NOTES
GRAMMAR: PREPOSITIONS OF TIME

I want bigger
/ This is \ Look at me now!
muscles.
S hard work, . j
^
O

; ? 4>
before
©
l A l
May
© ©
Dec
4
m

Use before and after with time of day, with dates, and with
nouns that name special events or occurrences.
before noon, after 5 p.m., after I get up, before October 31s*y
before New Year’s Day, after my birthday

EXERCISE A

Use before or after to complete the sentences .

1. In the US, New Year’s Day is the day Dec. 31st.
2. Always study an important exam.
3. Saturday comes Sunday.
4. I usually take a shower exercising.
5. I’ll be in Miami this weekend. Call me Sunday
6. the big game, the team worked very hard.
7. I can go class, but I’ll arrive late for school.

Student Text Page 293

 NOTES EXERCISE B

Write three sentences with before and three with after .

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

EXERCISE C

Write for or since to complete the time phrases. Number 1 is an

example.

for a week (a period of time)

Sat Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Mon Tue

^ since Monday (a point in time)

1. for . three days 6. 7 a.m.

2. . 2004 7. five months
3. . August 8. ten minutes
4. . an hour 9. Tuesday

5. . this morning 10 . one night

Page 294 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 23

 EXERCISE D NOTES

Use from, to, until , or till to complete the sentences.

from Monday to Sunday (in a period of time)

>s.

Sat Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Mon Tue

until / till Thursday (end point )

1. We work out _ . 0600 . _ 0700.

2. Is Ron visiting his parents . . Sunday?

3. I go to school . September . _ June.

4. Mary’s plane won’t arrive . . 9 this evening.

EXERCISE E

Use for , since , from , to , until , or till to complete the sentences.

1. Has Don worked on his boat . three weeks?

2. We haven’t been to Eric’s house _ last month.
3. Has Julie been studying French . last year?
4. We’ve been waiting for the major’s call _ an hour.
5. Are you going to be in Denver _ next Wednesday?
6. Was SSgt Jones at a base in Florida five years?
7. Beth goes to school 8_ 3.
8. Tom will be living in New York _ December.

9. I was in Dallas Sunday _ Tuesday.

Student Text Page 295

 NOTES EXERCISE F

Use in , at , or on to complete the sentences .

FEBRUARY
s M T W T F S
II Pi o
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 so 2 MONDAY
9 3 June 4
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
8 4
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 7 6 5,
22 23 24 25 26 27 28

in + part of a day / at + clock time / on + day / dates

month / year / season exact time with numbers

1. Carol started working at the bank . . April.

2. On which days do you get up 7 in the morning?

3. Was anyone in this class born . . August 23, 1970?

4. Did Lt Crane join the Air Force _ _ 1990?

5. Col Travis thinks the general will come _ Friday.

6. The flight to San Francisco doesn’t leave noon.

7. Where will Ron be Tuesday evening?

8. Jack and Jill Smith married 2002.

9. Will Mr. White leave the end of the class?

10. How many appointments does he have June 16th?

11. Rosa started language school August.

12. The Hills always go on vacation _ the summer.

13. Do you know what Pam is doing . the moment?

14. We need to leave soon. Can you be ready an hour?

15. John didn’t see Rebecca at the gym . . Saturday.

Page 296 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 23

 EXERCISE G NOTES

Use before , after , for , since , from , to , until , till , at , in , or on .

1. It’s been raining 10 o’clock this morning.

2. Will the quiz be tomorrow 0845 in Lab 4?

3. Is the BX open 0900 2100?

4. Lt Smith has been in the army five years.

5
5. We haven’t been to Miami last winter.

6. My favorite TV sports show starts 5 minutes.

1
7. I waited 20 minutes for a table at the restaurant.

8. a delicious dinner, Janet had coffee and dessert.

9. Do you usually stay home Saturdays?

10. Did the students study very hard their big test?

11. Is your doctor’s appointment Thursday?

12. The Smiths bought their new house 2007.

13. Tom was in the US January June.

14. Pat has moved. I won’t see her her next visit.

15. A1 arrives May 1st. He won’t be here

then.

Student Text Page 297

 NOTES
VOCABULARY: RESTAURANTS AND SERVICE

1 Restaurant Reviews by MJ Ford |

Benny’s
Last Saturday, I had dinner at Benny’s. It’s a new restaurant , and it was
I busy . I could see a few empty tables, but I still waited 30 minutes to get a
table. I ordered Benny’s famous lamb
dish. 1 had to speak loudly for the I 1
server to hear me because the music

f
was too loud. The service was slow,
The sign on their window says that
they will serve the food promptly,
i
l but they didn’t this time. I had to
wait 45 minutes for my meal. Since
j the server was not prompt , the food
wasn’t hot when I got it. Also, the
lamb was difficult to cut because my
| knife was dull. When I asked for a sharp knife, the server rudely told
me that all the knives were the same. I was ready to leave right then!
When I told the manager that the service wasn’t reasonable , he didn’t
help me. He spoke impolitely . If you ask me , I cannot recommend
Benny’s. I don’t intend to eat there again.

EXERCISE

Read the sentences. Write T for true and F for false. Change the
false sentences to true ones using the new vocabulary. Number 1
| is an example.

1. A few people were eating at Benny’s. ( Benny' s was busy. )

2. MJ didn’t like waiting for a table.
3. MJ didn’t think the service was prompt.
4. The music was too low to hear.
5. The sign says they serve the food slowly.
6. The server was fast.
7. MJ’s knife was sharp. Cutting the lamb was easy.
8. Both the server and the manager were rude.
9. The service was good.
10. MJ wants people to go Benny’s.

Page 298 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 23

 NOTES
GRAMMAR: REPORTED SPEECH WITH TOLD

You are a good mechanic,

Private Nash.

r Thank you, sir.

f What did He told me

Sergeant Gray that I was a good
!! tell you? mechanic.

Sergeant
Gray
I
A
L '
Private
Nash
! t
ITI
W
Private
L
Private
Kane Nash

You are a good mechanic.

He told me ( that )
nr
rh was t a good mechanic.

We usually have to change the subject and the verb in reported

speech.

me
you
him
her
He told us (that ) I was a good mechanic.
them
the captain
Bob
(etc.)

*X* Always put a person after the verb told .

Student Text Page 299

L NOTES
— EXERCISE A

Underline the differences between the two sentences. Number 1

is an example.
1. John said , “ I’m enjoying the class.”
John told me that he was enjoying the class.
2. Amn Jones said , “ The teacher isn’t busy.”
Amn Jones told us that the teacher wasn’t busy.
3. Ms. Johnson said , “ We’re going to the club.”
Ms. Johnson told me that they were going to the club.
4. Tim said , “ My friend doesn’t have tickets for the show.”
Tim told us that his friend didn’t have tickets for the show.
5. Jan said, “ I’m seeing my doctor tomorrow.”
Jan told me that she was seeing her doctor tomorrow.

EXERCISE B

Complete each sentence with the correct form of the verb.

1. Fran said, “ We don’t want to shop.”

Fran told us that they to shop.
2. Karen said , “ My son has to find a job.”
Karen told us that her son a job.
3. Tom said, “ Sam, you look sleepy.”
Tom told Sam that he sleepy.
4. I said , “ Betty, your car needs a tune-up.”
I told Betty that her car a tune-up.
5. Sue said, “ I don’t like traveling by bus.”
Sue told me that she traveling by bus.

Page 300 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 23

 NOTES
EXERCISE C

Change the direct speech to reported speech. Use told .

1. Mary said , “ I want to leave early today.”

Mary told me ( that) she wanted to leave early today.

2. Ben said, “ I’m going downtown.”

3. Sara said, “ Robert, you have to call the doctor’s office.”

4. Mike said , “ We don’t want to go to the mall today.”

5. Diana said , “ Joe, I’m leaving in ten minutes.”

6. The teacher said, “ The students come to class early”

7. Gloria said , “ Linda, it isn’t raining any longer.”

8. Gary said , “ I think that knife is dull.”

9. Lisa said , “ David, I don’t like the new restaurant.”

10 . Laura said , “ I enjoy watching TV.”

Student Text Page 301

 NOTES
IBk READING: IDENTIFYING TITLE AND
MAIN IDEA
Read the paragraph; then write the title and main idea.

Title:
Walt Disney is famous all over the world for many different kinds
of entertainment: movies, TV programs, and entertainment parks.
Mr. Disney, who was born in 1901, worked in Hollywood for 43 years.
He started drawing when he was young and sold his first drawings to
neighbors. In 1923, he decided to move to Hollywood where he started
making short movies made of drawings that move. We call these films
animated cartoons. He also had lots of ideas for long cartoon movies
and other ways to entertain people. His biggest idea was to make an
entertainment park called Disneyland, where people are able to feel
like they are in some of his most famous movies and can enjoy riding on
exciting and entertaining machines.

Main Idea:

JH READING: SELECTING A SUMMARY

Read the paragraph; then select the best summary.

When Walt Disney began making cartoons, he saw that he needed
lots of people to work for him. He opened a place for his workers called
Walt Disney Studios, which had many buildings. Disney’s first cartoons
were short , in black and white, and had no sound. Later, he was able
to add sound and color to the cartoons. Disney’s most famous cartoons
were about Mickey Mouse. Soon, Disney had the idea of making
longer cartoon movies. His first long movie was an old children’s story
called Snow White. Everyone loved it. After that , he made many more
wonderful movies, and these made him very famous.
a. Disney’s first cartoons were black and white. They had no sound,
and they were short . The most famous were about Mickey Mouse.
b. Disney opened Walt Disney Studios. First , his workers drew short
cartoons in black and white. Later, they drew long cartoon movies
in color.
c. Walt Disney Studios had many buildings. There, his workers drew
long cartoon movies. The first movie was a children’s story called
Snow White.

Page 302 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 23

THE SOLDIERS HAVEN’T MOVED FOR AN HOUR. LESSON 24
wmm& fzsrnimmfflffiwmtMmffimmmmmm^ > s'-

SI

\ 3 §
«M

i
o
Z
3
,
•
•
‘

: r

GRAMMAR: THE PRESENT PERFECT

David: How long has the honor guard stood at attention?
Anna: They’ve stood at attention for an hour.

^ VOCABULARY:

Noun Verb Other

beach be over calm like
climate belong ( to) clear no longer
heat blow / blew / blown dangerous none
humidity clear up deep occasionally
sea expect ( to) during quiet
thought last except slippery
wind remain freezing unpleasant
slip frightened
stay humid

Student Text Page 303

 NOTES
LANGUAGE SKILLS

^ LISTENING: IDENTIFYING VERB ENDINGS

Listen and select the targeted word
ending.

READING: IDENTIFYING THE TITLE AND

MAIN IDEA
Read a paragraph and identify the title
and main idea.

Page 304 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 24

 NOTES
VOCABULARY: THE SKY IS CLEAR.

Read the postcard. Then match the new word with its meaning.

Hi Pete!
I have had a great time here in Hawaii. The beaches
look like the pictures I have seen in all the travel
magazines, and the sea has been a clear blue every
day. There have been calm breezes without any
unpleasant wind the whole week. Except for a little
humidity, the climate has been great. Occasionally, Mn,. Pete- Smith
Jill and I have spent a quiet evening here at the 1017 PiomAumue-
.
hotel We’d like to stay here again, and we found San Antonio-, AtX
out that the hotel belongs to a local family. 78210
Jill and I have also talked about buying some land
here. In fact, we expect that we’ll buy a piece of
.
land in a few days I can’t tell you much about the
land now. I’ll clear this up later after you return
from your ski vacation.
Sincerely,
£tan-

1. clear a. water in the air

2. quiet b. to live in a place for a short time
. 3. humidity c. almost the same as something else
. 4. occasionally d. think that something will happen; hope
. 5. sea e. air that moves quickly
. 6. wind f. the land next to the sea or ocean
7. beach g. not good; not nice
8. like h. the common weather of a place
. 9. stay i. not noisy
10 . climate j. body of salt water smaller than an ocean
11. clear up k . easy to see through
12 . expect l. not often
13. unpleasant m. to explain

Student Text Page 305

 ^
NOTES
VOCABULARY: THE WEATHER CLEARED UP.

Read the letter silently. Then discuss the new words.

SKI PARK
Blue Tree, Utah

Dear Stan,
Diana and I are spending a week at a place for skiing called Ski Park
in the town of Blue Tree, Utah. Do you remember the pictures of Blue
Tree in Travel TatK? There were snowy mountains with clear blue skies.
During our drive here, we were happy because we expected to go skiing
every day.
But none of our days here have been like the pictures in Travel Talk.
We’re in the middle of a storm that has lasted for three days. The sky
has been gray, the wind has blown every day, and there has been too
much snow. We can’t see the mountains, and skiing is dangerous right
now.
Were staying in an apartment in Blue Tree. It’s nice, but there’s
nothing else to do but remain in the apartment until the storm is
over. We haven’t driven to many places because the snow is too deep
on the roads. The sidewalks are slippery because we have had freezing
rain, too. I’m frightened to walk outside because yesterday I slipped
and fell. When the weather clears up, I hope our trip will no longer be
so unpleasant. In fact, I hope the weather doesn’t remain unpleasant
much longer.
How’s your trip? How are the beautiful beaches of Hawaii? What
about the climate? Does the rain and heat together make it very
humid, or is it pleasant? Diana had a great thought. Next year, we’ll
go to Hawaii.
See you soon, and stay vjarm and happy. ©

Pete

Page 306 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 24

 EXERCiSE A NOTES

Select a word from the box to complete the sentence.

deep lasted expect to humid

remain blow no longer
heat freezing cleared up be over

1. The . from the sun will dry your clothes.

2. Sam will call me today. I hear from him soon .
3. We wanted to go to the beach , but the weather was cold with
rain .
4. Mary feels better, but her cold for three days.
5. After the big storm, the weather very nicely.

6. In autumn, strong winds . leaves off trees.

7. The class will in 45 minutes.
8. I don’t swim in that river. It’s too
9. Ms. Jones will be our teacher. She went
to another school.
10. SSgt Morris told me to . here until he called
my name.
11. The warm air feels after a strong rain.
iifiisiRSiilliffiSSSiliiSSililii

EXERCISE B

Select two words from the box in Exercise A and make new
sentences. Read them to the class.
I expect to pass the
We no longer go to f 4 test tomorrow.
the BX on Fridays.
I m
$
ft
/1
Student Text Page 307
 . . . • K v:'i r p y i* - . ,.
•
sVa / o '
- -v - - .
. . -
v h.’- . -
NOTES
EXERCISE C

Use a word from each box to make a complete sentence.

angry happy nervous

stayed
sad calm relaxed
remained
quiet excited busy

Example: John / when he heard a loud noise

John remained calm when he heard a loud noise .
1. Lt Cole / after I had an accident .
2. You / when your friends visited .
3. Sam / while his son drove the car.
4. Lucy / when her child was sick.
5. The students / while they were at Joe’s party:
6. My sister and I / when we did our homework.
7. Betty / when she did not pass the test.
8. Howard / while he took the test.

EXERCISE D

Make a yes / no or information question from your sentences in

Exercise C.

Example: John / when he heard a loud noise

John remained calm when he heard a loud noise .
Did John remain calm when he heard a loud noise?
When did John remain calm?

Page 308 Nonintensive ALC , Volume 3, Lesson 24

 O LISTENING: IDENTIFYING VERB ENDINGS
NOTES

Listen to the verbs. Pay attention to the sound of the - ed ending.

Write the verbs under their ending sound. The first word in
each column is an example.

/d / N /ad /

called watched ended

EXERCISE

Work in pairs. Listen and check ( / ) every day or yesterday .

every day yesterday

1. We ( cook / cooked ) outside.

2. They ( travel / traveled ) a lot.

1
3. I (end / ended) the phone call.

4. He (asks / asked ) many questions.

5. I (like / liked ) watching them.

6. He (wants / wanted ) a new car.

7. We (look / looked) at new CDs. )

8. She ( needs / needed ) more money.

Student Text Page 309

 IIIHIIIIIII tiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiMiiwiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii| i |iiiiii IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIH
NOTES
$ GRAMMAR: USING THE PRESENT PERFECT

Read the article and underline the verbs.

MEDICAL PROFESSIONAL the Army to be a civilian doctor

OF THE MONTH in 1994. Since then , he has done
surgery on thousands of people and
Dilman Medical Center, Danville, hag taugM hundreds of student
—
Arkansas Dr. Alan Mullins was doctors how to do surgery.
a young boy when he decided to
be a doctor. He finished medical For two
school early, became a surgeon in years now, Dr.
the Army, and has worked as a Alan Mullins
surgeon for 11 years. He joined the has led the
staff of Dilman Medical Center on surgery team
January 5, 2005 and has been chief at Dilman. He
of surgery since then . has brought
:
many new
Dr. Mullins began his career ideas to his
as a doctor of general medicine in job. He has
the military. He joined the Army worked to
in November of 1986 after medical make Dilman
school and served his country for Medical Center the leader in
8 years. He became a doctor of surgery in Danville.
surgery in the Army and then left

EXERCISE A

Write the verbs from the article in the correct column.

PAST PRESENT PERFECT

was has worked

Page 310 Nonintensive ALC , Volume 3, Lesson 24

 EXERCISE B NOTES

Study the charts below.

PAST PRESENT PERFECT

The action started The acti<m started in the past
and ended in the past. and continues to the present.
now now

1 M
1
Apr May Sept Apr May Sept

In May, he moved to Texas. He has lived in Texas since May.

EXERCISE C

Use the present perfect of the verb in ( ) to fill in the blank.

Number 1 is an example.

1. The Walkers have lived (live) in Los Angeles for ten years.
2. Barbara ( not call ) Sam since noon.

3. Frank (want ) to learn to drive since last year.

4. It’s noon. We (study) math since 0900 today.

5. I’m sorry. I still ( not finish ) this exercise.

6. I (wait ) for Bob for 2 hours. He’s still not here!

7. John likes his job. He (work ) here for 3 years.

8. We ( not use) this classroom since Monday.

Student Text Page 311

 NOTES EXERCISE D

Circle the correct phrase.

1. Bill lives in Mexico. He there for seven years.

a. lives
b. is living
c. lived
d. has lived

2. The Millers two new cars since last winter.

; a. will buy
b. have bought
c. bought
d. are buying

\ 3. I Pam yesterday in my math class.

a. see
b. have seen
c. saw
d. will see

\ 4. Ms Quinn at this hank since last vear. She’s a teller.

a. has worked
b. worked
c. works
d. will work

5. Paul’s now going to college in Texas. He from high school

this past June.
a. has graduated
b. is graduating
c. graduates
d. graduated

j 6. Last night, we to a movie about the early days of Texas.

a. are going to go
b. are going
c. went
d. have gone

Page 312 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 24

 EXERCISE E NOTES

Read the answers and write questions with the words in ( ).

Then take turns reading the questions and answers with your
partner.

He has I I seen the new movie

Has I he I seen the new movie

What he seen

1. _(Has)
Yes, Paul’s been at the doctor’s office since noon.

2. _(Have)
No, we haven’t had any rain today.

3. _( Have )
Yes, I’ve met the new secretary.

4. JWho)
Mr. Johnson’s worked in Dallas since May.

5. ( Why )
Ann’s been absent for three days because she’s sick.

6. _(How many)
I’ve read five books since June.

7. (Where)
Lt Hall’s been in the colonel’s office all morning.
8. _(How long)
Tom’s known Carol for two years.

Student Text Page 313

 NOTES
. ; .. •

-,
READING: IDENTIFYING THE TITLE AND
MAIN IDEA

Read the paragraphs and write the main idea and title.

1. When people like a restaurant, they usually recommend it to

their friends. They do this because to
some people, good service is the most
important thing. Others go back to their
to Tettitga favorite restaurant again and again
because they really like one dish on the
menu. Still others will recommend a
restaurant because they can get a wide
variety of food there. Everyone feels that
his favorite place is the best place and is
sure that his friends will like it, too.

: 2. No one ever intends to hurt another person’s feelings. Most of the

t time, it’s an accident. People don’t usually mean to be rude. Frequently

they’re impolite because they’re busy or careless, and they say or do the
I wrong thing without realizing it. People should think carefully before
j they speak or do something that might hurt someone’s feelings. Then
S the other person won’t feel bad, and no one will have to apologize.

Main Idea: —

Title:

Page 314 Nonintensive ALC , Volume 3, Lesson 24

IF THE WEATHER IS NICE , I ’ LL GO TO THE BEACH . LESSON 25

FUNCTION: INQUIRING ABOUT OR EXPRESSING THE EFFECT OF

CONDITIONS ON FUTURE ACTIONS OR SITUATIONS
Mary: Can I also buy fruit and candy if I buy meat?
Joe: Yes. If you have enough money.

Q; GRAMMAR: IF-CLAUSE: TRUE IN THE PRESENT OR FUTURE

Jane: What are you doing this weekend?
Harry: If the weather is nice, I’ll go to the beach.

VOCABULARY:

Other Expression
ever could use
if

Student Text Page 315

 NOTES
LANGUAGE SKILLS

JH READING: USING CONTEXT CLUES

Determine a word’s meaning from
context clues.

Q,
:l SPEAKING: GIVE AN ORAL SUMMARY
Prepare and give an oral summary from
notes taken from a text.

Page 316 Nonintensive ALC , Volume 3, Lesson 25

 NOTES
O GRAMMAR: THE CONDITIONAL: TRUE IN THE
PRESENT OR FUTURE
Jill: Hi, Greg. What are you doing this weekend?
Greg: If the weather’s nice, I’m going to Blue Star Beach with
Cindy. Have you ever been to Blue Star Beach?
Jill: Yes. I went last month. You always go there if the weather’s
nice! When are you going?
Greg: If Cindy has to work tonight , we’ll go tomorrow.
Jill: I could use a day at the beach, too. What time are you
leaving?
Greg: If the weather’s good, we’re going in the morning. But we may
wait until noon if it’s cloudy.
Jill: It’s not nice now, and the weather may stay unpleasant. What |
will you do if it rains?
Greg: If it rains, we won’t go to the beach. We could go to the mall if
Cindy needs to go shopping. I think she could use some new
tennis shoes.
Jill: If you go to the mall, you should call me. I could use some new j
shoes, too.

CONDITION ( if -clause) RESULT (main clause)

will drive
If the weather is nice, we are going to drive to the beach.
are driving

Use will , BE going to, or the present progressive + verb in the

main clause for a result that is true in the future.

RESULT (main clause) CONDITION ( if -clause)

can / could
We may / might drive to the beach if the weather is nice.
should
Use a modal + verb in the main clause for suggestions and results
that are possible.

Student Text Page 317

 NOTES EXERCISE A

.
Work with a partner Take turns reading and answering the
.
questions Answer in complete sentences .
1. What are Greg’s plans if the weather’s nice?
2. If Cindy has to work tonight , when will they go to the beach?
3. What time are they leaving?
4. If it rains, will they still go to the beach?
5. What can they do if they don’t go to the beach?
6. When should Greg call Jill?
7. What could Jill use if she goes shopping?

EXERCISE B

Work with a partner. Use i f to combine the sentences .

1
;

Example: Tom doesn’t want to go. Let’s ask Mark.

If Tom doesn' t want to go, let's ask Mark .

1. North City Mall isn’t crowded. We can go shopping there.

2. We can go to the movies. A lot of people are at the restaurant.

3. Bill is going to drive us to the ball game. He has a can

4. Sam’s book isn’t in his bag. He should look in his room.

5. You can drive your car. I’ll buy the gas.

6. We could eat our lunch outside. The weather is nice.

Page 318 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 25

 If- conditional (yes / no) questions NOTES

CONDITION ( If -clause) RESULT (main clause)

(present tense) ( present / future tense)
can / could you
If you have time, will / would you read my paper?
are you going to

EXERCISE C

Read the answer; then write a yes / no question. Look at the

example.

Example: Will Susan call if her train is late?

If Susan' s train is late, will she call?
Yes, Susan will call if her train is late.

1.
No, Pat won’t stop at the bank if she has money.

No, Gary won’t buy a new lamp if the old one still works.

3.
Yes, we’re going to the beach if it doesn’t rain.

4.
Yes, the new teacher will arrive at noon if the train is on time.

5.
No, they aren’t going to come if their car doesn’t start.

6.
No, I won’t need to change the oil if I don’t drive the car.

7.
Yes, I can call Jim if you can’t call him.

8.
Yes, we could go on Saturday if it rains Friday.

Student Text Page 319

 NOTES lf -conditional information questions
CONDITION ( If - clause) RESULT ( main clause)
(present tense) (present / future tense)
what do you do next?
where are you going to go?
If you finish early,
how can you get home?
when should you come back?

,V , ’rC '' I 1 ' '

-- - ' > ' 4 r •, v, < < r •* >< > fc *

EXERCISE D

Write questions about the main clause. Use the words in ( ) .

Number 1 is an example.

I If Tom has to work tonight what will we do? (What )

If Tom has to work tonight, we’ll take him to dinner tomorrow.

2. ( What )

If he doesn’t feel well today, he should wait until tomorrow to play.

3 ( What )

If Carl wants a refund , he must show the clerk his sales slip.

4. ( Who )

The boys will be happy if they can play soccer today.

5. ( When)
The train could depart at 1500 if the workers finish repairing it.

6, ( Where )
Joe should go to the dentist’s office if he has a bad toothache.

7 ( When )
We’ll enjoy playing soccer today if it isn’t raining.

8. (Where)

If his friend visits this weekend , they’ll go to the beach.

Page 320 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 25

___
V VOCABULARY: EVER
NOTES
i

Read the dialogs with a partner. Discuss how the word ever is
used.

1. Jim: This is boring.

Joe: I know. Nothing ever happens here.
2. John: Do you ever watch the sports channel?
Mark: No. I don’t like sports.
3. Jane: Have you ever been to Spain?
Joe: Yes, I’ve been there many times.
4. Jim: Is this the first time you’ve eaten Chinese food?
Mary: Yes, it’s the first time I’ve ever eaten it.
5. Dan: How did you ever open that door?
Steve: I used a key. I had it in my pocket.

EXERCISE

Write three questions and three sentences using ever .

1.

2.

3.

5.

Student Text Page 321

 i»MWBHIB8«aWW!
NOTES
FUNCTION: INQUIRING ABOUT OR
EXPRESSING THE EFFECT OF
CONDITIONS ON FUTURE
ACTIONS OR SITUATIONS

You are on a trip. You want to buy some food and have $10.00 to
spend. Look at the prices.

QUICK STOP SHOP 0

06

Soft Drinks (6-pack) $3.50

Potato Chips $2.75

Corn Chips $ 2.25

Bread $ 1.50

Meat $6.00

Fruit $2.00

Cookies $ 2.50

Ice Cream $3.50

Candy $ 1.50

Paper plates $ 1.50

Paper cups $ 1.50

Ice $ 1.00
m
/

Page 322 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 25

 EXERCISE NOTES

Work with a partner to ask and answer questions. Use i f .

Yes, if we buy meat, we

Can we still buy can also buy fruit and
fruit and candy candy.
if we buy meat?

If we buy ice cream

and soda, can we
buy bread , too?

1. soda and candy / meat

2. soda and fruit / paper cups
3. bread and meat / potato chips
4. corn chips and cookies / ice cream
5. paper plates and paper cups / cookies and fruit
6. meat and bread / fruit and ice
7. potato chips and candy / ice and paper cups
8. cookies / bread and corn chips
9. paper cups and ice / sodas and corn chips
10. candy and ice cream / cookies and fruit

Student Text Page 323

 NOTES
READING: USING CONTEXT CLUES
Read the sentence. Use the words in the sentence to find the
meaning of the underlined word. Write may be, is not, or is on
j the line. Look at the example.

Example:

s a. We went to the beach.

The beach maybe land at the edge of the water.
may be a mountain with snow.
may be a large lake.

b. We went to the beach and went swimming.

The beach maybe land at the edge of the water.
is not a mountain with snow.
may be a large lake.

c. We went to the beach and went swimming in the

ocean.
The beach is land at the edge of the water.
is not a mountain with snow.

1 is not

1. a. Bill uses a locker.

a large lake.

A locker a small closet .

a savings account.
a refrigerator.

b. Bill uses a locker at the gym .

A locker a small closet.
a savings account.
a refrigerator.
c. Bill uses a locker at the gym to keep his clothes in
while he swims.
A locker a small closet.
a savings account.
a refrigerator.

Page 324 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 25

 NOTES

2. a. Bill went to a barbecue with his friends.

A barbecue a big school.
a grocery store.
an outside party.

b. Bill went to a barbecue with his friends and ate some

meat.
j
A barbecue a big school.
a grocery store.
an outside party.
c. Bill went to a barbecue with his friends and ate some
meat cooked over a fire in the open air.
A barbecue a big school.
a grocery store.
an outside party.

3. a. Tom has a condominium.

A condominium a headache.
a job.
an apartment.

b. Tom has a condominium in California.

A condominium a headache.
a job.
an apartment.
c. Tom has a condominium in California which he lives in
during the summer.
A condominium a headache.
a job.
an apartment.

: :
: : .
"

Student Text Page 325

 Q„ ) SPEAKING: GIVE AN ORAL SUMMARY

Read the paragraph. Listen to questions and write notes. Orally

summarize the paragraph from your notes. Your instructor will
do the example with you.

Many people want to visit Texas each year

because they can find many things to see
and do there. Texas is the second largest
state after Alaska. It takes about 11 hours to
drive from East Texas to West Texas. Dallas,
Houston, San Antonio, and Austin are big
cities where people can go sightseeing. Texas has a pleasant climate, but
it’s sometimes very hot in the summer. That’s why people like to go to
South Texas where they can find beautiful beaches with calm breezes
from the sea and nice places to swim. Texas also has 125 state parks
with lakes and rivers. People like to go to the parks to walk, ride in
boats, or swim.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Texas has lots of things to see

and do. People can go sightseeing
in the big cities. When it’s hot in
the summer, people can go to the
beaches. They can also visit one of
the parks.

r
Page 326 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 25
 EXERCISE NOTES

Read, listen, take notes, and summarize.

A. Arizona and Older Americans
Arizona is a state in the American Southwest. It is very popular
with older Americans because it has a warm climate all year round.
Many older Americans like to spend winters there because the winters
are pleasant. Arizona can get very hot in the summer, but people still
say that the climate is nice because it is not humid. The biggest city in
Arizona is Phoenix. Near Phoenix is a small city where only people 55
years old and older can buy houses. It is called Sun City and has about
45,000 people. There are shops, restaurants, and services that are very
popular with older Americans.

1.
2.
3.
4.

B. California is the Movie State

California is one of the most famous states in the US. Los Angeles
(LA), Hollywood, and Beverly Hills are three of the most famous cities
in California. LA is famous for the hundreds of movies that take place
there. Hollywood has many famous companies that make movies. People
like to go to Hollywood to visit the movie companies’ large buildings,
called studios, where they make the movies. Beverly Hills has many
expensive hotels, restaurants, and shops where famous people often go
to spend their time and money. Many of these famous people work in
the movies and live in this city’s most beautiful homes. People like to go
sightseeing in Beverly Hills to see the movie stars and their wonderful
homes.

1
2

Student Text Page 327

 -User Notes-

Page 328 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 25

 ISiPSMMH pifii

EDUCATION IN THE USA LESSON 26

I
§
.. .

0 GRAMMAR : COORDINATING CONJUNCTIONS SO AND OR

Mrs. Frank’s car was in the garage, so she took the bus to work. m
We can walk to school , or we can ride the bus.

VOCABULARY:

Noun high school Other

m
associate degree master’s degree instead of
bachelor’s degree middle school medical
choice Ph.D. professional
college profession so
course university technical
degree
diploma
education Verb
v
elementary school educate
field offer
grade take / took / taken

Student Text Page 329

 NOTES
LANGUAGE SKILLS

~
(j j) LISTENING: IDENTIFYING WORDS WITH THE
SAME SOUND
Listen and identify the letter ( s ) with the
same sound as the given word .

IDENTIFYING IMPORTANT
INFORMATION
Listen for specific information in a
paragraph and answer comprehension
questions.

Page 330 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 26

11
 yf VOCABULARY: EDUCATION IN THE USA NOTES

Repeat the words. Then read the text.

Let’s talk about schools in the United States. The laws in the US
say that children in the US must get an education . The schools begin
educating the children in kindergarten when
they are five years old. When they are six years
old , children start first grade at an elementary
) school . In each of the five grades in an elementary
school, a teacher educates children in reading,
spelling, math and other subjects. Junior or middle
school follows; it usually goes from sixth to eighth
grade. After eighth grade, children go to high
school until the twelfth grade. Some towns have
a six-year high school instead of a junior high
or middle school. Finally, after twelve years of
education, students with good grades receive a high
school diploma .
Students may choose to go to a vocational
or technical school before or after high school.
Technical schools have courses in fields like
mechanics, electronics, computers, etc. The professions that people
get after graduation are very good. These jobs often pay very well.

nr
I 10
-
Hij h School /
Vocational
or Technical
School
8

5
4

1
Year US Public School System

Student Text Page 331

 NOTES EXERCISE

Fill in the blanks. Use the words from the chart.

technical diploma educates fields

. , , elementary
,
grades education instead ofc ,

1. Children in the US must have 12 years of

2. Students receive a after completing and passing
twelve
3. For courses in like mechanics, computers, and
electronics, students can go to a school.
4. All children in the US must go to
5. Some towns have 6 years of high school middle
school.
6. A teacher the students in reading, spelling,
math, and other subjects.

^ VOCABULARY: HIGHER EDUCATION

Repeat the words. Then read the text.

After high school, students can decide to go to a community college

which offers many of the subjects students need to take during the
first two years of higher education.
Community colleges and some technical
schools often offer a degree which
students can earn after two years of
courses. It’s called an associate degree .
Another choice is to go to a college
or a university. A college offers only
a bachelor’s degree, which usually
takes four years to finish. A university
is larger than a college and offers degrees in many different academic
professional fields including business, mathematics, and science.

Page 332 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 26

 At a university, students can get a bachelor’s degree, master’s NOTES
degree , or a Ph.D. Normally, a student needs four years to complete a
bachelor’s degree. A master’s degree usually takes an extra two or three
years. A Ph. D., or Doctor of Philosophy degree, takes an extra three
to eight years. Students who want to become medical doctors go to
medical school after they finish the bachelor’s degree. They study at a
medical school for at least four more years to receive an M.D. or Doctor
of Medicine degree.

8+ I Ph .D. !
7 I Medical
6 degree
Master’s degree
5
4
3
2 Bachelor’s degree
Associate
1
degree
Community College /
year University
College University

Higher Education

EXERCISE A

Match the word or phrase with its meaning. Then, with a partner,
write sentences using 5 vocabulary terms.

1. associate degree a. 4-year school

2. choice b. degree after bachelor’s

3. to offer c. 4-year degree

4. master’s degree d. selection

5. university e. 2-year degree

6. to take a course f. person with a profession

7. Ph.D g - to study a subject

8. professional h. to give

9. bachelor’s degree i. Doctor of Philosophy degree

Student Text Page 333

 NOTES EXERCISE B

Circle the best answer a, b, or c.

1. Students receive a diploma when they

a. begin school
b. start middle school
c. finish high school

i 2. To become doctors after college, students go to

a. technical school
b. medical school
c. bachelor school
3. The offers several higher education degrees.
a. technical school
b. middle school
c. university

I 4. Business is a that you can study at a university.

a. field
b. school
c. diploma
5. To study mechanics, a person may go to a
a. medical school
b. technical school
c. professional school
6. Doctors should their patients about good health.
a. learn
b. accept
c. educate
7. When Jan graduated from college, she received a in
| mathematics.
a. degree
b. course
c. grade

Page 334 Nonintensive ALC , Volume 3, Lesson 26

 GRAMMAR: COORDINATING
CONJUNCTIONS OR AND SO
Choice A Choice B
You can read a book tonight, you can watch TV with me.
or
You can watch TV with me, you can read a book tonight.
Use or to talk about choices. The order of the sentences is not
important.

EXERCISE A

Combine the sentences using or. Write the new sentence.

1. We can listen to a CD. We might turn on the radio.

2. She could buy a house in town. She may rent an apartment.

3. Can you answer the phone? Do you want me to get it?

|mJJ r m7 jgf ggimsmmmmmmmmmBmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmm

iigp
EXERCISE B

Combine the sentences using so. Make sure the result is last.

Situation Result
Mike’s car doesn’t work, he rode the bus to work.
so
The weather was bad, we didn’t go to the beach.
Use so to talk about results. The order of the sentences cannot
change.

1. I can’t go with you. Sorry, I have to work tomorrow.

2. My car was out of gas. We came in Ted’s car.

3. He stayed at the movie too long. He was late for the party.

Student Text Ill Page 33S

 EXERCISE C

Choose or or so to join the two parts of the sentences. Then, read

the sentences with a partner.

1. We might drive to New York, we can take a train.

2. We didn’t have class yesterday, we went to the movies.

3. The weather was bad, I didn’t work in the garden.

4. The children can go to camp this summer, they can stay
with their grandparents.
5. Dan’s car was not working, we took Jim’s car instead.
6. Sandra could return the blouse to the store, she could
exchange it for a different blouse.

EXERCISE D

Match two clauses to make a sentence.

1. Albert didn’t feel well,

2. We can go out tonight ,
3. The other driver may slow down,
4. Steve wants to be a mechanic,
5. Joe doesn’t want to live in Houston,
6. We didn’t like the movie,

a. or he may speed up.

b. so he’s turning down the job.
c. or we can stay at home.
d. so he didn’t go to work today.
e. so we left early.
f. so he’s in technical school.

Page 336 Nonintenslve ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 26

 NOTES
EXERCISE E L

Complete each sentence with a clause. Join the two parts or

clauses with or / so.

Example: It’s cold today, so I' ll take my coat

The weather may clear up, or it may rain more |
i
1. Dave can go to the soccer game, j
2. Terry doesn’t like living in the city,

3. The mechanic’s fixing my car, j

4. We could go to the mountains,

5. Allen’s driving to the game in Dallas, j

s
6. Bill may decide to buy a car,

(Pj) LISTENING: IDENTIFYING WORDS WITH THE

SAME SOUND

Circle the letter of the word that has the same sound that you
hear.

Example: a. friend
b. dog
c. match
1. a. egg 4. a. shop
b. exercise b. coin
c. escalator c. rice
2. a. son 5. a. catch
b. chicken b. go
c. shop c. jump
3. a. quiet 6. a. keep
b. can b. certain
c. key c. so

Student Text Page 337

 NOTES

^ LISTENING: IDENTIFYING IMPORTANT

INFORMATION
Listen to a paragraph and take notes. Then answer the
questions and summarize the paragraph using the notes and the
answers to the questions.

Paragraph 1:

Take notes:

Answer questions about the paragraph:

a. What is the paragraph about?

b. What are the first four things you can do to feel healthy and look
better?

c. What is the most important thing you can do for your health?

Write a summary of the paragraph:

Page 338 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 26

 NOTES
Paragraph 2:

Take notes:

Answer questions about the paragraph:

a. What is the paragraph about?

1
|

b. What is the first thing you do when you make gum?

c. Where does the gum tree grow?

d. How do you clean the juice?

e. What do you do to the juice when it becomes hard?

Write a summary of the paragraph:

Student Text Page 339

 ^
NOTES
VOCABULARY: REVIEW WHAT YOU LEARNED

Review vocabulary from Lessons 22 - 25.

EXERCISE A

Choose the correct preposition from the box and write it in the
blank. Some words are used more than once.

since after at during

almost for on except
in in fact before until

1. Students start class 0730 the morning.

2. Ms. Johnson has been teaching English 1967.
3. We waited in the line three hours we were
able to get in.

I 4. Our friends have arrived; , they got here just

we did.
5. I live Main Street the city of San Diego.
6. Jim sleeps every day class. He falls asleep soon
the break.
7. Everyone went on the tour of the city John .
8. The children stayed at my house the storm passed .
9. all the employees take vacations during the summer.

Page 340 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 26

 EXERCISE B NOTES
:
« •
4£4
) !,n? $ iwm l <> $M - '

Circle the best answer a, b, or c.

1. My sister to be here by noon tomorrow.

a. stays
b. expects
c. slips
2. That restaurant serves my favorite . .. They make the best rice
and chicken .
a. dish
b. fork
c. waiter
3. The students to do their best on the test .
a. belong
b. remain
c. intend
4. I the mechanic on Third Street . He repaired my car very
.

well.
a. caution
b. check up
c. recommend
5. After all the rain yesterday, the . is very high.
a. humidity
b. climate
c. variety

6. The . of entertainment on this channel is excellent.

a. guarantee
b. variety
c. refund
7. This movie is too for children. It will upset them.
a. frightening
b. prompt :

c. reasonable
8. We had a . . vacation in the mountains. We plan to go again.
a. clear |

b. common
c. wonderful

Student Text Page 341

 NOTES
9. This radio station plays too many There’s not enough music.
a. channels
b. introductions
c. commercials
10. Soccer is not very to me. In fact, I think it’s really dull.
a. vertical
b. entertaining
c. perpendicular
11. He has all his money this month and cannot pay his bills.
a. spent
b. planned
c. served
I 12. The in the summer is hot and humid here.
a. climate
b. program
c. plan
13. We are spending our vacation at the
a. break
b. breeze
c. beach
14. I this was my book, but I was wrong. It belongs to you.
a. think
b. have thought
c. thought

I 15. The weather is freezing outside; the icy roads are

a. slippery
b. sharp
c. funny

Page 342 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 26

 EXERCISE C NOTES

Choose the correct word for each sentence. Circle a or b.

1. She spoke so that I could not hear her.

a. quietly
b. quiet
2. That man is very He never thanks the people who
help him.
a. rudely
b. rude

3. The crowd shouted when their team won the game.

a. loudly
b. loud
4. We were afraid during yesterday’s storm.
a. terribly
b. terrible
5. The teacher is always He’s never late for class.
a. promptly
b. prompt

6. The workers must be and discuss their problems with

their boss.
a. reasonably
b. reasonable
7. That man speaks to women.
a. impolitely
b. impolite

8. This student arrives late to class.

a. frequently
b. frequent

11111
!!!
Student Text Page 343
 -User Notes-

Page 344 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 26

1m
I’ VE MADE UP MY MIND.
J
LESSON 27
- v <
v * '1 < ' x v , ,, * . /
'

I’ve talked it over H

with my husband. I’ve
decided to turn down ( C^, )
the job offer. j j

/ FUNCTION: TALKING ABOUT DECISIONS

Mr. Al: Have you decided to take the job in New York?
Ms. Rob: No, I’ve decided to stay here and go to the university.

0 GRAMMAR: ADVERBS OF TIME

Mr. Flores no longer works here. He retired last week.
Pam doesn’t live here anymore. She moved to Arizona .

THE PRESENT PERFECT

No, I haven’t seen Sara yet .

“ VOCABULARY:
Noun Verb Other Expressions
career accept already change one’s mind
decision discuss any longer make / made up one’s mind
discussion offer ( to) anymore temporary duty (TDY)
educator refuse ( to) confused
future retire confusing
refusal talk over just
tour think / thought / thought over still
turn down yet

Student Text Page 345

 NOTES
Language Skills

READING: USING CONTEXT CLUES

Determine a word’s meaning from
context clues.

y, ) SPEAKING: GIVING AN ORAL SUMMARY

Prepare and give an oral summary from
notes taken from a text .

~
(j j) LISTENING: IDENTIFYING IMPORTANT
INFORMATION
Listen for specific information in a
'

paragraph and answer comprehension

questions.

Page 346 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3 , Lesson 27

 NOTES
VOCABULARY: LINDA’S DECISIONS
Repeat the words. Then read the text.

Meet Linda Jacobs. Linda is an educator in the field of science. She

has already taught high school students for 20 years, and now she wants
a new career. She still wants to educate young people, so she asked
about jobs at Johnson College. Johnson College
has offered Linda a job. She will discuss the job
offer with her husband, Paul, this evening. If she
accepts the offer, she will teach night classes.
That’s the time she usually spends with her

*
children. If she turns down the job, her refusal
can mean no job offers in the future from the
college. Linda can wait a week to make up her
mind, or she can make a decision today. She
is confused. Maybe her discussion with Paul
this evening will help.

EXERCISE A

Answer the following questions orally.

1. What job has Linda done for 20 years?

2. At what time of day will she teach at Johnson College?

3. What can happen if Linda turns down the offer?

4. How long does Linda have to make up her mind?

5. Why is Linda having a discussion with Paul?

Student Text Page 347

 NOTES EXERCISE B

Match the words with their definition.

1. offer a. say yes to something

2. discuss b. teach

3. confused c. not accept something

4. accept d. ask someone if they want something

5. refusal e. talk over

6. decision f. not understanding clearly

7. educate S - choice

m *

^ VOCABULARY: PAUL’ S DECISION

Repeat the new words, read the paragraph, and discuss the
questions that your instructor will give you.

Meet Paul Jacobs. Paul has been an officer in the army for 17 years,
and he has been thinking about his future. He wants to retire soon, so
he has been looking at new careers outside
the military. Paul has discussed his ideas
r with his wife, Linda. They talked over the
choices he has, and Linda said that Paul
still has time to think things over . He
hasn’t made his final decision yet. Paul has
two choices: he can stay in the military and
take another temporary duty overseas, or
he can retire and start his own business in
computers. He likes his job in the military,
but he doesn’t want to do another overseas
tour . His choices are confusing, and he has
already changed his mind many times. He
just doesn’t want to think about it anymore
and refuses to discuss it any longer . But Linda offered to talk more
if he wanted to.

Page 348 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 27

 NOTES
EXERCISE A

Complete the sentences with the words in the box .

career educator tour
educate confused discuss
turn it down change your mind make up my mind
refuse already retire
think it over confusing talk it over

Linda: After the kids and I got home from school, I decided I didn’t
want to take the job offer from Johnson College. I’m going to

Paul: Do you want to take more time to ?

Linda: I’ve thought it over. I’m a mother and an

, so I want to my
own children first .
Paul: Now I’m You’ve always said you need
to grow in your profession. Now that you have the chance,
you’re going to it. Are you sure you
know what you are doing?
Linda: Paul, I know you don’t want me to work at night. Why don’t
we talk about your instead?

Paul: I’ve enjoyed my military career, but I don’t want to

do another in Europe. Maybe I’ll
and start my own business.
Linda: Starting your own business takes a lot of money. You may
want to this with someone who has
done this.
Paul: It’s a choice. I think I will
with other people. It may help me

Linda: Just remember that after you retire from the military, you
can’t go back. You cannot

Student Text Page 349

 NOTES
EXERCISE B

What do you think Linda and Paul should do? Write a paragraph
in which you give Linda and Paul your advice on their career
choices. You may be asked to read your paragraph to the class
and compare the advice you gave with your classmates’ advice.
f;

/ FUNCTION : TALKING ABOUT DECISIONS

Listen to the dialog and repeat after the instructor. Then read
the dialog with a partner.

Joe: What did you decide about the job offers?

Tim: I’ve decided to take the offer in Denver.

Joe: I thought you chose Dallas. Why did you pick Denver?

Tim: The pay is better, and I can take some courses there.

Joe: When do you plan to leave?

Tim: They want me to start next month.

Joe: Are you planning to go by plane?

Tim: No, I’m going to take my car.

Joe: Have you decided on a place to live in Denver?

Tim: Not yet, but I want to buy a house near my new job.

Page 350 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 27

 NOTES

f
f
w IjY
EXERCISE A

Match the questions with the corresponding answers.

1. Have you decided about your education?

2. Did you decide which car to buy?

3. Have you made a decision about your vacation?

4. Have you changed your mind about your job?

5. Did you make up your mind about retiring yet?

6. Have you decided to buy a new house yet?

a. Yes, I have. Owning a home is better than paying rent.

b. No, I haven’t. I’m still going to quit and accept another job offer.
c. No, I can’t decide. I might keep driving this car and save my
money.
d. Yes, the university accepted me, so I’m starting classes this fall, i
3
e. Yes. I decided to retire next year and move to Florida.
f. Yes, I have. I’ve decided to take a trip to France in July.

Student Text Page 351

 NOTES EXERCISE B

In pairs, complete the dialogs and perform them as role-plays.

Dialog 1

| SI: Have you decided to take a vacation?

S2: Yes,

SI: Where ?

S2:

SI: ?
S2:

Dialog 2

SI: Have you made a decision about your

military training?

S2: Yes,

SI: What ?
S2:

SI : ?
S2:

Page 352 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 27

 NOTES
GRAMMAR: USING ADVERBS OF TIME

ADVERB PURPOSE EXAMPLES

Ed already has a high school

something diploma.
happened + The children are already at
already before now school. ( BE )
(often sooner Do they already have a new car?
than expected) ? What does he already know about
the problem?

We still want to know the answer.

+ He’s still waiting at the door. ( BE )
Jan still doesn’t have a college
something is degree.
still continuing
Do you still drive a truck?
? How many students are still
taking the test?

something is
not happening Can you wait? A1 hasn’t arrived
yet now but is yet .
expected in I’m hungry. Is dinner ready yeti
the future
?

something
+ She no longer works here.
no longer has stopped or
He’s no longer a student. ( BE )
changed

I
He isn’t in the army anymore /
any longer .
something
anymore Does he work here anymore / any
has stopped or
any longer o longer?
changed
Isn’t she in this class any more /
any longer?

Put the adverb after BE when the adverb is in the middle of the
sentence. For example: I’m no longer teaching that class.

Student Text Page 353

 NOTES
EXERCISE A

Make a sentence using the information and the word in

parentheses ( ).

Example: Don is a college student and has been for 3 years, (still)
Don is still a college student.

1. Ben has been working on his car for 2 days , (still)

2. Tim won’t be ready to leave for another hour or two. (yet)

3. Bonnie has had her master’s degree for 10 years, (already)

4. Carl hasn’t lived in the barracks since last week, (anymore )

5. Tom drove the bus last year. He isn’t driving this year, (any longer )

6. Sue was in the military for 20 years. She has retired , ( no longer )

7. Frank is studying French for another year, (still)

Page 354 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 27

 EXERCISE B NOTES

j
Read the sentence. Then write a question using the word in
parentheses ( ).

Example: Is Cathy still going to the gym everyday?

Yes. Cathy has gone to the gym everyday , (still)

1. j
Yes, Mr. Stevens has taught at the university for 20 years , (still)

Yes, John arrived at the party ten minutes ago. ( yet )

3.
No, Tom hasn’t owned that house since last year , (anymore)

Yes. Tony and Linda left for their vacation last week, (already)
5.
No, Larry stopped working here last month, (any longer)
6.
Yes. They have been in the computer lab for an hour, (still)

EXERCISE C

Select the best word from the box to complete the question.

no longer any longer

anymore
still already

1. Why are you working on that project?

2. How many pages have you read?
3. Which shirt do you use?

4. How can he live in this house ?

5. Why isn’t he in the army ?

Student Text Page 355

 y GRAMMAR: USING THE PRESENT PERFECT

Read the dialog. Underline both parts of the present perfect

verbs.

Mike: Have you ever been to France, Doug?

Doug: No, I never have. Have you?

Mike: My wife and I have already gone to many places in

Europe, but we haven’t seen France yet.

Doug: We still haven’t decided about our vacation this summer.

Maybe France is a good choice.

Mike: We have decided . We’re going to France in July.

Doug: Have you already called your travel agent?

Mike: No, I haven’t , but I will call him this week. I’ve waited too
long.

Doug: So have I. I’m ready to see France, too. I have thought

about it, and I’m ready to go.

EXERCISE A

Study the charts and the examples.

PAST PRESENT PERFECT

The action started The action is important,
and ended in the past. not when it happened.

last year now ? now

1 I
Rome Rome

Jan visited Rome last year. Jan has visited Rome before.

Use the present perfect to talk about a past action in the present
time.

Page 356 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 27

 NOTES
J
/"V
I moved to France in 1991.
I lived in England in 1994. I have learned two\ J I speak English. I
Now I live in Italy.

i i X
I have lived in \[ Q"
^
other languages. / 1 t Earned Frenc and
. Spanish in college.

several countries.

Aj
ft
'A a
The spoken statement is true now.

EXERCISE B

Complete the dialog. Change the verb in italics to the present

perfect. Follow the example. Read the dialogs with a partner.

Example: Ned: Arthur called me yesterday.

Ray: He still has not called me.
1. Pete: Several people came early.
Jacob: Louis not yet.
2. Jack: We all received high marks on our test.
Rick: We not our test results yet.
3. Kim: Roger got three letters today.
Ken: He almost a dozen letters
this week.
4. Dave: Mary brought cookies to the meeting this morning.
Cory: She cookies to all meetings.
5. Doug: Albert took his medicine this morning.
John: He the medicine regularly.

Student Text Page 357

 NOTES EXERCISE C

Use the present perfect and the words in parentheses ( ) to

answer the questions.

Example: Did Tony ask you for your camera? ( No / yet )

No, Tonv hasn' t asked me for mv camera vet.

1. Did he get any traveler’s checks? ( No / yet)

i 2. Did Tony and Lisa buy a new car? (Yes / already)

3. Have they ever seen the beaches in Florida before? ( No / yet )

j 4. Did Tony find a map of Florida? (Yes / already )

3 5. Has he called a travel agent? (Yes / already )

6. Did he pick up his airline ticket? ( No / yet )

|
EXERCISE D

Ask and answer questions about things you did in the past. Use
3 the cues and follow the example.

1 Example: play / baseball

Have vou ever plaved baseball?
Yes. I have. / No, I haven' t.
1. go / beach

2. fly / airplane

Page 358 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 27

 NOTES
3. visit / New York City

4. have / automobile accident

5. go / peacekeeping mission

EXERCISE E

Write a question. The italicized word indicates the answer. Use

1
the best question word for the word(s) in italics. Follow the
example.
Example: Jack has lived in Germany before.
Who has lived in Germany before?

1. The Roberts have already gone to Canada.

2. Harry has played American football before.

3. Tom has decided to go to college to get a master’ s degree .

4. The men have easily completed their jobs.

5. Bob has not finished his TDY yet.

6. Twenty-three students have graduated from the course.

Student Text Page 359

 NOTES
mi READING: USING CONTEXT CLUES

Read the sentence. Determine the meaning of the word in italics

using the other words in the sentence. Circle the best answer a,
b, or c.
1. Jim looked at his atlas and turned the pages slowly. He studied
the highways and cities carefully.
What is an atlas?
a. a book of maps
I
b. a clock or a watch
c. a large dictionary
i 2. Mark went to a stadium and bought a ticket for a football game.
What is a stadium?
a. a shopping center
b. a place to watch sports
c. an airport

Q„ ) SPEAKING: GIVING AN ORAL SUMMARY

Read the paragraph, underline the important information, and

prepare to give an oral summary.

1. Man needs machines to help him study the things that live and
grow in the ocean. There were several machines made in the past,
but man couldn’t make a careful study using them. Today we have
a better machine to help us study the ocean. It’s a vehicle which
can move under water to the places we want to study. It has large
windows which make it easy to see, and it can stay under water for
a long time.

Page 360 Nonintenslve ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 27

 2. When the weather stays very cold for a long time, large pieces of
ice cover parts of the world. These big pieces of ice move and break
mountains and trees. They push the earth and the mountains to
other places. They change the land and the way it looks.

^ LISTENING: IDENTIFYING IMPORTANT

INFORMATION

Read the questions. Then listen to a paragraph and answer the

questions.

Paragraph 1:
1. What was bad?

2. What did it blow down?

3. What did it break?

4. What did it do to the roads?

5. What stopped working?

6. How long did it last?

Paragraph 2:
1. Where does the breeze come from?

2. What is the breeze like?

3. What kind of weather does it bring?

4. What is that weather good for?

5. Why is this breeze good in the winter?

Student Text Page 361

 -User Notes-

Page 362 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 27

 :: '

WE COULD ADD ON A ROOM . LESSON 28

MMNI

& MB mm
BS '

:s/ FUNCTION: ELICIT AND EXPRESS POSSIBILITY

Maria: Our house is too small. What could we do?
Frank: We could add on a second story to the house.

GRAMMAR: USING COULD FOR POSSIBILITY

The questions could be too difficult for Simon.

REPORTED SPEECH WITH SAY

Carol said that the plane left New Orleans at 0600 .

VOCABULARY:
i
Noun Verb
addition room add on
builder shed boil
den solution build / built / built
dining room story burn
fire wood could
fireplace enlarge
heat Other heat
patio near leave / left / left
plan perhaps solve

Student Text Page 363

 msi
NOTES
Language Skills

a LISTENING: IDENTIFYING WORDS WITH

DIFFERENT SOUNDS
wm

Listen and identify the word with a

different sound than the word given.
IDENTIFYING IMPORTANT
INFORMATION
Listen for specific information in a
paragraph and answer comprehension
questions.

READING: USING CONTEXT CLUES

Determine a word’s meaning from
context clues.

Page 364 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 28

^ VOCABULARY: REMODELING A HOME
Read the dialog.

Mike is talking to his neighbor, Luke.

Mike: I’m thinking about building an addition to my house. :
Our house isn’t big enough for two families.
Luke: Two families? Who’s moving in?
Mike: My parents. They had to leave their house in the country
because living there is too difficult for them now.
Luke: Are you thinking
about adding on
f ss
an extra room or
building a second
story?
Mike: I’m not sure yet .
Dining
Room

l'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.l
hKitchen
Master
Bedroom

We could just do
'
an addition, but
that may not be
the right solution.
Luke: You could build a
Family Roiom

1 1 CP

second story and

have much more
room to use.
Bedroom Fll Bedroom

Mike: Our builder drew a

a plan for me
and my wife last Garage
fall. We wanted to
enlarge the patio
and add on a den
for the family to
relax in, but we never built it.
Luke: Does your wife want to enlarge your dining room, too?
Mike: Yes, she does. Perhaps our builder can solve our problem |
with a whole new plan. We will need room for my parents, j
a den for the family a larger patio, and a larger dining
room .
Luke: You could just buy a new house!
Mike: No way! I like my neighbors here!

Answer the your teacher’s questions about the dialog.

Student Text Page 365

 mmmimmasmMm
NOTES EXERCISE

You are Mike’s builder. Work with a team and draw a plan to
solve Mike’s problem. Use the words in the box to describe your
plan. Describe the plan to the class.

add on builder story enlarge

den could build-built building
patio plan solve solution
room -
leave left perhaps dining room
addition

Patio

Dining Master
Room 0 Bedroom

Kitchen ; ;
Q; t
0
Living Room 0
[p

JA Bedroom Office

Garage

Page 366 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 28

 NOTES

^ VOCABULARY: THE ADDITION WITH A FIREPLACE

Read the dialog.

A few months later...

Luke: Your builder did a great job on your second story!
Mike: Yes, he did. We’re very pleased with it. My parents moved
into the second story last month.
Luke: I see you also added a fireplace. That wasn’t in your first
plan.
Mike: No, it wasn’t. We decided to add it later, and we really like it.
Luke: Have you ever used a fireplace before? They need a lot of
work to keep them clean. If you don’t, they’re not safe.
Mike: You’re right about that! We have
already learned about fireplace
safety. The first time I built a
mn
fire, I almost burned the house
down!
Luke: What happened? r
Mike: Well, I was using new wood
that was wet! The wood has
to be dry. We now keep it in a
dry place away from the house.
That’s why I have it in the shed %
in the backyard.
Luke: Yes, I saw you moving it to the
shed from the patio.
M
i 1
m
If
Mike: We also learned that burning
other material besides dry wood
is not safe. The smoke could be
dangerous.
Luke: And you can’t keep your furniture near the fire. It might
start burning.
Mike: That’s right. We almost lost a chair that my wife put too
close to the fireplace!
Luke: You did not try to cook in your new fireplace, did you?
Mike: Well, I tried to boil water It boiled too much and went into
the fire. There was a lot of smoke. Now, we just use the
fireplace to heat the house.

Student Text Page 367

 NOTES EXERCISE A

Use the words in the gray box to fill in the blanks.

near wood fire shed

boil
fireplace could heat burn

If you want to safely enjoy your fireplace, there are some things
you should know. First , make a only with very dry
because wet wood causes a lot of thick smoke. You can
keep your wood dry in a garage or , but do not keep it
outside. Second, you should not other materials such
as boxes, trash, or old furniture because those things
cause dangerous smoke. Also, furniture and rugs should not be
your fireplace while you are using it. They could start
burning by accident. Since the fireplace is for heating your home, you
|shouldn’t use it to food or water.
Lastly, clean and check your every time you use it .

EXERCISE B

Write an outline of fireplace safety tips using the paragraph in

Exercise A. The example is the first point of the outline.
I
Fireplace Safety Tips
I
A. Make a fire only with very dry wood.
1.
2.
j B. Do not burn other materials.
1. Don’t burn
2.
3. Furniture or rugs
C. The fireplace is for
: D You shouldn’t use it to
1 E. Lastly,

Page 368 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 28

 NOTES

O GRAMMAR : USING COULD TO EXPRESS

* POSSIBILITY

Read the dialog with a partner and underline the modals.

What could this be?

Ann: It could be a glass.
It may be something to put flowers
in, a vase.
It might be two people looking at
each other.

could a glass.
It may be a vase.
might two people.

$* Use could , the same way you use the modals may and might to
make guesses.

EXERCISE A

Can you guess what is in these three pictures? Write a sentence

for each picture. Start each sentence with It could be .

1.

2.

3.

Student Text Page 369

 EXERCISE B

In pairs, write two possible answers for each question using

could .
Example: Why is she in a hurry?
She could be late .
for class

She could be meeting someone.

1. Where are my car keys?

2. Why is the fireplace full of smoke?

3. Where is the builder? He was supposed to be here an hour ago.

4. Should I enlarge the first story of the house or add a second story?

5. Who is knocking at the door?

EXERCISE C

Read the answers. Write questions with could . Read the

questions and answers with a partner.

| Example: Could the two of us move this furniture?

;

No, this furniture is too heavy for the two of us.

Where could Sam be?
Sam could be at the movies.

Page 370 Nonintensive ALC , Volume 3, Lesson 28

 NOTES

1.
My car didn’t start today. I don’t know what’s wrong with it.

I’m not sure where James is. He might be in the backyard.

3
Yes, that’s Mike’s sweater. He left it in the library yesterday.
4
This meeting could last for another hour.

5
I didn’t find Larry in the shed. I’ve already looked there.

/ FUNCTION : ASKING AND MAKING

STATEMENTS OF POSSIBILITY

Read the questions and the list of answers. Write A in the blank
for answers to Question A and write B for answers to Question B.

Question A Question B
We’ve been waiting for 20 minutes. I can’t find my notebook.
Why is Bob late again ? Where could it be?

Answers
^ He might be in the supervisor’s office.
Maybe you left it in the den.
Perhaps it’s in your car.
He could be stuck in traffic.
Perhaps he’s coming right now.
Maybe you gave it to your friend .

Student Text Page 371

 NOTES
EXERCISE

In pairs, talk about the different rooms in the house plan.

How can we use We might use

Room J? Room J as a din ¬
Could we use ing room.
Room G as a
library?

w
bedroom bathroom dining room
kitchen closet den
living room library laundry room

j PATIO
|
o
<0
H/

C«
-
NEBxnV
r a
©

O '1»
“
7S
©
0

0
©
— <D
1\ /

aV til ca ca
pasfcL

PORCH
ri
0 5 10 20ft
GARAGE

Page 372 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 28

5 GRAMMAR: REPORTED SPEECH
NOTES

I like the new He said that he

addition to my liked the new addition
house. to his house.

I f
What did he
say?

IL
Peter Paul
Jake Paul

Peter said (that) he liked his new house.

We usually have to change the subject and the verb in reported

speech.

EXERCISE A

Read the dialog. Then write the reported speech answer.

1. Pete: I know all the answers to the test.
Jacob: What did Pete say?
Paul:
2. Jack: My job is really difficult this week.
Rick: Did Jack say that his job was easy?
Sue:
3. Rosie: My family needs a much bigger house.
Joan: What did Rosie say?
Sara:
4. Mary: We watch all the new movies on our TV.
Sally: Did Mary say they watched old movies?
Jim:

Student Text ills Page 373

 NOTES EXERCISE B

Read the sentence on the card and change it into reported

speech.

Student A
Example: (Card Front ): I’m too busy this week.
Student B
(Card back): He said ( that ) he was too busy this week.

fer
I’m too busy this week.

He said Cthat ) he was

too busy this week .

Student A Student B

EXERCISE C

Work with a partner. Read the dialogs and write the reported
speech.

Example: Rick: I don’t like the new movie.

Ann: What did Rick say about the new movie?
Joe: He said ( that ) he didn' t like the new movie .

1. Beth: My husband doesn’t enjoy going to the doctor.

Barb: What did Beth say about her husband?
Paul:
2. Mark: I don’t know how to fix your car.
Bob: Did Mark say he knew how to fix your car?
Peter:

Page 374 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 28

 3. Alan: I’m not going to enlarge the bedroom.
Tony: Did Alan say he was going to make the bedroom larger?
Eric:

4. Mary: I don’t have enough time to study.

Alan: Did Mary say she needed more time to study?
Tom:
5. Sally: I don’t want to go to the mall.
Pam: Did Sally say that she wanted to go to the mall with us?
Jill:

EXERCISE D

Interview one person in the class. Record the answers and

report them to your group.

Student questionnaire Yes No

1. Do you drink coffee everyday?
2. Are you interested in computer games?
3. Do you like reading to relax?
4. Do you enjoy working out?
Short Answer
1. Where do you want to go on vacation?
2. What sports do you not enjoy playing?
3. What is the best advice you give others?

Major Thomas said

he didn’t drink coffee and he enjoyed
computer games. He said that he wanted
to go to the beach for his vacation.

f r
nH<Ri
Student Text Page 375
 fi LISTENING: IDENTIFYING WORDS WITH
DIFFERENT SOUNDS

Circle the letter of the word that sounds different.

1. a b c 6. a b c

2. a b c 7. a b c

3. a b c 8. a b c

4. a b c 9. a b c
5. a b c 10. a b c

o LISTENING: IDENTIFYING IMPORTANT

INFORMATION

Read the questions below. Then listen to the paragraph and

answer the questions.
Paragraph 1:
1. Where does the writer live?

2. How many people live in the town?

3. How old are the kindergarten children?

4. What is another way to say junior high?

5. Which grades are in high school?

6. Is there a college or university in the town?

7. Where do people from the town go to school after high school?

Page 376 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 28

Paragraph 2: NOTES
J
,

1. What is the paragraph about?

2. What kind of student is called an “ egghead” ?

3. What is an “ egghead’s” head like?

READING: USING CONTEXT CLUES

Select the words with the same meaning as the words in italics .
Circle a, b, or c.

Example: Tony used an almanac in the library to find out more

about the country of Kuwait .
a . a kind of tool
b. a kind of radio
©
a kind of book
1. Everyone enjoyed the wedding reception. It was at the Ronco Hotel j ,

a. party
b. program
c. show
2. I had a good idea last night about how to fix this radio, but now I
can’t remember it.
a. a tool
b. some money
c. a thought
3. We put the animals in the barn to keep them dry during the storm.
a. a building
b. a park
c. a yard
4. Our commander gave a lecture yesterday. It lasted over an
hour, but everyone enjoyed it because he gave us a lot of good
information.
a. a song for the company
b. a speech on a topic
c. a tool for fixing a computer

Student Text Page 377

 -User Notes-

Page 378 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 28

 ^ «w ‘ .*- -
s x < <>
-
• s ~! -- t * ' <
-
: • ' » • *
*,rt ' sf J "» \S* 4 • U* *!
* '*- ** - * «BagSRH
j

LET’ S HAVE A GET-TOGETHER! LESSON 29

?# * 4 -r .. .v -. • w
u /*syW'/ ' i »* «< » i 4iii '« **iii -**
^ ^r4}‘ - - . 'w*r*
i 'st «i- * aKsss»TO»!sora
*ABasi®W*Hiw«ww*&M

V V -

GRAMMAR: USING ADJECTIVES WITH -ED AND ING -

I am excited about the party.
The party is exciting.

^ VOCABULARY:

Noun Verb
cassette get / got / gotten together
CD (compact disc) play m
get-together record
idea take / took / taken place
meeting
microwave oven Other
player interested in
room then
speaker tiring
stereo
suburb
trouble

Student Text Page 379

 NOTES
LANGUAGE SKILLS

WRITING: WRITING SUMMARIES

Write a summary of a written
paragraph.

o LISTENING: IDENTIFYING ENDINGS

Listen and select the targeted word
endings.
j

G»
> SPEAKING: ROLE - PLAYING A SITUATION
Role-play an informal conversation.

Page 380 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 29

 NOTES
VOCABULARY: LET’S HAVE A GET-TOGETHER!
Read the dialog.
Barb: Hi, Becca! We haven’t gotten together in months! How
have you been?
Becca: I’m doing well. How are you these days?
Barb: Well, Bill and I just moved into a new house in the
suburbs, and we are so happy to be out of the city. We
have lots of room for parties now, and we want to have a
get -together . Can you come?
Becca: Of course! I would never miss getting together with my
friends. Can I help?
Barb: Sure, but won’t that be too much trouble for you?
Becca: Not at all! I enjoy helping.
Barb: Oh good! You and I can have a meeting at lunch and plan
everything. Will Thursday be a good day for you?
Becca: Thursday’s fine. See you then.

EXERCISE

Read the sentences. Write T for true and F for false.

1. Becca has a new house in the suburbs.

2. The get-together will take place tomorrow.
3. There’s a lunch meeting on Friday.
4. Barb and Bill have lots of room for parties.
5. Barb likes living away from the city.

m. 3L
mm
Student Text Page 381
 NOTES
VOCABULARY: LET’S HAVE A GET-TOGETHER!
Read the dialog.
Later that week :

Barb: I have so many ideas for this get-together!

Becca: First , we have to decide when it will take place . Then we
can talk about the food .
Barb: Right! I’ll choose a Saturday later this month and call all
our friends.
Becca: OK. Will you cook food or should everyone bring
something?
Barb: I’m going to cook a lot of the food before the party. Then
we can warm it in the microwave oven just before our
friends arrive.
Becca: Great idea! I’ll bring the drinks, snacks, and some music
CDs to play on your stereo. I’ll come early to help you
prepare because all this work can be so tiring!
Barb: Thanks! I’m really excited about this! We haven’t gotten
together with our friends in a long time. It will be
interesting to see how everyone is doing these days.
Becca : That’s true, but I’m really interested in seeing your new
house!

EXERCISE A

Circle the word in each line with the same meaning as the first
word.

1. take place run away discuss happen

2. idea thought place education
3. microwave oven furniture chair appliance
4. suburb center not in the city downtown
5. get-together job party conversation
6. room place furniture future
7. trouble help well problem

Page 382 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 29

 EXERCISE B NOTES

Interview a partner. Ask and answer questions about get-

togethers your families have. Use the questions below for ideas.

Yes. It was great. Do

you like the sign we
put on our door?

W ft
My family had a get - together!
1. Where did it take place?

2. When did it take place?

3. Whose idea was it to have this get-together?

4. Who was it for?

5. What did you do?

6. Did anything go wrong?

7. What did you eat?

8. Who did the cooking?

Student Text Page 383

 NOTES
0 GRAMMAR: USING ADJECTIVES WITH
- ED AND - ING

rJ f\
' f\
IL A
The person (or group) that feels
an emotion or a feeling uses the
H
L
adjective with -ed .

I
bored.
He confused.
She is
excited.
It
frightened.
You interested.
We are
They tired.

EXERCISE A

Look at the sentences on the next page. Ask different classmates

how they feel about these things. For each sentence, write a
classmate’s name and the adjectives from the gray box that
match the opinions he or she gave.

Examples: How do you feel about computer games?

I' m interested in computer games.

bored by frightened by
confused by tired of
excited by interested in

Page 384 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 29

 NOTES
NAME OPINION
1. I am computer games.
2. T am map reading.

3. I am English grammar .

4. T am sightseeing .

5. I’m not my job.

6. T’m not sports .

7. T’m not hospitals .

8. I’m not cooking.

What did you

It was It was exciting .
interesting .
think of Chicago? It was
tiring .

' !\ A ini
(L
The thing or person (or group) that
causes a feeling uses the adjective with
-ing.
It boring .
’

The movie is confusing.

The book
exciting.
The people frightening.
The noises are interesting.
They tiring.

Student Text Page 385

 NOTES
EXERCISE B

What do you think about these things? Write the adjectives from
the gray box that match your opinion.

boring frightening
confusing tiring
exciting interesting

1. History is
2. I don’t think that playing soccer is
3. Commercials on TV can be
4. I do not think that traveling is
5. Today’s music is
6.1 think that race cars are
7. I don’t think that working out is
8. A person giving a speech may be

I
EXERCISE C
1
Change the verb to the correct adjective form. Fill in the blanks.

1. excite Are you about your vacation?

Yes! Skiing in the mountains is very
| 2. frighten Is the movie too for children?
No, they won’t be too It’s a lot of fun.
i
J 3. bore
I
Are these magazines for adults?
Yes, adults will be These magazines
are for teens.
| 4. confuse Were you after hearing that person
speak?
No, I understood him very well. He was not

Page 386 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 29

 NOTES

5. tire Is John every day after work?

Yes. John has a job. He works too many
hours.
6 . interest Is your career to you?
No, I’m not really this work.

^ VOCABULARY: USING A SMALL STEREO

Label the parts of the stereo. Use the words in the gray box.
Numbers 4 and 6 are examples.

cassette cassette players CD*

CD player speakers power cord radio

\
O
0 o0

*CD = Compact disc

Student Text Page 387

 NOTES
EXERCISE

Use the words from the gray box to complete the paragraph.

stereo cassette CD
CD player speakers record
Play trouble cassette player
Congratulations! You’re the owner of the new TX-360 stereo!

Please read all instructions before using it so that you will have
no with it. First, set up your stereo as stated in the
directions. Then, plug in the and power cord. Next,
open the and insert a Push
the button to see if it is working correctly. Now, try
the Use an empty
and test the record button to your voice.

Finally, turn on the radio and listen to your favorite music. Enjoy
your new TX-360. It’s a great !

WRITING: WRITING SUMMARIES

Get - togethers in America: The Dinner Party

A dinner party is a special meeting for people to come together to eat
dinner. It is for a very important purpose like a wedding or entertaining
i a boss. The person giving this party the host, will send notes out to the
| guests to tell them when and where the dinner party will take place.
1 The guests also know that for a dinner party they must wear their best
1 clothes. A dinner party will always have a main idea or theme for the
food and the table. The dinner table will have the best dishes set in a
special order because the guests must follow rules, or correct etiquette,
3 for eating the meal.
| Example Summary:
A dinner party is a dinner meeting for different and very important
purposes. The host will send out notes so the quests will know the details
about the party and what to wear. Everyone follows the rules of correct
etiquette at the party.

Page 388 Nonintensive ALC , Volume 3, Lesson 29

Paragraph 1 NOTES

Get - togethers in America: The Barbecue

The word barbecue can mean a casual
outdoor party, the meat cooked and served
at that party, or the fire where the meat is
cooked. All three make the most popular
kind of outdoor get-together in American
suburbs. Family, friends, and neighbors get
together in the host’s backyard , usually
in the afternoon. They bring with them
their own special foods to go with the meat
cooking on the fire. While the meat is
cooking, people play games or just sit and
visit. When the meat is done, they might have a tall glass of iced tea in
one hand and a plate of delicious barbecue in the other. It’s a good time
to relax and enjoy life.

Paragraph 2

Get- togethers in America: The Powwow

When Native Americans want to have a get-together, g
they call for a powwow Powwows are special meetings
for Native Americans. These meetings take place in

Iks many different places all across America. The purpose

of a powwow is to honor the Earth, keep the old customs
of the Native Americans alive, and visit with friends
and family. They sing the songs of their ancestors from
hundreds of years ago. They make a big circle so the
dancers and the drum players can perform in the center, j
They wear Native American clothing from many years past. It’s a time
to see old friends and make new ones.

Student Text Page 389

 NOTES
(u) LISTENING: IDENTIFYING ENDINGS

Listen to the words. Pay attention to the -s ending. Write the

words under their ending sound. The first three are examples.

/5/ / z/ /ez/

EXERCISE

Listen to three words. Circle A, B, or C for the word which has

the ending indicated.

Example: Instructor: cooks, educates, repairs

1. /z/ A B @
Instructor: serves, fixes, climbs
2. /ez/ A ( B) C

1. /s/ A B C
2. Izl A B C
3. /ez/ A B C
4. Izl A B C
5. /s/ A B C
6. Izl A B C
7. /ez/ A B C

Page 390 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 29

1 Q, )
) SPEAKING: ROLE - PLAYING A SITUATION
Choose one of the situations below. Role-play that situation with
a partner.

1. Student A: You go to the electronics store to buy a stereo. You don’t

have much money.
Student B: You are the salesman.
Problem: The store no longer has the stereo you want to buy. They
have a newer, more expensive one.

2. Student A: Plan a get-together for the people from your work.

Student B: You are a co-worker.
Problem -. The party is for your boss.

3. Student A: You are meeting with your builder to look at his plans
for your new addition.
Student B: You are the builder.
Problem: The builder’s plans are not what you want. He is 25%
over the budget that you were planning for. He did not listen to
you.

4. Student A: You want to buy a house in the suburbs.

Student B: You are the agent selling the house.
Problem: The price of the house is 15% more than you can pay.
You want the agent to ask for a lower price.

Student Text Page 391

 -User Notes-

Page 392 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 29

HAVE YOU GONE TO BLUEBIRD LAKE THIS YEAR? LESSON 30
r«
< H ^ v- * -1 tmmmmmmmI

m ~ - ~-
at

0 GRAMMAR: COMPARATIVE ADVERBS WITH -ER

Martin can throw the ball farther than Roger.
My friend walks slower than I walk.

PRESENT PERFECT REVIEW

Sue: Have you gone to Bluebird Lake this year?
Matt: Yes, it’s a nice place to go fishing.

^ VOCABULARY:

Noun Verb Other

fish / fish catch / caught / caught farther
fishing rod fish hard
line prepare high
indoors
Expressions low
go / went / gone + v-ing more
in the open outdoors
own
several
slow

Student Text Page 393

 NOTES
LANGUAGE SKILLS

LISTENING: IDENTIFYING WORDS WITH

DIFFERENT SOUNDS
Listen and identify the word with a
different sound than the given word.

IDENTIFYING WORDS WITH THE

SAME SOUND
Listen and identify the letter(s ) with the
same sound as the given word.

READING: USING CONTEXT CLUES

Determine the meaning of a word from
context clues.
READING AND SUMMARIZING
Read a paragraph and give an oral
summary.

Page 394 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 30

 NOTES
VOCABULARY: DO YOU LIKE TO GO FISHING?
Read the advertisement.

Tired of working indoors all day ? ebird 4.

%
Are you happier outdoors ?
Then go fishing on Bluebird Lake! *
Fishing Company
Bring your own boat and
fishing rods, or rent some of ours.
We have lots of boats and several
kinds of rods to choose from. Need
more fishing line? Get more at our
Bluebird Lake Fishing Company Store . It has everything for the
beginner to the professional fisherman. Need a license to fish?
The law says you must have one. We sell those, too.

When you have caught your fish, t

you can clean your own or ask us to do |

it. In fact , let us prepare dinner for you f
with your own fish at our Bluebird Lake |
Fishing Company Restaurant , where

%
m'
'
-
you can eat indoors, or enjoy eating in
the open on our patio.
Call us today ! (931 ) 555-0972
Bluebird Lake Fishing Company
.

4 - Store & Restaurant

15044 Country Road 46
Greenwood , Colorado

_
7 miles west of Highway 65 North, Exit 182

____
EXERCISE A

Read the sentences. Write T for true and F for false.

1. The store doesn’t rent fishing rods, only boats.
2. At the store, you can buy anything you need to fish.
3. You can go fishing on Bluebird Lake without a license.
4. The restaurant will prepare your own fish to eat .
5. The store and restaurant are on Country Road 46.

Student Text Page 395

 NOTES EXERCISE B

Complete the sentence with a word from the box. Use “ own”
twice, once as a pronoun and again as an adjective.

line own several indoors outdoors

fish catch prepare caught own

1. Dan will need a fishing rod if he’s going to

2. I enjoy being whenever I can.
3. Who wants to dinner tonight?
4. Yesterday I three fish for dinner.
5. Do we need to buy more fishing before we go
to the lake?
6. We have our boat , so we don’t need to rent one.
7. The bad weather kept us today.
8. Every time I go to the lake, I several fish.
9. You can rent our boat or use your
10. I have gone fishing times this year.

V GRAMMAR: USING COMPARATIVE ADVERBS

WITH - ER
John runs faster
than Paul.
Paul runs fast.

John run faster than Paul .

(runs )

Page 396 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 30

 NOTES
EXERCISE A

Underline the positive and comparative forms of the adverbs.

Take turns reading the sentences with a partner. Number 1 is an
example.
1. A1 is hitting the baseball high, but Joe is hitting it higher than Al.
2. Joan left the house early, but Sara left the house earlier than Joan.
3. Dan works hard, but Bill works harder than Dan works.
4. I live near the school, but Brenda lives nearer than I live.
5. Your bus arrived late today, but their bus arrived later than yours.
6. Some planes can fly low, but helicopters can fly lower than planes.
7. The major speaks slow, but the colonel speaks slower than the major.
8. The soldiers ran far today, but the marines ran farther than the
soldiers ran.
9. Lt Jones is standing straight, but Lt Brown is standing straighter
than Lt Jones.
10. The teacher will arrive soon, but the students arrived sooner than
the teacher.

EXERCISE B

Write answers to the questions. Use adverbs with -er . Number 1

is an example.
1. Patty usually gets up at 6:30 a.m. John gets up at 5:45 a.m.
Who gets up earlier?
John gets up earlier than Patty.
2. John runs 3.5 miles every night. Fred runs 2.7 miles every
morning. Did Fred run farther than John?

3. The city built the post office in 1955. The military base built
its post office in 1960. Which post office is older?

4. The speed limit in the school area is 20 m.p.h. The speed

limit on the highway is 60 m.p.h. Where do people drive
slower?

5. Bob has two jobs. Jack has 3 jobs. Does Jack work harder?

Student Text Page 397

 NOTES EXERCISE C

In pairs, ask and answer questions about the information in the

chart. Follow the example.

Did Wendy
arrive sooner than Yes, she did. Sandra
Sandra in biking? arrived later than
Wendy in biking.

r
BROOK CITY SUMMER SPORTS
Results: Top 3 Finishers

SWIMMING 500 yards Time

Lisa H. 02:44
Wendy B. 02:48
Susan R. 02: 50

BIKING 12 miles

Wendy B . 25:37
Sandra L. 26:29
Mary K. 26:35

A RUNNING 3 miles

Kay A. 18:58
Ann S. 19: 10
Lisa H. 19:15

Page 398 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 30

 LISTENING: IDENTIFYING WORDS WITH
DIFFERENT SOUNDS
Circle the letter or the word that sounds different.

1. a b c
2. a b c 7. a b c
3. a b c 8. a b c
4. a b c 9. a b c
5. a b c 10. a b c

^ LISTENING: IDENTIFYING WORDS WITH THE

SAME SOUND

Circle the letter of the word with the same sound that you hear.

Example: laugh
a. bug
( h) beef
c. daughter
a. cook 4. a. busy
b. rice b. cashier
c. egg c. cross
a. shut 5. a. decide
b. chair b. cause
c. sit c. charge
a. charge 6. a. cash
b. neck b. charge
c. quiet c. neck

IflffiS
Student Text Page 399
 NOTES
READING: USING CONTEXT CLUES

Select the word(s) with the same meaning as the italicized

word(s).

1. The flowers in our garden looked terrible. There were a lot

of bugs on them , and all the leaves looked brown. We put a
pesticide on the flowers. We think it helped because all the
bugs died immediately.
a. something that kills bugs
b. something that covers flowers
c. food for flowers

2. When Tom first told me about buying a new truck, I didn’t

believe it was a good idea. Later, he explained why he
needed to buy the truck. His idea started to sound good. He
convinced me to help him buy the truck.
a. wrote to me
b. let me
c. changed my mind

3. Usually, the last train of the night from the suburbs to the
city has only a few people on it. The train is practically
empty.
a. very
b. almost
c. always

4. We need to repair the portion of the wall under the window.

That part always becomes wet when it rains.
a. piece
b. shape
c. sign

5. We didn’t have a car on our last vacation, but transportation

wasn’t a problem. We were able to get a bus or taxi
everywhere.
a. a kind of food
b. money
c. ways to travel

Page 400 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 30

ft GRAMMAR: PRESENT PERFECT TENSE
NOTES

( REVIEW)

Complete the chart. Place have before the past participle to

form the present perfect. The first one is an example .

begin began have begun

drink
found
break
built
have frozen
keep
lose
have paid
rode
say
shake
slept
have stood
teach
have withdrawn
cost

EXERCISE A

Use the present perfect to complete the sentences below. Select

verbs from the chart above.
1. Those teachers - . this class for the past five years.

2. John looks tired. He . all week.

3. They . . already . . that they do not
want us to smoke near the building.
4. Col Smith . . everyone in this meeting for over two
hours.
5. His plan _ _ us a lot of money. It was a bad idea .

6. I need a drink. I _ enough water today.

Student Text Page 401

 NOTES
EXERCISE B

.
Read the answers Then write a question with the words in
.
parentheses ( ) Number 1 is an example .
I Has Jack been in class today? (Has)
Yes, Jack has been in class since this morning.
2. . (Have)
No, we haven’t had any rain this week.
3. (How many)
Dan has lost three books this week.
4. (Where )
Lt Howard has been in the colonel’s office for an hour.
5. (Why)
I have left the office because I must return home.
6. (How long)
Jane Lewis has been a doctor for twenty-three years.

EXERCISE C

.
Choose the correct sentence Place a check in the box.

1. We saw Jim yesterday.

We have seen Jim yesterday.

2. They bought that car two years ago.

They have bought that car two years ago.

3. He flew in a helicopter three times since yesterday.

He has flown in a helicopter three times since yesterday.

4. She has paid her rent last week.

She paid her rent last week.

Page 402 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 30

 NOTES
READING: GIVING AN ORAL SUMMARY

Read the paragraphs. Orally summarize one paragraph for your

partner. Then listen to your partner’s summary of the other
paragraph.

Dr. Maria Montessori

Maria Montessori was a doctor and educator
in Italy about 100 years ago. In 1907, she started
a new kind of school for children in a poor
neighborhood near Rome where families did not
have much money. The name of Dr. Montessori’s
school was The Children’ s House . It quickly became
very famous because the children learned a lot in
a very short time. Professional teachers, educators,
and businessmen from all over the world came to
see classes and watch the students and teachers. Because they liked
what they saw, by 1915, more than a hundred Montessori schools opened
in countries around the world. Most were in the USA.
At first, there were many Montessori schools in the USA. But in
1914, two famous professionals in American education said that Dr.
Montessori’s schools were poor and did not teach students well. After
that, most of the US schools closed. Today, there are again many
American Montessori schools because parents are sure children learn
well the Montessori way. Most of them are private, and parents have to
pay to send their children there. These schools offer a choice to parents
who want a different kind of school for their child.

Student Text Page 403

 -User Notes-

Page 404 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 30

WE USED TO HUNT DUCKS. LESSON 31

m m

/ FUNCTION: TALK AND ASK ABOUT PAST ROUTINES

Jack: What did you use to do for fun on the weekends?
Jim: I’d go duck hunting with my dad and cousins.

Q-
- GRAMMAR: TALK ABOUT PAST ROUTINES USING USED TO
John used to hunt deer with his brothers. Now, he goes hunting
with his friends.

TALK ABOUT PAST ROUTINES USING WOULD

Sue: When would you go hunting in the country?
Sam: We’d go hunting in the country every fall.

^ VOCABULARY:
Noun
country rifle
Verb
hunt
Other
all over
deer / deer shot kill further
duck walk shoot / shot / shot once
gun weapon practice outdoor
instructions used to plenty (of )
outdoors would twice
pistol whole

Student Text Page 405

 NOTES
LANGUAGE SKILLS

READING: LOCATING IMPORTANT

CONTENT
Identify important words and phrases in
a paragraph.

LISTENING: IDENTIFYING WORDS WITH THE

SAME SOUND
Listen and identify the letter ( s ) with the
same sound as the given word.

WRITING: COMBINING SENTENCES

Combine related sentences into a
compound sentence.

Page 406 Nonintensive ALC , Volume 3, Lesson 31

 :

NOTES
VOCABULARY: DO YOU LIKE TO GO HUNTING?
Repeat and read the new words and sentences.

1. Pistols and rifles are 2. Some people like the

guns. Guns and knives are outdoors and hunt very
weapons . often. They use different
guns to hunt different
animals.

V
'

1
1
*

3m
m If / :
fsm

3. Herb likes to hunt deer. 4. Dan likes to hunt ducks . He

This year, he wants to shoot just shot a duck and killed
two deer during the hunting it.
season.

Student Text Page 407

 NOTES EXERCISE
Complete the sentences with the words from the box.
rifle pistols weapons hunt killed
deer ducks outdoors shoot gun

1. Rifles are usually longer and heavier than

2. Matt went hunting yesterday and a deer.
3. My father used his new when he went deer
hunting.
4. Guns and knives are
5. You can hunt for during the hunting season.

6. Sam is a police officer. He takes a with him when

he works.
7. My friends like to hunt and deer.
8. Once a year, we go hunting to small animals.
9. Jim doesn’t like to because he doesn’t want to
hurt the animals.
10. We enjoy the when the weather is nice.

^ Bob:
VOCABULARY: I ENJOY THE GREAT OUTDOORS.
Do you remember when we were young and we lived in the
country? We used to do a lot of outdoor activities.

Jim: I remember. We would go all

over the hills and hunt deer ETA:
and small animals. Now we
have moved further away
from the animals. We have .
to drive an hour just to go
hunting!
*
Bob: I remember the first time you
and I went hunting. We were
maybe 16 or 17 years old. We
took all morning just to get am
ready. It was noon before we
left , and then we got lost more
than once!

Page 408 Nonintensive ALC , Volume 3, Lesson 31

 !
Jim: We got lost twice . It was because we didn’t read the map! NOTES

Bob: We took a walk all over the hills looking for a good shot, but
we didn’t kill anything that first day.

Jim: That was because we weren’t ready to use those new weapons f
we had . We didn’t read the instructions for them, and we
couldn’t shoot straight.
I
Bob: Yes, we lost a whole day of hunting! We needed to practice
more before we used those rifles.

Jim: But even with all the problems, we would always have
plenty of fun together.

Bob: That’s right , my friend. I’ll never forget those good old days!
I

EXERCISE A

Answer the questions about the dialog.

1. Where did Bob and Jim use to hunt?

2. What kinds of animals did they hunt?

3. How much time did they take to get ready the first time they
hunted ?

4. How many times did they get lost?

5. How many animals did they kill the first day?

6. What did Jim and Bob need to do before they used their rifles?

7. How much time did they loose?

Student Text Page 409

 NOTES EXERCISE B

Complete the sentences with the words from the hox.

whole plenty all over country walk

further instructions shot once outdoor

1. We moved from the city to the because it’s

quieter.
2. Do you need the box of color pencils or just a few?

3. I don’t want anything to eat. I’ve had of food today.

4. I go for a with my friend several days a week.

5. He drove than he planned to drive that day.

6. I have gone fishing only in my life.

7. The for the game are on the box.

8. The water in the swimming pool was cold this

morning.
9. Can we swim the place or only in some parts of
the lake?
10. I heard the sound of a coming from the other
side of the mountain.

GRAMMAR: USING USED TO TO TALK ABOUT

PAST ROUTINES

He used to run .
I
V
I
(Where) Did he use# to run?

Questions and statements with did use the base form use to
instead of used to.

Page 410 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3 , Lesson 31

 NOTES
Mona, do you
remember when we
started our company? We
used to build only a few
houses in a year.

ftftft ft ft ft
ft ft “ ft ft
ft ft ft

/1
Used to means something happened regularly or existed in the
past, but not anymore.

EXERCISE A

Read the paragraph and answer the questions.

Jack and Allen Sims are brothers. They used to be waiters in a

restaurant that was open 24 hours a day. They worked all night. They
used to go to work at 10:30 p.m. and work until 7:30 a.m. They used to
wear jeans, T-shirts, and tennis shoes to work. Since they graduated
from college, they have better jobs. Now, they work from 10:00 a.m. until I
7:00 p.m. and wear nice suits to work.
1. What did Jack and Allen use to be?

2. Did they use to work all day?

3. What hours did they use to work?

4. What did they use to wear to work?

Student Text Page 411

 NOTES EXERCISE B

Work in pairs. Write a question using use (d ) to and the word in ( ).

Then read your questions to your partner. Number 1 is an example.

1. Wendy used to be a pilot before she retired. (What )

What did Wendy use to be before she retired?

2. John started building houses last year ; he didn’t use to build them
in the past. (Did)

—
3. Rob and Dave used to hunt all over the hill country. (Where )

4. Jen didn’t use to have parties, but she does now. ( Did )

5. Carla used to study French in high school. (What)

6. Sara used to make cakes for her friends every week. (How often )

I 7. George used to go to the gym in the evenings. (Who)

Page 412 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 31

 NOTES
EXERCISE C

Ask other students about past habits. Start your questions with
the clause “ When you were a child ... ” If the person replies “ Yes,”
write that person’s name on the line to complete the sentence.
If the person answers “ No,” ask another student the same
question. Number 1 is an example.

When you were a Yes, I did. I used

child, did you use to play in the park
to play in the park? every afternoon.

<R rv

Student CaPt Hima

1. Capt Hima used to play in the park.

2. used to play with small cars and trains.
3. used to climb trees.
4. used to take music lessons.
5. used to have a dog or cat.
6. used to go fishing.

Student Text Page 413

 NOTES
O GRAMMAR : USING WOULD TO TALK ABOUT
PAST ROUTINES

Would means something happened regularly in the past, but is

not happening anymore.

EXERCISE A

Read the story and underline would + verb.

Before Paul was in the military, his life was very different from the
| way it is now. He would stay up late at night, and he would get up late
in the morning. He didn’t have good health habits, so he would never
I go for walks or work out. He wouldn’t buy foods that were good for his
1 health. He bought chips and hamburgers instead because he thought
j they tasted better. He enjoyed having lots of friends and liked to talk to
them often, so they would call him at any time during the day or night
to talk. He also liked to play loud music on his stereo, so his neighbors
would have to ask him to turn down the sound at 10:00 p.m. He was
still a single man, and his parents would ask him to come for dinner on
1 Sundays.

Page 414 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 31

 EXERCISE B

Use the text on the previous page to answer these questions

with the contracted form of would or wouldn’ t .

1. Would Paul stay up late before he was in the military?

2. When would Paul get up?

I

3. How often would Paul go for walks or work out?

—
4. What kind of food would Paul buy instead of healthy things to eat?

5. Would Paul’s friends call him only during the day?

6. Why would Paul’s neighbors ask him to turn down his stereo?

7. Where would he go for dinner on Sundays?

EXERCISE C

With your partner, take turns completing the following

sentences as in the example. Use would or wouldn’t .

Example: When I was a child and I was sick, I’d ask mv mother
to let me stay in bed . I would eat a lot ofsouo. I would
watch TV. Sometimes, I would go to the doctor.

1. When I was in school and arrived late, I’d

2. When my sister was a little girl, she’d
3. When I was young and needed money, I’d
4. When I was upset about something, I’d
5. My parents were pleased with me when I’d 3
:
!
6. When I was a child and was frightened, I’d

Student Text Page 415

 NOTES
/ FUNCTION: TALKING ABOUT PAST ROUTINES
OR ACTIVITIES

Listen and repeat the sentences after the instructor.

1. I would
I’d play soccer in the evening.
I used to

2. I would
I’d wash my clothes every Saturday.
I used to

3. I would
I’d spend hours reading books.
I used to

4. I would
I’d go hunting in the hills near my home.
I used to
|
5.1 would
I’d spend my summer vacations at the beach.
I used to

6. I would
I’d go to the movies every weekend.
I used to

EXERCISE A

Ask your partner yes / no questions using the sentences above .

Use both used to and would .
Example: Sue: Would you play soccer in the evening?
Ray: Yes, I would. / No, I wouldn’t.
Sue: Did you use to play soccer in the evening?
Ray: Yes, I did. / No, I didn’t

Page 416 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 31

 NOTES
EXERCISE B :

Ask and answer questions about past habits you had before a
big change happened in your life.

A. Choose a big change in your life.

• You graduated from school. • You bought a house.

• You joined the military. • You had children.
• You got married. • Other
B. Talk about PAST HABITS with would and used to.
1. How would you spend your free time before [big change]?
2. Who would you spend your free time with?
3. How often would you go out?
4. What _?
5. When J?
6. Where . .?

C. Talk about PAST CONDITIONS with use(d ) to only . Do not use would .

7. Where did you use to live?

8. Did you use to be happier or less happy?
9. Who used to be your best friend?
10. ?

Student Text Page 417

 ir
NOTES
READING: LOCATING IMPORTANT
CONTENT

Read the paragraph. Underline the important words and

phrases.

Many towns and cities in the

US have deer that live in their
parks. In some of these parks,
there are too many deer for the
deer to live well. In the past, the
deer used to have plenty of food
because their numbers were small,
and the parks were large. Now,
the cities are larger and the parks
are smaller. The deer don’t have
enough to eat, so they get sick. They also go onto the roads and cause
automobile accidents. In the last few years, many of these towns and
cities have had to find a solution to the problem of too many deer. Some
places let hunters kill the deer and sell the meat. Of course, animal
lovers don’t like that solution, so many places catch the deer and send
them to wildlife parks where other wild animals live.

^ LISTENING: IDENTIFYING WORDS WITH THE

SAME SOUND
Circle the letter of the word that has the same sound that you
hear.
Example: laugh
a. bug
(h) beef
c. daughter
1. a. cook 4. a. pass
b. ice b. shine
c. change c. nose
2. a. cook 5. a. dog
b. dozen b. page
c. ice c. laugh
3. a. three 6. a. change
b. free b. shop
c. very c. time

Page 418 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 31

 NOTES
WRITING: COMBINING SENTENCES J

Combine the two sentences. Use the words and , or , but , or so .

Example: Mike and Ellen wanted to go hunting early in the

morning. They decided to stay outdoors.
Mike and Ellen wanted to ao hunting early in the morning
so they decided to stay outdoors.

1. They hunted twice this week. Mike finally shot a deer on Sunday.

2. Mike and Ellen were very tired . They had a good time.

3. They couldn’t eat the whole deer. They gave some to their neighbors.

4. Next time, they could go hunting again. They could go fishing.

5. They’re going to the lake. They’ll have to leave at 4:00 a.m.

6. Ellen wants to go to bed early. She and her husband still have a lot
of things to prepare.

,
. .. .. . .. .
v
Student Text Page 419
 -User Notes-

Page 420 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 31

I’VE GONE TO THE BEACH EVERY YEAR. LESSON 32

.
sc
I
mm m a11.' •
V!

a®, -
I
ms
*
-
*
mmmW \
. 1
‘

IS

f Itl S
- aa :
- ;
I
! ^1
Q GRAMMAR: REVIEW

VOCABULARY: REVIEW

Student Text Page 421

 -User Notes-

Page 422 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 32

. : '
|
'

- •

EXERCISE A NOTES

Write sentences. Use the two words in any order. Numbers 1 is

an example.

1. enlarge / patio
Next year, we will enlarge the patio.

2. build / addition

3. turn down / offer

4. could use / vacation

5. shoot / ducks

6. career / college

7. breezes / beach

8. wood / fireplace

9. refuse / tour of duty

10. trouble / fireplace

Student Text Page 423

 NOTES EXERCISE B

Write questions. Use the two words in any order. Number 1 and
2 are examples.

1. discuss / problem
Have you discussed the problem with your teacher?

2. dining room / fireplace

Do you have a fireplace in your dining room?

3. field / diploma

4. ducks / kill

5. build / shed

6. courses / take

7. clouds / blow away

! |

8. boil / water

9. still / get together

10. climate / unpleasant

Page 424 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 32

 f
NOTES
EXERCISE C

Complete the sentences with the words from the hox.

already no longer yet still anymore any longer

1. You’re only 15. Are you preparing to go to

college?
2. Have your friends visited New York ?
3. Ron now works at a different bank. He doesn’t work here

4. Sara changed her mind. She wants to take the

French courses.
5. Has Wendy gotten her degree?
6. We’ve made up our minds. We don’t want to talk about the subject

7. Has Richard gone fishing ?

8. Mary doesn’t have her diploma.
9. We moved. We live in San Antonio.
:
10. Roy hasn’t made up his mind about his career

EXERCISE D

Complete the sentences with the correct adjective.

1. The exercises were for the new soldiers.

tired / tiring
2. The language CDs were to us.
interested / interesting
3. Emma was about Dan’s ideas for the party.
excited / exciting
4. The plans were to the builder.
confused / confusing
5. The child could not fall asleep in the dark.
frightened / frightening

Student Text Page 425

 NOTES EXERCISE E

Complete the sentences with the words in the box.

except sea humid expects to

lasted remain whole turn down
ever slipped instead none

1. Linda wants to . here until the summer.

2. The movie more than three hours.
3. Pete on the icy road and fell.
4. Lt Dunn travel to Egypt next week.
5. Fred doesn’t have any books, so of those
books are his.
6. This hot afternoon is . because it rained this
morning.
7. Everyone is here Mary. She’s sick.
8. He doesn’t like movies. He doesn’t . go to the
movies.
9. It’s too hot outdoors. I’ll stay indoors
10. The is full of salt water.
11. Did you study the . lesson or only parts of it?
12. Rob will . the job offer. He doesn’t want it.

maiKiiiiiiifi

EXERCISE F

Complete the sentences with your own ideas. Number 1 is an

example.

1. If a good movie is on TV at 9:00 p.m. I won’t go to bed early.

2. I’ll call my family today.
3. _ if it rains this weekend.
4. _ if I’m hungry at noon.
5. I can study at the library.

v'.; -v vv ..

Page 426 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3 , Lesson 32

 NOTES
EXERCISE G

Write answers to the questions using used to .

1. What did you use to do before you got the job you have now?

2. Did you use to live in a city or the country when you were a child?

3. When you were younger, did you use to play any sports?

4. When you were a child , where did you use to go during your winter
vacations?

5. What did you use to do after school when you were young?

SK JiT ' . -
EXERCISE H
I' 'frigSt' *** * *
" i* m

Write answers to the questions using would .

1. Who would you spend the most time with when you were in school?

2. When you were younger, what would you do during the weekend?

3. Where would you spend your summer vacations when you were a
child?

4. What would you do for fun when you were younger?

Student Text Page 427

 NOTES EXERCISE I

Complete the dialogs with words from the boxes .

excited courses instead of universities

offers career accept

1. Tom: What has Dan decided to do about the job ?

Bill: He’s decided to the one in Dallas.
Tom: Why did he take it the one in
Houston?
Bill: They’ll pay him well, and he wants to take
at one of the there.
Tom: I think that’s a great idea for his
Bill: Yes, he’s about the future.

thought decided changed my mind

think it over decision choice

2. Sue: What are you going to do for your vacation next month?
Tina: I’ve to go to the mountains.

Sue: I you were going to go to the beach.

Tina: I like walking in the mountains better than swimming at the

beach. That’s why I after I began to

Sue: Are you sure of your this time?

Tina: Yes, this is the I’m happy with.

Page 428 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 32

 NOTES
EXERCISE J

Complete the dialogs with words from the boxes.

1. My brother my car last week.

a. used
b. is using
c. has been using
2. Pat two years ago.
a. graduated
b. graduates
c. has graduated

3. Joan at work every day since Monday.

a. is
b. has been
c. was

4. Mr. Mills students since 1995.

a. was teaching
b. is teaching
c. has been teaching
5. Lisa a headache since 6:00 a.m.
a. has had
b. had
c. has

6. No one at the party last night.

a. dances
b. danced
c. has been dancing
7. Sara to Canada three times since last year.
a. travels
b. traveled
c. has traveled
8. It hard when we left.
a. is raining
b. was raining
c. has been raining

Student Text S®| Page 429

 NOTES
EXERCISE K

Complete the dialogs with words from the boxes.

1. The Peterson family arrived an hour ago. We didn’t

them to arrive so early.
a. educate
b. expect
c. blow
d. belong

2. After four years, she got (a ) from high school.

a. breeze
b. humidity
c. diploma
d. instructions

3. They me a job, but I had to say no.

a. offered
b. retired
c. slipped
d. solved
4. Do you know what you want? Did you your mind ?
a. clear up
b. think over
c. turn down
d. make up
5. They haven’t called my name
a. no longer
b. instead
c. yet
d. still

Page 430 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 32

 NOTES
EXERCISE L

Match each vocabulary item with its antonym - a word with an

opposite meaning.

1. turn down a. none

2. several b. begin

3. quiet c. accept

4. be over d. nearer

5. farther e. noisy

6. dangerous f. hot
I
7. freezing g. high

8. low h. safe

9. plenty i. solution

10. problem j. not enough

EXERCISE M

Match each vocabulary item with its synonym - a word with the
same meaning.

1. heat a. teach

2. discussion b. close

3. get-together c. conversation

4. near d. temperature

5. educate e. party

Student Text Page 431

 NOTES
EXERCISE N

Read each paragraph. Then, listen to the questions your teacher

asks. Underline and number your answers.
|

Travel Talk Vacations Page 2 j

UTAH
There are many winter sports to try when you visit Blue Tree,
Utah. The most popular sport is skiing. At Blue Tree, there are
beautiful mountains with lots of snow, and most days are clear
and sunny. You’ll stay at the Ski Park Apartments, where there is
a kitchen in each apartment. There are also many restaurants to j;
choose from if you want to go out to eat.

HAWAII
Go on a trip to see one of Hawaii’s most beautiful islands. Hawaii
has terrific beaches, high mountains, and a warm pleasant
climate all year round. During the day, you can relax at the hotel
swimming pool, go sightseeing, or swim in the sea. You will stay
at the Clear Seas Hotel near the beach and eat every meal at the
-
hotel’s restaurant.

COLORADO
Take a trip to Colorado on your next vacation. Colorado is famous I
for its high mountains, the Rockies. During the day, you can walk
in the mountains, swim in cold lakes, or eat lunch under the trees.
There is so much to see and do! You will stay at the Blue River
Apartments. Each apartment has a kitchen where you can make
meals. There are also restaurants if you want to go out.

Page 432 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 32

 NOTES
EXERCISE O

Use and , or , but, or so to complete the sentences.

1. Do you have to leave today, can you wait until

tomorrow?
2. Fred’s rifle doesn’t work anymore, his pistol needs
repairs.
3. Emily no longer wants to work in Chicago, she’s
accepted a job in Dallas.
4. You can spend the weekend thinking over the problem,
you can talk it over with me.

5. Henry took several shots at the ducks, he didn’t hit

any.

6. Ann broke her CD player last week, she bought a new

one yesterday.
7. Did my sisters drink all the tea, have they left some
for us?
8. I’d like to go with you to the mountains, I don’t feel
well.
9. We like to go hunting, we enjoy fishing, too.
10. She planned a get-together for next Saturday, she had
to change the date.

EXERCISE P

Read the sentences. Find the meaning of the word in italics .

Circle the best answer a, b, or c.
1. Tina will remain here in the hospital until she is well and
can go back home.
a. Remain is work.
b. Remain is leave.
c. Remain is stay.
2. The teacher was upset because Tom slept during class and
didn’t hear the question.
a. During is before the class started.
b. During is while he was in class.
c. During is after he left the class.

Student Text Page 433

 NOTES
EXERCISE Q

Read the paragraph and select the best summary .

1. People who are driving on long trips should stop often. They
can buy gas, eat, sightsee, or just exercise a little. When they
get tired, they can pull over to the side of the road and rest.
Without regular breaks, drivers can easily become tired and
careless. Sometimes when a driver falls asleep at the wheel,
his vehicle leaves the road or crosses into the opposite lane
and causes a terrible accident.

a. People should be careful while they’re driving. They should

also eat and exercise often.
b. Drivers should stop regularly on long trips. Drivers who don’t
take breaks can become tired and cause accidents.
c. Long automobile trips can be boring. When people take breaks
to go sightseeing, their trips are more interesting.

1 2. Soccer is a sport that almost everyone who is in good

physical shape can play. In basketball, most of the players
are tall. In football, many of the players are big and very
strong. Soccer is different. A player who is fast can do well in
soccer. He doesn’t need to be tall, heavy, or strong.

a. Football and basketball games are different from soccer games .

b. Basketball players have to be tall, or they won’t do well in the
sport.
c. To be a good soccer player, speed is more important than size.

Page 434 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3, Lesson 32

APPENDIX A: Objective Vocabulary

A B
a little white lie 5 baby 14
about 16 bachelor’s degree 26
above 11 back 18
accept 27 backache 18
accident 3 badly 6
account 1 baggage 7
ache ( n) 18 bath 7
ache (v ) 18 bathe 7
across 3 bathtub 7
across (from ) 11 be able to 15
add (on ) 28 be over 24
addition 28 be supposed to 10
adult 11 beach 24
advice 5 because 2
afraid ( of ) 12 become / became / become 19
after 10 become / became / become 20
after 23 before 10
ahead 19 before 23
ahead of. 19 behind 11
air 13 behind 4
alarm clock 7 belong ( to) 24
alike 4 below 11
all over 31 bicycle 3
almost 7 bike 3
almost 22 bill 1
alone 12 bill 7
already 17 bitter 2
annual 17 blanket 7
another 9 blow / blew / blown 24
any longer 17 boil 28
any longer 27 boring 22
anybody 21 borrow 5
anymore 27 boss 15
anymore 17 bother 3
anyone 5 brake 20
apologize (for/to) 8 break / broke / broken 3
appointment 17 buckle up 4
article 15 bug 21
as a matter of fact, 22 build / built / built 28
associate degree 26 builder 28
at 11 burn 28
at 23 business 15
at fault 3 businessman 15
aunt 14 businesswoman 15
auto 3 busy 23
automobile 3 by 11
bystander 4

Appendices Page A - l
 c
: cafeteria 11 confused 27
calm 24 confusing 27
can 14 connect 17
candy bar 9 correctly 6
card 1 cough ( n) 18
cards 22 cough (v ) 18
care about 5 could 14
career 27 could 22
careful 3 could 28
carefully 6 could use 25
careless 3 country 31
carelessly 6 course 26
cash 1 cousin 14
cashier 15 cover (n ) 13
cassette 29 cover (v ) 13
catch / caught / caught 18 cream 9
catch / caught /caught 30 credit 20
cause ( n ) 3 cross 3
cause (v ) 3 crossing 19
caution 19 curve 3
cautious 19
§ cautiously 19 D
certainly 14 dangerous 24
change one’s mind 27 dark 4
channel 22 decide ( to) 12
charge ( n ) 20 decision 27
charge (v ) 20 deep 24
checkbook 1 deer / deer 31
checking account 1 degree 26
checkup 17 den 28
chest 18 dent 3
chewing gum / gum 9 dentist 15
chip 9 department store 11
choice 26 deposit ( n ) 1
clear 24 deposit (v ) 1
clear up 24 detergent 9
climate 24 diet drink 9
close / open an account 1 different from 4
closet 7 dining room 28
clothing store 11 diploma 26
coin return / release 9 discount store 11
cold 18 discuss 27
collect 14 discussion 27
collection 14 dish 23
college 26 dispense 9
come / came / come in 17 dissatisfied 21
commercial 22 do ... a favor 14
common 13 dot 17
CD (compact disk) 29 down 11
company 15 downstairs 11
complete 1 driver 15
confuse 19 drop 9

Page A - 2 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3

 duck 31 fill ( up) 7
dull 22 fill out 1
during 24 finally 10
find / found / found out 9
E fine 4
earache 18 fire 28
easily 6 fireplace 28
educate 26 fish (v ) 30
education 26 fish / fish 30
educator 27 fishing rod 30
elementary school 26 fix 5
elevator 11 flat 13
emergency 17 flash 19
empty 7 floor (level / story) 11
end 7 fly 21
engine 20 folks 14
enjoy 5 follow 19
enlarge 28 for 9
enough 13 for 23
entertain 22 forgive / forgave / forgiven 8
entertaining 22 form 1
entertainment 22 freezing 24
escalator 11 frequently 22
ever 25 friendship 5
everybody 12 frighten 22
everyone 12 frightened 24
everywhere 9 frightening 22
exact 10 from 16
exactly 10 full 7
exam 17 funny 22
examination 17 further 31
except 24 future 27
exchange 21
excited 5 G
expect (to) 24 garage 5

—
extra 13 gas / gasoline 7
gas station 7
F gauge 7
face 3 get / got / got back 9
fail ( to ) 19 get /got married *
I

famous 15 get / got / gotten 1

far 16 get / got / gotten bO

farther 30 get / got / gotten together tO
fast 5 get-together bO
fasten 4 give / gave / given back ... tO
fault 3 go out '
favorite 9 go shopping
feel / felt / felt
feel / felt / felt
feelings
fever
field

Appendices
2
22
5
18
26
go / went / gone + v-ing ...
grade
grandfather
grandmother
grandparent
. . . ..
. . . .
H MtO
Page A - 3
 grease ( n ) 20 in 17
grease (v ) 20 in 23
greasy 20 in a hurry 13
great 22 in advance 19
guarantee ( n) 20 in back of. 11
guarantee (v) 20 in back of. 4
guess 5 in fact,
gum /chewing gum 9 in front of ,
gun 31 in front of ,

in my opinion
H in the open
hand out 14 inch
hang / hung / hung (up) 7 indoors
hanger 7 inflate
happen 3 information
hard 7 insert
hard 30 instead of
Have you met ...? 12 instructions
headache 18 instructor
heat (n) 24 insurance
heat ( n) 28 intend (to)
heat (v ) 28 interested in
heavy traffic 3 intersection
hide / hid / hidden 1 introduce
high 30 introduction
high school 26 it (impersonal)
hope 7 It takes ... to
horizontal 17 It’s a pleasure to meet you.
hose 21
how 6 J
how 16 jack 13
How about ...? 17 jack up 13
How do you do? 12 just 27
How far? 16
How long ...? 16 K
hub cap 13 keep / kept / kept (on) 3
humid 24 key 13
humidity 24 kill 31
hunt 31 knob 9
hurry (up) 13
hurt /hurt / hurt 5 L
hurt (someone’s) feelings 5 ladies’ room 7
lady 7
I lane 19
I’d like you to meet 12 last 9
idea 29 last (v) 24
if 25 lastly 10
if you ask me 23 laugh (at) 22
immediately 1 laundry 7
impolite 22 law 4
impolitely 23 leak ( n) 21
in 11 leak (v ) 21

Page A -4 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3

leaky 21 more 30
leave / left / left 28 motel 7
left 3 motor 20
lemon 2
lend / lent / lent 5 N
Let me introduce ... to 12 near 28
let / let / let 12 neighbor 12
lever 9 nephew 14
lie ( n ) 5 nervous 19
lie (v ) 5 news 15
light ( n ) 3 newspaper 15
light ( adj) 3 next to 11
like 4 niece 14
like 24 no 9
line 30 no longer 24
long 16 no one 21
look 2 nobody 21
loose 13 noise 20
loosen 13 noisy 20
lose / lost / lost 1 none 24
lost 19 not care for 5
loud 23 nurse 18
loudly 23 nut 9
love ( n ) 22
love (v ) 22 O
low 30 obey 4
lower 13 occasionally 24
lug nut 13 occupation 15
of course 14
M offer 26
machine 9 offer ( to) 27
magazine 15 oil ( n ) 20
make / made / made (it ) 17 oil (v ) 20
make / made up one’s mind 27 oily 20
mall 11 on 11
marriage 14 on 23
married 14 on sale 21
marry 14 once 31
master’s degree 26 one-way 19
maybe 5 opening CD
mean / meant / meant 19 operate . CD
mean / meant / meant ( to) 8 out 17
medical 26 out of 9
meeting 29 out of order 9
men’s room 7 outdoor ( adj) 31
microwave ( oven ) 29 outdoors ( n ) 31
middle 17 outdoors ( adv ) 30
middle school 26 own (v ) 15
miles an hour 19 own (adj) 30
miles per hour ( m .p.h.) 19
mind (v ) 14
mind ( n ) 19

Appendices Page A -5
p
pain 18 really 7
parallel 17 reasonable 23
parent 14 reasonably 22
park 5 receive .. 12
parking lot 11 recommend 23
part 20 record 29
party 5 refund ( n ) 21
pass 19 refund ( v ) 21
pass (out ) 14 refusal 27
passport 1 refuse ( to) 27
patient 17 regular 17
patio 28 relative 14
pedestrian 19 relaxed 19
perhaps 28 remain 24
perpendicular 17 remove 13
Ph.D 26 repair 5
physical 17 replace 13
pillow 7 restroom 7
pistol 31 retire 27
place 3 ride / rode /ridden 3
plan 28 rider 3
plan (n ) 22 rifle 31
plan ( to) 22 right 3
play 29 right away 1
player 29 right here 1
pleasant 16 right-of-way
pleased 7 room
plenty (of ) 31 room
pole 3 roommate
police / police officer 3 rude
polite / politely 12 rudely
popular 9 rule
practice 31 run / ran / run
prepare 30 run /ran / run
problem 17 run / ran / run a temperature
profession 26 run / ran / run out of
professional 26 runny
program 22
prompt 23 S
promptly 23 safe
pull over 19 safely
sales slip
Q salesperson
quick 13 salesman
quickly 13 saleswoman
quiet 24 salty 2
satisfaction ( n ) 21
R satisfied (adj) 21
railroad crossing 19 satisfy (v ) 21
raise 13 save 1
ready 7 savings account 1
realize 7 sea 24

-
Page A 6 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3
seat belt 4 speed 19
secret 5 speed / sped / sped ( up) 19
secretary 15 speed limit 19
see / saw / seen (a doctor ) 17 spend / spent / spent 1
selection 9 spend / spent / spent 22
serve 23 spill 8
service 20 stairs 11
several 30 stall 20
shake / shook / shaken 12 stay 24
sharp 23 steering wheel 19
shed 28 step (on ) 8
sheet 7 stereo
shoot / shot / shot 31 stick / stuck / stuck (in )
shop ( n ) 11 still
shop (v ) 11 still
shopping center 11 stomach
shot 31 stomachache
should 5 stop
sidewalk 19 stop sign
signature 1 story
similar to 4 story
since 17 stuck
since 22 suburb
single 14 supermarket
sign 19 supper
signal ( n ) 19 sweet
signal ( v ) 19 symptom
slip ( n ) 1
slip (v ) 24
slippery 24 take / took / taken
slow 30 take / took / taken
slow down 19 take / took / taken out ( of )
slowly 6 take / took / taken (distance / time )
smell 2 take / took / taken a bath
snack 9 take / took / taken place
sneezing ( n ) 18 talk over
so 26 tank
so 7 taste
soda / soda pop 9 teach / taught / taught
soft 7 technical
soft drink 9 tell a lie, a secret , a story
solution 28 tell the time, the truth
solve 28 temperature
somebody 21 terrible
someone 5 terribly
sometime 17 that
soon 1 the back (of )
sorry 8 the front (of )
sound 2 the same as
sour 2 then
spare 13 then
speaker 29 think / thought / thought over
Appendices -
Page A 7
 thought 24 while 10
ticket 4 who 21
tight 13 whole 31
tighten 13 will 14
time 9 wind 24
tire 13 withdraw / withdrew / withdrawn 1
tiring 29 withdrawal 1
too 20 witness 4
tool 5 wonderful 22
tour 27 wood 28
temporary duty ( TDY) 27 work (v ) 9
traffic 3 work ( n ) 15
traffic jam 3 work on 15
tray 9 worried ( about ) 8
trouble 29 worried 8
trunk 13 would 14
truth 5 would 31
tune ( up) 20 wrench 13
tune-up 20 write / wrote / written down 12
turn 19 writer 15
turn down 27
twice 31
two-way 19 X
type 15
Y
U yet 27
uncle 14 yield 19
under 11
unhappy 21 Z
university 26
unpleasant 24
until 10
up 11
upstairs 11
used to 31

V
variety 11
vending machine 9
vertical 17

W
walk 31
wallet 1
warm ( up ) 20
washing machine 9
way 19
weapon 31
What (kind of work ) do you do? 15
wheel 13
when 10
which 21

Page A 8- Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3

 APPENDIX B: Structure List
Lesson Structure Word or Sentence Pattern

1 Future indicated by present Steve is eating lunch at home tomorrow.

progressive

2 Adverbial clause with because Sam is tired because he stayed up late last
night .

Linking verbs ( BE , feel, look , sound , The coffee smells good.

smell , taste ) The bread tastes delicious.

3 Past progressive Betty was studying in the library last

night.

4 Indirect imperative Ask Tom to come to my office before lunch.

Reported direct / indirect requests Ken told Dan to turn off the light.

Comparing and contrasting Our jackets are similar.

6 Using should to ask for and give You should tell Major Simms that you are
advice leaving early.

Using could to make suggestions You could ask Frank to turn off the TV.

Expressing manner with adjective Rose studied carefully for the test and then
+ suffix- Zy passed it easily.

Using HOW in questions about How does Don drive? He drives very
manner carelessly.

7 Verb + THAT noun clause Sara didn’t know that the test was today.

8 Predicate adjective + that adverbial Jimmy is happy that you can stay another
clause week.

Apologize for + gerund Bob apologized for being late.

9 How to ( manner / method ) SSgt Brown knew how to fix the car.

10 Adverbial clauses of time with the Barbara listens to music while she 1
conjunctions after, before, until , exercises.
when, while

BE + supposed to Dinner is at eight. You’re supposed to be

there at eight.

Appendices PageB 1 -
Lesson Structure Word or Sentence Pattern

11 Prepositions of location (above, That store is in the mall.

across ( from), at, behind , below, by,
in, in back t in front of, near, next
(to ), on, under )

Gerunds as objects of a verb (begin, Col Matthews likes shopping in the

enjoy, finish, like, mind , start ) supermarket.

12 Predicate adjective + to-infinitive She’s not upset to hear the news.

13 Simple present as future tense The bus arrives tomorrow.

14 Could / can , would / will as Would you . . . ? Yes, I will, or Sorry, I can’t.
requests and responses

Indirect speech to report commands What did the teacher say?

( say and ask ) She said to report to her office.

15 Expressing ability with BE + able Charles can / is able to take a vacation this
to year.

16 Impersonal IT Is it cold outside? It’s 35°F.

Questions about distance and How far is it to Dallas? It takes about four
travel time using How far . . . ? hours to get there.

Questions about duration using

How long . . . ?

17 Present perfect ( BE / HAVE with Maria has had a fever since Monday.
since / for) Rex has been sick for a week.

18 Present perfect progressive Have you been studying English today?

Yes, I’ve been studying all day.

19 Verb + to-infinitive of purpose I failed to learn the rules of the road.

20 Adjectives: noun + suffix -y They drove on the snowy streets and icy
roads.

Too + adjective + for / to to express I can’t eat this soup. It’s too hot.
excessiveness

Linking verbs ( Become / Get ) Mary got lost on her way to the airport.

-
Page B 2 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3
Lesson Structure Word or Sentence Pattern

21 Indefinite pronouns Did anyone go to the game?

No, everyone watched it on TV.

Restrictive adjective clauses with I’m the one who broke the lamp. He’s the
who, that, which person who fixed it.

22 Could ( past ability) We could see Bob, but he couldn’t see us.

23 Reported speech using told Tom told me that he liked the food at
Charlie’s Cafe.

Prepositions of time (at, on, in, I go to school from 8 to 3 o’clock every day.
before, after, from, until , till, to, for,
since)
24 The present perfect ( participles of The soldiers have stood at attention for an
all regular and irregular verbs) hour.

25 //‘-clauses: True in the present or If the weather is nice, I’ll go to the beach.
future

26 Coordinating conjunctions so and Mrs. Frank’s car was in the garage, so she
or took the bus to work.
We can walk to school, or we can ride the
bus.

27 Adverbs of time Mr. Flores no longer works here. He retired

last week.

The present perfect for indefinite No, I haven’t seen Sara yet?
past

28 Using could for possibility The questions could be too difficult for
Simon.

Reported speech using say Carol said that the plane left New Orleans
at 0600.
29 Using adjectives with - ing and -ed I am excited about the party.
The party was exciting.

Appendices Page B- 3
Lesson Structure Word or Sentence Pattern

30 Comparative of adverbs with -er Martin can throw the ball farther than
Roger.

Present perfect review Have you gone to Bluebird Lake this year?
Yes, it’s a nice place to go fishing.

31 Past routine; discontinued habit John used to hunt deer with his brothers.
using used to Now he goes hunting with his friends.

Past routine using would When would you go hunting in the country?
We’d go hunting in the country every fall.

32 Review Lesson

-
Page B 4 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3
 APPENDIX C: Principal Parts of Certain Irregular Verbs
Present Past Past Participle Present Past Past Participle
arise arose arisen fall fell fallen
awake awoke awakened feed fed fed
feel felt felt
be was been
fight fought fought
bear bore borne
find found found
beat beat beaten
flee fled fled
become became become
fly flew flown
begin began begun
forget forgot forgotten
bend bent bent
bet bet bet forgive forgave forgiven
bid bid bid freeze froze frozen
bind bound bound
get got gotten (got )
bite bit bitten
give gave given
bleed bled bled
grind ground ground
blow blew blown
grow grew grown
break broke broken
bring brought brought hang hung hung
build built built have had had
burst burst burst hear heard heard
buy bought bought hide hid hidden
hit hit hit
cast cast cast hold held held
catch caught caught
hurt hurt hurt
choose chose chosen
come came come keep kept kept
cost cost cost know knew known
creep crept crept
lay laid laid
cut cut cut
lead led led
deal dealt dealt leave left left
dig dug dug lend lent lent
do did done let let let
draw drew drawn lie lay lain
drink drank drunk light lit lit (lighted )
drive drove driven lose lost lost

eat ate eaten

Appendices Page C- l
Present Past Past Participle Present Past Past Participle
make made made stand stood stood
mean meant meant steal stole stolen
meet met met stick stuck stuck
pay paid paid sting stung stung
put put put strike struck struck
string strung strung
quit quit quit
swear swore sworn
read read read sweep swept swept
ride rode ridden swim swam swum
ring rang rung swing swung swung
rise rose risen
take took taken
run ran run
teach taught taught
say said said
tear tore torn
see saw seen
tell told told
seek sought sought
think thought thought
shake shook shaken
throw threw thrown
sell sold sold
send sent sent understand understood understood
set set set
wake woke woke (waked )
shed shed shed
( waked )
shine shone shone
wear wore worn
shoot shot shot
weave wove woven
show showed shown
weep wept wept
shrink shrank shrunk
wet wet wet
shut shut shut
win won won
sing sang sung
wind wound wound
sink sank sunk
wring wrung wrung
sit sat sat
write wrote written
sleep slept slept
slide slid slid
speak spoke spoken
spend spent spent
spin spun spun
split split split
spread spread spread
spring sprang sprung

Page C-2 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3

 APPENDIX D: List of Contractions

aren’t - (are not ) we’d - (we would / we had )

can’t - (cannot ) we’ll (we will / we shall )

couldn’t - (could not ) we’re - (we are )

didn’t - (did not ) we’ve (we have)

doesn’t - ( does not) what's (what is)

don’t - ( do not ) where s '

(where is)

hasn’t - (has not ) who's (who is / who has)

haven’t - (have not) won’ t - (will not)

he’d - (he would / he had ) wouldn’t - (would not )
he’ll - (he will) you’d - ( you would / you had )

he’s - (he is / he has) you’ll - (you will)

how’s - (how is) you’re - (you are)

I’d - (I would / 1 had ) you’ve - (you have)

I’ll - ( I will / 1 shall)

I’m - ( I am)

I’ve - ( I have )

isn’t - (is not)

it’s - (it is / it has)

let’s - (let us)

mustn’t - ( must not )
she’d - (she would / she had )

she’ll - (she will / she shall)

she’s - (she is / she has)

shouldn’t - ( should not)

that’s - ( that is)

they’d - ( they would / they had)

they’ll - ( they will / they shall)

they’re - ( they are )

they’ve - ( they have )

Appendices Page D - l
 -User Notes-

Page D- 2 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3

 APPENDIX E: Verb Forms (examples of standard conjugations)

TO BE ( be: simple form )

Present Tense Present Perfect Tense
I am we are I have been we have been
you are you are you have been you have been
he, she, it is they are he has been they have been

Past Tense Past Perfect Tense

I was we were I had been we had been
you were you were you had been you had been
he was they were he had been they had been

Future Tense* Future Perfect Tense *

I will be we will be I will have been we will have been
you will be you will be you will have been you will have been
he will be they will be he will have been they will have been

TO WALK (walk: simple form )

Present Tense Present Perfect Tense
I walk we walk I have walked we have walked
you walk you walk you have walked you have walked
he, she, it walks they walk he has walked they have walked

Past Tense Past Perfect Tense

I walked we walked I had walked we had walked
you walked you walked you had walked you had walked
he walked they walked he had walked they had walked

Future Tense * Future Perfect Tense *

I will walk we will walk I will have walked we will have walked
you will walk you will walk you will have walked you will have walked
he will walk they will walk he will have walked they will have walked

*Shall may be used , but it’s less common.

Appendices . s ill i; . i Page E - 1

 TO WALK (walk : progressive form )

Present Tense
I am walking we are walking
you are walking you are walking
he, she, it is walking they are walking

Past Tense
I was walking we were walking
we were walking you were walking
he was walking they were walking

Future Tense *
I will be walking we will be walking
you will be walking you will be walking
he will be walking they will be walking

Present Prefect Tense

I have been walking we have been walking
you have been walking you have been walking
he has been walking they have been walking

Past Perfect Tense

I had been walking we had been walking
you had been walking you had been walking
he had been walking they had been walking

Future Perfect Tense*

I will have been walking we will have been walking
you will have been walking you will have been walking
he will have been walking they will have been walking

*Shall may be used, but it’s less common .

Page E - 2 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3

 TO SEE (see: passive voice )

Present Tense
I am seen we are seen
you are seen you are seen
he, she, it is seen they are seen

Past Tense
I was seen we were seen
you were seen you were seen
he was seen they were seen

Future Tense*
I will be seen we will be seen
you will be seen you will be seen
he will be seen they will be seen

Present Perfect Tense

I have been seen we have been seen
you have been seen you have been seen
he has been seen they have been seen

Past Perfect Tense

I had been seen we had been seen
you had been seen you had been seen
he had been seen they had been seen

Future Perfect Tense*

I will have been seen we will have been seen
you will have been seen you will have been seen
he will have been seen they will have been seen

*Shall may be used , but it’s less common .

Appendices Page E -3
 -User Notes-

Page E -4 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3

 ARMY AIR FORCE MARINE CORPS NAVY & COAST GUARD

Apendics 0-10
0-9
0-8
General
Lieutenant General
Major General
(GEN)
( LTG)
(MG)
General
Lieutenant General
Major General
COMMISSIONED OFFICERS
(Gen )
(Lt Gen )
(Maj Gen)
General
Lieutenant General
Major General
(Gen )
( LtGen )
(MajGen )
Admiral
Vice Admiral
Rear Admiral
(ADM)
(VADM)
(RADM)
APENDIX
F
:
0-7 Brigadier General (BG) Brigadier General (Brig Gen ) Brigadier General (BGen ) Rear Admiral (RADML)

0-6 Colonel (COL) Colonel (Col) Colonel ( Col) Captain (CAPT)

0-5
0-4
0-3
Lieutenant Colonel
Major
Captain
(LTC )
(MAJ )
(CPT)
Lieutenant Colonel
Major
Captain
(Lt Col)
(Maj)
(Capt)
Lieutenant Colonel
Major
Captain
(LtCol)
(Maj)
(Capt)
Commander
Lieutenant Commander
Lieutenant
(CDR )
(LCDR)
( LT) Armed
Forces
0-2 First Lieutenant (1LT) First Lieutenant (1st Lt ) First Lieutenant ( IstLt) Lieutenant Junior Grade ( LTJG )

0-1 Second Lieutenant (2LT) Second Lieutenant (2d Lt ) Second Lieutenant ( 2ndLt) Ensign (ENS)

WARRANT OFFICERS
W-5

Ranks
Chief Warrant Officer (CW5) Chief Warrant Officer (CW05)

W-4 Chief Warrant Officer ( CW4) Chief Warrant Officer (CW04) Chief Warrant Officer (CW04)

W-3 Chief Warrant Officer ( CW3) Chief Warrant Officer ( CW03) Chief Warrant Officer ( CW03)

W-2
W-l
Chief Warrant Officer
Warrant Office 1
( CW2)
(W01)
Chief Warrant Officer
Warrant Officer 1
( CW02)
(CW01)
Chief Warrant Officer
Chief Warrant Officer 1
(CW02)
(CWOl) and
Abrevial
ENLISTED PERSONNEL
E-9 Command Sergeant Major (CSM) Chief Master Sergeant (CMSgt ) Sergeant Major (SgtMaj) Master Chief Petty Officer (MCPO)

E-9 Sergeant Major (SGM) Master Gunnery Sergeant MGySgt )

E-8 First Sergeant (1SG) Senior Master Sergeant (SMSgt) First Sergeant ( IstSgt) Senior Chief Petty Officer (SCPO)

E-8 Master Sergeant (MSG) Master Sergeant (MSgt)

E -7 Sergeant First Class (SFC ) Master Sergeant (MSgt ) Gunnery Sergeant ( GySgt ) Chief Petty Officer (CPO)

E-6 Staff Sergeant (SSG) Technical Sergeant (TSgt ) Staff Sergeant (SSgt ) Petty Officer First Class (P01)

E-5 Sergeant (SGT) Staff Sergeant (SSgt) Sergeant (Sgt) Petty Officer Second Class (P02)

E-4 Corporal (CPL) Corporal (Cpl) Petty Officer Third Class (P03)

E-4 Specialist (SPC ) Senior Airman (SrA)

E-3 Private First Class (PFC) Airman First Class ( A1C ) Lance Corporal (LCpl) Seaman (SN)

E-2 Private (PV2) Airman (Amn) Private First Class (PFC) Seaman Apprentice (SA)

E-l Private (PV1) Airman Basic (AB) Private (Pvt ) Seaman Recruit (SR)
 -User Notes-

Page F-2 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3

 APPENDIX G: Punctuation and Capitalization

PUNCTUATION

A . Period ( . )
1. Use a period at the end of a statement or command.
The pen and paper are on the table.
Go to the chalkboard and write your name.
2. Use a period after an abbreviation or an initial.
NOTE: Abbreviated military ranks do not require a period.
Feb. Mr. brown a.m.
Dr. Smith Ms. little p.m.
J. Jones Mrs. White Maj Johnson

B . Question Mark (?)

Use a question mark after a question. Sometimes the question may be written a
statement .
How many children are in your family ?
He’ s here today ?

C. Exclamation Mark (!)

Use an exclamation mark after words, sentences, or expressions that show excitement,
surprise, or emotion . Any exclamation, even if not in a sentence, will end with an
exclamation mark.
What a game!
Look out!
Do it!
Wow! Oh!

D. Quotation Marks ( “ ” )
1. Use quotation marks to show the words of a speaker. They’re always placed above the
line and are used in pairs.
John said ,“ The commissary closes at 2100 hours today.”
“ Where are the children?” she asked .
2. If the words of a speaker are divided into two parts, use quotation marks around both
parts.
“ Do you,” she asked ,“ go to the library after class?”

Appendices PageG 1-
 3. Use quotation marks around the titles of chapters, articles, parts of books and
magazines, short poems, short stories, and songs.
Last night I read the chapter “ Grammar Is Easy” in our book . Then, I read the article
“ Learning English” in the newspaper.

E. Apostrophe
1. Use an apostrophe in contractions.
I’ m she’ s they’ re
isn’ t aren’t can’ t
what’ s where’ s Bob’ s
o’clock (of the clock )

2. Use an apostrophe to indicate possession.

a. If the noun is singular, add -’s.
Bill’ s book
the girl’ s coat
b. When the noun is plural, add -’s if the noun does not end in s.
the children’ s clothes
the men’ s shirts
c. If the plural noun ends in s, add only an apostrophe.
the boys’ shoes
the libraries’ book

F. Comma
1. Use commas to separate items in a series.
We ate sandwiches, potato chips, and fruit for lunch.
She looked behind the bed , under the chairs, and in the kitchen for her notebook .
2. Use a comma before the conjunctions and , but , or, nor, for, yet when they join
independent clauses.
We lived in Venezuela for ten years, and then we returned to the United States.
Frank can speak Chinese well , but he can’ t read it.
3. Use a comma after an introductory clause or phrase to separate it from the rest of the
sentence.
After we study this book , we want to take a break .
Because John was sick , he didn’ t take the test.
Looking up at the sky, the small boy suddenly ran home.

Page G - 2 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3

 4. Use a comma after words such as yes, no, well when they begin a sentence.
Do you want to go to the library ? Yes, I do.
I didn’ t pass the test. Well , study more.
5 . Use commas to separate the words of a speaker from the rest of the sentence.
“ Listen to me,” she said .
Jack asked , “ Where’s my lunch?”
“ I don’t know,” said John, “ the answer to the question.”
6. Use a comma in dates and addresses.
June 9, 1970
143 Main Street, Los Angeles, California
7. Use a comma in figures to separate thousands.
5.000
10.000
6 ,550,000

CAPITALIZATION
1. Capitalize the first word of a sentence.
The boy stood up and walked outside.
Your book is behind the chair.
2. Capitalize the names of people, cities, states, countries, and languages.
Mark Bill Mary Linda
San Antonio Chicago Houston London
Texas California Florida New York
Spain United States Canada Venezuela
Arabic Chinese Russian English

3. Capitalize the names of schools, streets, buildings, bridges, companies, and

organizations.
Defense Language Institute University of Chicago
Main Street Empire State Building
Golden Gate Bridge Ford Motor Company
General Motors National Football League

Appendices -
Page G 3
 4 . Capitalize the days of the week, months of the year, and holidays .
Sunday Monday Tuesday
June July August
Christmas Easter Thanksgiving

5 . Capitalize titles and military ranks before names .

Gen Roberts Capt Smith SSgt Jones

Professor Land President Lincoln

6 . Capitalize the pronoun “ I.”

Bill and I will meet you in the park .
He and I are the teachers for this class.
7 . Capitalize the first word of every direct quotation.
She asked , “ Can I sit here ?”
“ We saw her,” said John, “ at the university.”

Page G -4 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3

 APPENDIX H: Resource Materials

The following masters may be copied for use as a photocopy or with an overhead projector:

NI3L4 Reading Menu H-3

NI3L10 Function Requesting and giving instructions chart H-5
NI3L14 Function Making and responding to polite requests chart H-7
NI3L14 Reading Scanning for information H-9
NI3L16 Reading Scanning for information H-ll
NI3L17 Function Making a medical appointment H-13
NI3L17 Function Making a medical appointment H-15
NI3L19 Listening Following directions chart H-17
NI3L21 Function Expressing dissatisfaction H-19
NI3L25 Speaking Giving an oral summary H-21
NI3L28 Vocabulary We could add on a room H-23
NI3L28 Function Elicit and express possibility H-25
NI3L28 Grammar Reported speech cards H-27

Appendices Page H - 1
 -User Notes-

Page H-2 Nonlntensive ALC, Volume 3

 NI3L4 Reading

r \
f®|Good Morning
Won’t you have breakfast with us?
Breakfast Menu
Eggs Pancakes
1 Egg with bacon $2.00 3 Pancakes $1.25
2 Eggs with bacon $2.50 3 Pancakes with egg $2.50
1 Egg with ham $2.95 3 Pancakes with ham $3.00
2 Eggs with ham $3.25
DRINKS
Orange Juice $1.00
Milk $1.75
Tea $0.75
V J

Appendices Page H - 3
 -User Notes-

Page H-4 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3

 NI3L10 Function

How to ask for How to ask for How to check for

help. repetition: comprehension:

1- How do you 1- Say again?* 11- Do you want me to

operate this ( military say that again?
machine? expression)

2. Can you show me 2- Can you explain 2. Do you want me to

how this machine that again? repeat that?
works?

3. Can you teach me 3. Can you repeat | 3. Would you like me

how to use this that? to say that again?
machine?

4 - Do you know how 4. Please, would you 4. Should I repeat

to operate this say that again? that?
machine?

Appendices -
Page H 5
 -User Notes-

Page H -6 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3

 NI3L14 Function

How to make a polite How to say yes to a How to say no to a

request: polite request: polite request:

1. Would you help me, 1. Of course. I’d be 1. I’m sorry, I can’t

please? happy to. at the moment.
2. Could you please 2. Certainly. How can 2. I’d like to, but I
help me? I help? can’t right now.

3. Will you help me, 3. Sure. I’ll be glad to. 3. No, I’m sorry.
please? I ... .

4. Can you do me a 4. Yes, I can. 4. Sorry, I can’t.

favor? I ... .
5. Do you mind help¬ 5. No problem. 5. Sorry, no. I ... .
ing me?

Appendices Page H- 7
 -User Notes-

Page H- 8 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3

 NI3L14 Reading

The Tire Shop

L
|
| 2142 Andrews Street

^
6 Telephone: 555-4125
.
e-mail: T&W@miIitary store

t.
t*

f * 1

.;
---v
X

rv 4 NEW

Bl
Tires <tr
for cars and -
3i
m
car tires

trucks
m
r.
m
Wmm
i
only
$160!

fell

We’ll
your
We give you

<yoT you
Waitj
the best prices in
$ tow" $
for your old tires!

Appendices Page H- 9
 -User Notes-

Page H - 10 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3

 NI3L16 Reading

Sunday WEATHER May 9

* New York
City
Chidag
i Washington,
D.C.

Los Angeles 1
Atlanta
Dallasw

San Antonio Houston 0

TEMPERATURES ACROSS THE COUNTRY

City Hi Lo City Hi Lo
Atlanta 89 61 Los Angeles 82 60
Chicago 72 47 New York 59 52

Dallas 81 67 San Antonio 85 70

Houston 83 68 Washington, D.C. 67 58

AIRPORTS ATLANTA DALLAS LOS ANGELES SAN ANTONIO

Clouds Rain Sun Sun

*
CHICAGO HOUSTON NEW YORK WASHINGTON, D.C.
Winds Clouds Storms Showers

Appendices Page H- ll
 -User Notes-

Page H - 12 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3

 NI3L17 Function 1

• Patient • Receptionist
You want to make an appoint ¬ You want to know:
ment because you are sick with • the problem
sneezing and a cough. You are a •is the caller a new patient?
new patient. • name and phone number
Answer the questions. Check the doctor’s schedule.
Look at your schedule to find a Find a day and time for an ap ¬

good time for an appointment. pointment.

• Patient • Receptionist
You want to make an appoint ¬ You want to know:
ment for a checkup. You saw the • the problem
doctor three weeks ago. • the date of the last visit
Answer the questions. • name and phone number
Look at your schedule to find a Check the doctor’s schedule.
good time for an appointment. Find a day and time for an ap¬
pointment.

• Patient • Receptionist
You want to make an appoint ¬ You want to know:
ment for an annual physical. • the problem
Answer the questions. •is the caller a new patient?
Look at your schedule to find a •name and phone number
good time for an appointment. Check the doctor’s schedule.
Find a day and time for a long
appointment.

• Patient • Receptionist
You want to make an appoint ¬ You want to know:
ment for your daughter / son for • the problem
a physical before she / he starts •is the caller a new patient?
soccer. You prefer to go in on • name and phone number
Monday. Check the doctor’s schedule.
Answer the questions. Find a day and time for a long
Look at your schedule to find a appointment.
good time for an appointment.

Appendices Page H -13

 -User Notes-

Page H- 14 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3

 NI3L17 Function 2

PATIENT’S SCHEDULE
MONDAY TUESDAY WEDNESDAY THURSDAY FRIDAY

9:00
drive to visit Mr.
Austin Evans
visit Mr.
10:00
Jones
11 :00 Lunch

Lunch with
12:00 Lunch
Ms. Ross
Lunch with
1 :00 Lunch
Mr. Jones
visit Ms.
2:00
Mitchell
buy new telephone telephone
3:00
computer Houston Chicago

4:00

DOCTOR’S SCHEDULE
MONDAY TUESDAY WEDNESDAY THURSDAY FRIDAY
University University
9 :00 Mr. Smith
clinic clinic
10:00 l Mr. Williams

11 :00 Lunch Lunch Ms. Harris Mr. Allen

Meet
12:00 Lunch Ms. Allen Lunch Lunch
Dr. Miller
1 :00
Downtown
hospital l Mr. Bi’own
Meeting in
Dallas
2:00

3:00 Ms. Wilson Ms. Scott

4:00 Ms. Adams

Appendices Page H 15-

 -User Notes-

Page H-16 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3

 NI3L19 Listening

A B C

1.

2.

3.

mm
Appendices Page H - 17
IliSi »1111
 -User Notes-

Page H -18 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3

 NI3L21 Function

Location Vocabulary

Doctor’s Office bug hose stall

1
|
I Airport sales slip problem sneeze
|
i

|
i Garage emergency service temperature

Restaurant dissatisfied parallel refund

Grocery Store noise exchange chest

!
i
1
i Department Store fever examination leak

|
Hotel headache unhappy guarantee

Appendices Page H - 19
 -User Notes-

Page H - 20 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3

 NI3L25 Speaking

Paragraphs and oral questions for additional practice in giving an oral summary.

A.

I
. Many people believe that the English language began in England. But it didn’t begin
there. It may have come from people who lived in a country that is now Germany. When
1 those people went to England, they took their language with them. That language, which
I is called Old English or Anglo-Saxon and sounds more like German, was the beginning of
| the English we speak today.

I _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ J
B.

What did people write on before we had paper? Well, most people wrote their ideas,
important activities, and everything else on things like walls, bones, wood , animal skins,
or clay tablets. Four thousand years ago, Egyptians used the papyrus plant to make
a kind of paper. In 105 AD, Cai Lun of China invented the paper we use today. Now
everyone has paper that’s easy to write on.

C.
f
| Car seats keep babies very safe when they are in the car. They hold the baby very
I well. The baby cannot move or fall out of the seat. If there is an accident, the seat will
protect the baby. The car seat is usually put in the back seat because the front seat is
more dangerous. For this reason, it is a law in most states in the US to have a car seat for
I babies.

Appendices Page H - 21
 -User Notes-

Page H- 22
 NI3L28 Vocabulary

PATIO
-
J L D-r
—
uC

DINING

ROOM
_
J
o o
oo
MASTER

BEDROOM

KITCHEN

1 I
0
LIVING ROOM
on 0
rp
P

OFFICE
fc
BEDROOM .„
3

n
GARAGE

Appendices Page H-23

 -User Notes-

Page H - 24 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3

 NI3L28 Function

PATIO

[]— H
/
''H

o
- r
o
Do
\

o
11 1001 o []

^ A\
o
O
J NTO1
/ A
o 9
0 p / JBS3$ <*
R- o
9
• X
lg / &L -a— a-
PORCH
©

GARAGE
KSL
^ :
0
A
I

5 10
r
3

20ft

& »

Appendices Page H - 25
 -User Notes-

Page H-26 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3

L_ NI3L28 Grammar (Front )
r T~
~
n
1 1
1 1 1
I’m sleepy today. I’m tired now.

b + H
1 1 1
1 1 1
I’m ready to go to dinner. I want some ice cream.

1 1 1
b + H
! 1 1
1
I forgot my notebook. I enjoy studying English.

1 1 1
b + H

Tj - r
I m happy about
i , ,
my test score.
,
' I spend
r too much time at the li-
,

b + H
1 1
1 1 1
I drink a lot of tea everyday. I know all my classmates.

1 1
L _L J

Appendices Page H - 27
 NI3L28 Grammar (Back )
r n

He said (that ) he was tired now. He said (that) he was sleepy today.

b H

He said (that ) he wanted some ice He said (that) he was ready to go to

cream. dinner.

He said ( that ) he enjoyed studying He said (that ) he forgot his notebook.

English.

He said ( that ) he spent too much time He said (that ) he was happy about
at the library. his test score.

J
b

He said (that) he knew all his He said (that ) he drank a lot of tea
classmates. everyday.

L J

Page H - 28 Nonintensive ALC, Volume 3

-
G JJ -
U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 2008-756 005/20044